436962

Texas Instruments ti 73 Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/364
Pagina verder
$Titlepg.doc TI-73: Title Page/Important Notice, English Bob Fedorisko Revised: 06/10/03 8:45 AM Printed:
06/10/03 8:58 AM Page 1 of 2
ti
T
TT
TI
II
I-
--
-7
77
73
33
3 E
EE
Ex
xx
xp
pp
pl
ll
lo
oo
or
rr
re
ee
er
rr
r™
™™
™
G
GG
Gr
rr
ra
aa
ap
pp
ph
hh
hi
ii
in
nn
ng
gg
g C
CC
Ca
aa
al
ll
lc
cc
cu
uu
ul
ll
la
aa
at
tt
to
oo
or
rr
r G
GG
Gu
uu
ui
ii
id
dd
de
ee
eb
bb
bo
oo
oo
oo
ok
kk
k
In this guidebook, TI-73 refers to both the TI-73 and
TI-73 Explorer. All functions, instructions, and examples in
this guidebook work identically for both the TI-73 and the
TI-73 Explorer.
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
© 1998, 2001–2003 Texas Instruments Incorporated
$Titlepg.doc TI-73: Title Page/Important Notice, English Bob Fedorisko Revised: 06/10/03 8:45 AM Printed:
06/10/03 8:45 AM Page 2 of 2
$Titlepg.doc TI-73: Title Page/Important Notice, English Bob Fedorisko Revised: 06/10/03 8:45 AM Printed:
06/10/03 8:45 AM Page 2 of 2
$Titlepg.doc TI-73: Title Page/Important Notice, English Bob Fedorisko Revised: 06/10/03 8:45 AM Printed:
06/10/03 8:45 AM Page 2 of 2
Important Information
Texas Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied,
including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose, regarding any programs or book
materials and makes such materials available solely on an “as-is” basis.
In no event shall Texas Instruments be liable to anyone for special,
collateral, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with or
arising out of the purchase or use of these materials, and the sole and
exclusive liability of Texas Instruments, regardless of the form of action,
shall not exceed the purchase price of this calculator. Moreover, Texas
Instruments shall not be liable for any claim of any kind whatsoever
against the use of these materials by any other party.
US FCC Information Concerning Radio Frequency
Interference
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference with
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
you can try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
¦
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
¦
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
¦
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly
approved by Texas Instruments may void your authority to operate the
equipment.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference
Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
7300ENG.DOC TI-73: Table of Contents, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/04/98 4:48 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page iii of 4
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 1
Preparing to Use Your TIN73.........................................3
The Home Screen...........................................................5
Entering Numbers and Other Characters .....................6
Functions and Instructions ..........................................12
Entering Expressions....................................................15
Retrieving Previous Entries - £ ...................... 17
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer - ¢ ......18
Mode Settings..............................................................22
Chapter 2: Math Operations 25
Keyboard Math Operations ........................................27
The 1 MATH Menu ................................................ 34
The 1 NUM Menu .................................................. 44
The 1 PRB Menu ....................................................49
The 1 LOG Menu.................................................... 54
Chapter 3: Fractions 57
Entering Fractions........................................................58
Using Fractions in Calculations ...................................59
Fraction Modes ............................................................60
Converting between Fractions and Decimals............. 64
Converting between Mixed Numbers and
Simple Fractions......................................................65
Chapter 4: Measurement Conversions and
Constant Calculations 67
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu.......................68
Constants......................................................................71
Chapter 5: Lists 77
Steps for Creating a List ..............................................78
The List Editor 3 ....................................................79
Naming a List ...............................................................79
Entering List Elements .................................................81
Editing Lists in the List Editor...................................... 87
The - v Ls Menu .................................................91
The - v OPS Menu ..............................................92
List Commands from the Home Screen ....................102
iv
TIN73 Table of Contents
7300ENG.DOC TI-73: Table of Contents, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/04/98 4:48 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page iv of 4
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 107
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot ................................... 108
Defining Statistical Data in Lists ............................... 109
Deselecting Y
n
Functions .......................................... 109
Defining a Stat Plot ................................................... 109
Selecting Stat Plot Types ........................................... 111
Defining Stat Plot Options........................................ 112
Adjusting Window Values and Format .................... 114
Displaying the Stat Plot............................................. 114
Stat Plot Examples ..................................................... 114
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 127
The - v MATH Menu........................................ 128
The - v CALC Menu.......................................... 133
Chapter 8: Tables 149
What Is a Table? ........................................................ 150
Steps for Creating a Table ........................................ 151
Defining and Selecting Functions in the
Y= Editor &........................................................ 152
Setting Up the Table - f ............................ 153
Displaying the Table - i............................... 154
Table Setup from the Home Screen ......................... 161
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 163
Steps for Graphing a Function.................................. 164
Example of Function Graphing................................. 165
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor & ................. 167
Selecting a Graph Style ............................................. 169
Setting the Window Format - g................ 171
Defining Window Values .......................................... 173
Displaying a Graph *....................................... 177
Adjusting Window Values with
the ( ZOOM Menu ........................................ 181
The ( MEMORY Menu........................................ 185
Chapter 10: Drawing 187
The 2 DRAW Menu ............................................. 188
The 2 POINTS Menu............................................ 201
The 2 STO Menu ................................................. 206
TIN73 Table of Contents
v
7300ENG.DOC TI-73: Table of Contents, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/04/98 4:48 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page v of 4
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 209
The - u TRIG Menu ...........................................210
Graphing Trig Functions............................................214
The - u ANGLE Menu ....................................... 215
Chapter 12: Programming 221
What Is a Program? ...................................................223
Steps for Creating a Program.................................... 223
Creating and Naming a New Program .....................224
Entering Program Commands...................................226
The 8 CTL Menu ..................................................227
The 8 I/O Menu....................................................241
Editing Program Commands .....................................248
Executing a Program .................................................251
Debugging a Program...............................................252
Chapter 13: Communication Link and the
CBLàCBR Application 253
TIN73 Link Capabilities...............................................254
The Link SEND Menu 9 1 ...................................255
The Link RECEIVE Menu 9 1 "..........................257
Transmitting Data Items............................................258
Backing Up Memory ..................................................261
Upgrading your TIN73 Graph Explorer Software.....262
The APPLICATIONS Menu 9...............................263
Steps for Running the CBLàCBR Application ..........264
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application ...........................265
Specifying the Data Collection Method ...................265
Specifiying Data Collection Options.........................266
Collecting the Data....................................................273
Stopping Data Collection ..........................................274
Chapter 14: Memory Management 275
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu...................................276
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 283
vi
TI-73 Table of Contents
$Toc.doc TI-73: Table of Contents Bob Fedorisko Revised: 06/09/03 1:15 PM Printed: 06/10/03 8:24 AM Page vi
of 5
Appendix B: Reference Information 319
The TI
N
73 Menu Map ................................................ 320
The VARS Menu
-
}
....................................... 329
Equation Operating System (EOS
é
)........................ 330
In Case of Difficulty ................................................... 330
Correcting an Error.................................................... 331
Error Messages........................................................... 332
Appendix C: Battery
à
Service and
Warranty Information 339
Battery Information .................................................. 340
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and Service ............. 342
Warranty Information............................................... 343
Index 345
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 1 of 24
Operating the Operating the
TITIN
7373
Preparing to Use Your TIN73................................................. 3
Installing the AAA Batteries...........................................3
Turning the TIN73 On and Off ....................................... 3
Adjusting the Display Contrast ......................................4
Resetting Memory and All Defaults...............................4
The Home Screen................................................................... 5
Entering Numbers and Other Characters.............................6
Entering a Negative Number a...................................6
Entering a Number in Scientific Notation - {.......7
Entering Secondary Functions -............................... 7
Entering Text - t.................................................7
Common Display Cursors ..............................................10
Editing Numbers and Characters .................................11
Functions and Instructions ..................................................12
Accessing Functions and Instructions from Menus .....12
Accessing FunctionsàInstructions from the CATALOG... 14
Entering Expressions............................................................15
Grouping Parts of Expressions with Parentheses ........16
Using Implied Multiplication in Expressions................16
Entering Multiple Expressions on One Line ................16
Retrieving Previous Entries - £..............................17
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer - ¢..............18
Continuing a Calculation with Ans ..............................18
Using Ans as a Variable in an Expression ....................19
Storing Values to a Variable X .............................20
Recalling Variable Values - P .............................21
1
2
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 2 of 24
Mode Settings ..................................................................... 22
Numeric Notation Mode .............................................. 23
Decimal Notation Mode ............................................... 24
Angle Mode .................................................................. 24
Display Format Mode ................................................... 24
Simplification Mode ..................................................... 24
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
3
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 3 of 24
Preparing to Use Your
TIN
73
Before using your TIN73, you must install the batteries, turn on
the calculator, and adjust the contrast. You may reset (clear)
the calculator memory and defaults, if desired.
Installing the AAA BatteriesInstalling the AAA Batteries
Install four AAA batteries in the battery compartment on the
back of the calculator. Arrange the batteries according to the
polarity (+ and -) diagram in the battery compartment. For
more information about installing batteries, see Appendix C:
BatteryàService and Warranty Information.
Turning the Turning the
TITIN
7373
On and Off On and Off
To turn on the TIN73, press ^.
To turn off the TIN73 manually,
press the yellow - key and
then press ^ (indicated in this
book as - ).
When you press - , all settings and memory contents are
retained by Constant Memoryè. Any error condition is
cleared. To prolong battery life, the APDè (Automatic Power
Down) feature turns the TIN73 off automatically after a few
minutes without any activity.
When you turn on the calculator:
• The Home screen is displayed if you previously turned off
the calculator by pressing - . It appears as it did
when you last used it; all errors are cleared.
 or 
• The calculator displays the last screen (including the
display, cursor, and any errors) that was displayed before
Automatic Power Down turned off the calculator.
4
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 4 of 24
Adjusting the Display ContrastAdjusting the Display Contrast
The brightness and contrast of the display can depend on
room lighting, battery freshness, and viewing angle.
To adjust the contrast:
1. Press and release the yellow - key.
2. Press and hold $ (to darken the screen) or # (to lighten
the screen).
As you change the contrast setting, a number from 0 (lightest)
to 9 (darkest) in the top-right corner indicates the current
setting. You may not be able to see the number if the contrast
is too light or too dark.
Resetting Memory and All DefaultsResetting Memory and All Defaults
Follow these steps to reset the TIN73 to its factory settings
and clear all memory:
1. Turn on the calculator.
^
2. Display the
MEMORY
menu.
-Ÿ (above _ )
3. Display the
RESET
menu.
7
4. Display the
RESET RAM
menu.
1
The
^
key
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
5
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 5 of 24
5. Select
2:Reset
.
2
All memory is cleared, and the calculator is reset to the factory
settings.
When you reset the TIN73, the display contrast is reset. To
adjust the contrast, follow the directions in the previous
section.
The Home Screen
The Home screen is the primary
screen of the TIN73. To go to the
Home screen from any other
screen or menu, press - l.
On the Home screen, you can enter instructions, functions,
and expressions. The answers are displayed on the Home
screen. The TIN73 screen can display a maximum of eight lines
with a maximum of 16 characters per line.
When you calculate an entry on
the Home screen, depending
upon space, the answer is
displayed either directly to the
right of the entry or on the right
side of the next line.
If an entry is longer than one line
on the Home screen, it wraps to
the beginning of the next line.
6
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 6 of 24
If all lines of the display are full,
text scrolls off the top of the
display. The TIN73 stores the
previous entries as memory
permits. See the section entitled,
Retrieving Previous Entries on
page 17.
You can scroll up with $ to see
previously entered entries
.
If you
press b while a previous
entry is highlighted (for
example, 2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2),
the calculator copies it to a new
line below all entries (after
4+4+4 and its result, 52).
To clear the Home screen, see the section entitled Editing
Numbers and Characters on page 11.
Entering Numbers and Other
Characters
A symbol or abbreviation of each keys primary function is
printed in white on the key. When you press that key, the
function name is inserted at the cursor location.
Entering a Negative Number Entering a Negative Number a
You enter a negative number with the negation key, a. You
can use negation to modify a number, expression, or each
element in a list. Notice that this is different from the
subtraction key, T, which CANNOT be used for negation.
Subtract M14 N 68.
-l:
a
14
T
68
b
³
Scroll up
with
$
.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 7 of 24
Entering a Number in Scientific Notation Entering a Number in Scientific Notation -
{
Using
-
{
, you can enter a number in scientific notation.
The notation used to display the result of a calculation
depends upon the
.
setting (
Normal
or
Sci
). For more
information on selecting modes, see the section in this chapter
entitled Mode Settings.
Add 30
©
4 + 8600.
-l:
30
-{\
8600
b
Entering Secondary Functions Entering Secondary Functions -
The secondary function of each key is printed in yellow above
the key. When you press the yellow - key, the yellow
character, abbreviation, or word above a key, becomes active
for the next keystroke.
Entering Text Entering Text
-
t
Many examples in this manual require you to enter alphabetic
characters, braces, a quotation mark, a space, or test
operators. You can access all of these from the Text editor.
To exit the Text editor without saving the contents on the
entry line, press - l, and the calculator returns you to
the Home screen.
³
MATH
The - ke
y
TEXT
If in
Normal
mode
-
t
, which is the same as pressing
-
and
then
1
, displays the Text editor.
If in
Sci
mode
1
displays four math menus.
8
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 8 of 24
In all guidebook examples, when a character in the Text editor
needs to be selected, the keystroke sequence shows the
character followed by b. Moving the Selection Cursor as
necessary to highlight the character is implied. To exit the
Text editor and display the contents on the entry line on the
previous screen, select
Done
.
-t
Selection Cursor
Highlights the character you want to
select. Use the cursor keys (", !, $, and
#) to move the cursor.
A
is highlighted
with the selection cursor in the - t
example screen.
Letters
(A-Z)
Lists letters A-Z in alphabetical order.
List Braces
{ }
Surround a set of numbers separated by
commas to create a list (outside of the List
editor). For example,
{1,2,3}
on the Home
screen is interpreted as a list.
Quotation Mark (
"
) Surrounds the first text element in a
categorical list or surrounds an attached
list formula. (See Chapter 5: Lists for more
information.)
Space (
_
) Places a space between characters. It is
frequently used in programs.
Test Operators
=, , >, , <,
Used to compare two values.
Logic (Boolean)
Operators
and, or
Used to interpret values as zero (false) or
nonzero (true).
The entry line
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
9
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 9 of 24
Done
Exits the Text editor when selected and
pastes all contents on the entry line to the
cursor location on the previous screen.
Entry Line
Displays all currently selected characters.
A
ll edit keys, except the cursor keys, edit
characters on the entry line.
Insert R on the Home screen.
1. Go to the Home screen and
clear it, if desired.
-l:
2. Use the Text editor to
select
R
.
-t
R
b
3. Exit the Text editor.
Done
b
Test and Logic (Boolean) Operators
You select test and logic operators exactly as you would a
letter. Both types of operators are explained in detail in
Chapter 2: Math Operations.
³
Use
$
,
#
,
"
, and
!
to highlight
R
.
R
is pasted to
the entry line.
The Home
screen
10
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 10 of 24
Entry Line
The entry line displays all characters selected in the Text
editor. The entry line also accepts all number keys (Y, Z,
[, ) and many keyboard operations (6, I, \, C, etc.).
Enter these between Text editor characters, as necessary,
without leaving the Text editor.
If you press a key that isnt accepted in the Text editor, the
calculator does not return an error. You must select
Done
to
exit and then continue your entry on the previous screen.
You can enter up to 16 characters on the entry line. If you need
to enter more than 16 characters, select
Done
to save your
entry. Then reenter the Text editor, and continue entering
additional characters.
Common Display CursorsCommon Display Cursors
In most cases, the appearance of the cursor indicates what
happens when you press the next key or select the next menu
item.
If you press - while the Insert Cursor (Û) is displayed, the
underline cursor becomes an underlined #.
Cursor Appearance Effect of Next Keystroke
Entry Solid Rectangle
Ù
A character is entered at the
cursor; any existing character is
overwritten.
Insert Underline
Ú
A character is inserted in front
of the cursor location.
Second Reverse Arrow
Û
A 2nd character (yellow on the
keyboard) is entered, or a 2nd
operation is executed.
Full Checkerboard
Rectangle
Ø
No entry; the maximum
characters are entered at a
prompt, or memory is full.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
11
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 11 of 24
Editing Numbers and CharactersEditing Numbers and Characters
Using the edit keys, you can edit an entry on the Home screen
or Y= editor, programming commands in the Program editor,
the entry lines of the Text editor and List editor, and constants
in the Set Constant editor.
Keystrokes Result
! or " Moves the cursor to the left or right. Moves the
Selection cursor in the Text editor.
$ or # Moves/scrolls the cursor up or down.
- ! Moves the cursor to the beginning of an entry.
- " Moves the cursor to the end of an entry.
: • Within a line on the Home screen, it
clears all characters to the right of the
cursor.
• At the beginning or end of a line on the
Home screen, it clears the current line.
• On a blank line on the Home screen, it
clears everything on the Home screen.
• In an editor, it clears the expression or
value where the cursor is located.
/ Deletes the character at the cursor.
- m Inserts characters in front of a character; to
end insertion, press - m or press !, ", $
or #.
< Inserts a character before a fraction on the
Home screen. (- m inserts a character
before a fraction on any other screen.)
I Inserts the variable
X
at the cursor location.
12
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 12 of 24
Functions and Instructions
A function returns a value. Generally, the first letter of each
function is lowercase on the TIN73. For example,
pxl-Test(
is a
function because it returns a value,
0
or
1
.
An instruction initiates an action. Generally, the first letter of
each instruction name is uppercase. For example,
Pxl-On(
is an
instruction that draws a pixel on the graph screen.
Most functions and some instructions take at least one
argument. An open parenthesis (
(
) at the end of the function or
instruction name prompts you to enter an argument. Complete
the function with an end parenthesis, E.
Note: Do not use the Text editor to enter names of functions
or instructions. For example, you cannot enter
L
, then
O
, then
G
to calculate the log
of a value. If you did this, the calculator
would interpret the entry as implied multiplication of the
variables
L
,
O
, and
G
.
When this guidebook describes the syntax of a function or
instruction, each argument is in italics. Optional arguments for
a function are signified by brackets [ ]. Do not enter the
brackets.
Accessing Functions and Instructions from MenusAccessing Functions and Instructions from Menus
You can find most functions and instructions on menus (in
other words, not directly from the keyboard).
Displaying a Menu
To display a menu, press the key associated with the menu. Up
to four separate menus are displayed from which you choose
the menu item you want.
1
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
13
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 13 of 24
To move from menu to menu on a menu screen, press " or !
until the menu name is highlighted.
When a menu item ends in an ellipsis (), the item displays a
secondary menu or editor when you select it.
-‚
Accessing and Selecting Menu Items
To scroll up or down the menu items, press $ or #. To wrap
to the last menu item directly from the first menu item, press
$. To wrap to the first menu item directly from the last menu
item, press #.
When the menu continues beyond the displayed items, a $
replaces the colon next to the last displayed item.
Select a menu item in one of two ways:
• Press # or $ to move the cursor to the number or letter
of the item, and then press b.
• Press the number key for the number next to the item. If
a letter is next to the item, access letters from the Text
editor (- t).
After you select an item from a menu, you usually are returned
to the initial screen where you were working.
Exiting a Menu without Making a Selection
Exit a menu without making a selection in one of three ways:
• Press : to return to the screen where you were.
• Press - l to return to the Home screen.
• Press a key or key sequence for another menu or for
another screen (except - t, which is not accessible
from all screens).
14
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 14 of 24
Accessing FunctionsAccessing Functionsà
Instructions from theInstructions from the
CATALOGCATALOG
- | displays the
CATALOG
, which is an alphabetical
list of all functions, instructions, programming commands,
variables, and symbols on the TIN73. If, for example, you
cannot remember where a particular menu item is located, you
can find it in the
CATALOG
.
Items that begin with a number are in alphabetical order
according to the first letter after the number. For example,
1-Var Stats
is among the items that begin with
V
.
Items that are symbols follow the last item that begins with
Z
.
You can access the symbols quickly by pressing $ from the
first catalog item,
A
§
b/c
. The cursor moves to the bottom of the
list.
-|
To select an item from the
CATALOG
:
1. Press - | to display the
CATALOG
. The Selection
Cursor always points to the first item.
2. Press $ or # to scroll the
CATALOG
until the Selection
Cursor points to the item you want.
To jump to the first item beginning with a particular letter,
select that letter from the Text editor. Press - t
while in the
CATALOG
, use the cursor keys to highlight the
letter you want, and then press b. You are
automatically returned to the
CATALOG
, and the Selection
Cursor has now moved to the new section. Scroll to the
item you want.
3. Press b to paste the
CATALOG
item to the current
screen.
Selection Cursor
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
15
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 15 of 24
Enter the
CATALOG
and go directly to the section starting with
L.
1. Go to the
CATALOG.
-|
2. Select
L
from Text editor.
-t
L
b
Selecting
¨
by pressing b pastes it to the previous screen,
just as if you had selected it from a menu.
Entering Expressions
An expression is a group of numbers, variables, functions and
their arguments, or a combination of these elements that
evaluates to a single answer. Instructions cannot be used in
expressions. An expression is completed when you press
b, regardless of the cursor location.
On the TIN73, you enter an expression in the same order as
you would write it on paper. The entire expression is
evaluated according to the Equation Operating System (EOS
)
rules (which is explained in detail in Appendix B: Reference
Information), and the answer is displayed.
Calculate the area (A) of a circle whose radius (R)=3 using the
formula A=pR
2
. Then use the area to calculate the volume (V)
of a cylinder whose height (H)=4. Use the formula V=AQH.
-l:
-„
3
6b
³
³
16
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 16 of 24
M
4
b
Grouping Parts of Expressions with ParenthesesGrouping Parts of Expressions with Parentheses
The calculator calculates an expression within parentheses
first.
Calculate 4(1+2).
-l:
4
D
1
\
2
Eb
Using Implied Multiplication in ExpressionsUsing Implied Multiplication in Expressions
The calculator understands that two numbers separated by
parentheses are multiplied together.
Calculate 4Q3 using parentheses.
-l:
4
D
3
Eb
Entering Multiple Expressions on One LineEntering Multiple Expressions on One Line
To store more than one expression on a line, separate two or
more expressions or instructions on a line with a colon
(- | $ $ $ b)
.
Define the variable, R=5, and then calculate pR
2
on the same
line.
1. Store 5 to
R
.
-l:
5
X-t
R
b
Done
b
-|
$$$b
³
³
³
Ans
is the previous
answer, 28.27433388.
4(1+2)=4(3)=12
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
17
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 17 of 24
2. Enter the second
expression,
pR
2
, and
calculate the result.
-„-t
R
b
Done
b
6b
Retrieving Previous Entries -
£
When you press b on the Home screen to evaluate an
expression or execute an instruction, the expression or
instruction is placed in a storage area called
Entry
(last entry).
When you turn off the TIN73,
Entry
is retained in memory.
You can retrieve the last entry to the current cursor location,
where you can edit it, if desired, and then execute it. On the
Home screen or in an editor, press - £; the current line
is cleared and the last entry is pasted to the line.
The TIN73 retains as many previous entries as memory
permits. To cycle through these entries, press - £
repeatedly. To view stored entries, use $ to scroll up the
Home screen.
Store 1 to variable A, 1 to variable B, and then 3 to variable A
using - £.
1. Store 1 to
A
.
-l:
1
X-t
A
b
Done
b
b
2. Recall the last entry.
-£
³
18
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 18 of 24
3. Edit and enter the new
expression.
!-t
B
b
Done
b
b
4. Cycle back two entries.
-£-£
5. Edit and enter the new
expression.
!!!
3
b
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer
-
¢
When an expression is evaluated successfully from the Home
screen or from a program, the TIN73 stores the answer to a
system variable called
Ans
(last answer). Recall
Ans
by
pressing - ¢.
Ans
can be a real number or a list. When you
turn off the TIN73, the value in
Ans
is retained in memory.
You can use the variable
Ans
in any place that is appropriate
for the type of answer
Ans
represents. For example, if
Ans
is a
real number, you can use it anywhere where real numbers are
accepted (Y= editor,
WINDOW
, List editor, etc.).
Continuing a Calculation with AnsContinuing a Calculation with Ans
You can recall
Ans
as the first entry in the next expression
without entering the value again or pressing - ¢. After
completing a calculation, press an operation or function key
(excluding <, =, or @) and the calculator displays
Ans
and uses the value in the next calculation.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
19
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 19 of 24
1. Calculate 3
4
using the
Ans
feature.
-l:
3
M
3
b
M
3
b
M
3
b
2. Check your answer, if
desired.
3
7
4
b
Using Ans as a Variable in an ExpressionUsing Ans as a Variable in an Expression
Since
Ans
is a variable, you can use it in expressions just as
you would any other variable. When the expression is
evaluated, the TIN73 uses the value of
Ans
in the calculation.
For more information about variables, see the next two
sections in this chapter entitled, Storing Values to a Variable
and Recalling Variable Values.
Calculate the area of a garden plot 1.7 meters by 4.2 meters.
Then calculate the yield per square meter if the plot produces
a total of 147 tomatoes.
1. Calculate the area.
-l:
1.7
M
4.2
b
2. Divide 147 by
Ans
, which
was calculated in the first
step.
147
F-¢b
³
³
Ans=7.14
20
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 20 of 24
Storing Values to a Variable Storing Values to a Variable X
You can store values or expressions that result in one value or
lists to a one-letter variable or a system variable (types are
listed below) to save for later use. Also, you can save a result
for later use by storing
Ans
to a variable before you evaluate
another expression.
When an expression containing the name of a variable is
evaluated, the value of the variable at that time is used. You
can enter and use several types of data for variables, including
real numbers, lists, functions, statistical plots, and graph
pictures.
Variable names cannot be the same as a name that is
preassigned by the TIN73. These include built-in functions
such as
abs(
, instructions such as
Line(
, and system variables
such as
Xmin
.
Variable Type Names
Real Numbers
A
,
B
, ,
Z
(
-
t
)
ListsNumerical
and Categorical
L
1
,
L
2
,
L
3
,
L
4
,
L
5
,
L
6
, and any user-defined
list names (
-
v
Ls
)
Functions
Y
1
,
Y
2
,
Y
3
,
Y
4
(
-
}
2:Y-Vars
)
Stat Plots
Plot1
,
Plot2
,
Plot3
(
-
e
from the
Program editor)
Graph Pictures
Pic1
,
Pic2
,
Pic3
(
-
}
4:Picture
)
System Variables
Xmin
,
Xmax
,  (
-
}
1:Window
)
Store a value to either a system variable or a letter variable
from the Home screen or a program using the
X
key. Begin
on a blank line and follow these steps.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
21
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 21 of 24
1. Enter the numeric value. It can be an expression that
results in a numeric value.
2. Press X. " is copied to the cursor location.
3. Select the type of variable to which you want to store the
value. Use the Text editor (- t) to enter a letter
variable, the
VARS
(- }) menu to enter a system
variable, or the - v
Ls
menu to enter a list name.
4. Press b. If you entered an expression, it is evaluated.
The value is stored to the variable.
Store 10 to R, and then calculate pR
2
.
1. On the Home screen, store
10 to
R
.
-l:
10
X-t
R
b
Done
b
b
2. Calculate
pR
2
.
-„-t
R
b
Done
b
6b
Recalling Variable Values Recalling Variable Values
-
P
To recall a variables value to the current cursor location,
follow these steps. To leave
Rcl
, press :.
1. Press - P.
Rcl
and the edit cursor are displayed on
the bottom line of the screen.
2. Enter the name of the variable in any of four ways:
• Enter letters using the Text editor (- t).
• Press - v, and then select the name of the list
from the
Ls
menu.
³
22
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 22 of 24
• Press - } to display the
VARS
menu; next select
the type and then the name of the variable or
function.
• Press 8 (from the Program editor only), and then
select the name of the program to call a program as a
subroutine within another program.
3. The variable name you selected is displayed on the
bottom line and the cursor disappears.
4. Press b. The variable contents are inserted where the
cursor was located before you began these steps.
Calculate 100+R using the
Rcl
function. (R was defined in the
previous section, Storing Variable Values.)
1. On the Home screen, enter
the first part of the
calculation.
-l:
100
\
2. Recall
R
.
-P-t
R
b
Done
b
3. Finish the calculation.
b
b
Mode Settings
Mode settings control how the TIN73 interprets and displays
numbers. Mode settings are retained by the Constant Memory
feature when the TIN73 is turned off. All numbers, including
elements of lists, are displayed according to the current mode
settings, as applicable. To display the mode settings, press
.. The default settings are highlighted on the following
screen.
³
R
=10
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
23
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 23 of 24
To select a mode setting, highlight the one you want by using
the cursor keys, and then press b.
.
Normal Sci
Numeric Notation mode
Float 0123456789
Decimal Notation mode
Degree Radian
A
ngle mode
A
§
b/c b/c
Display Format mode (fractions only)
Autosimp Mansimp
Simplification mode (fractions only)
Numeric Notation ModeNumeric Notation Mode
The Numeric Notation mode settings affect the way an answer
is displayed on the TIN73. Numeric answers can be displayed
with up to 10 digits and a two-digit exponent. Answers
(excluding fractional ones) on the Home screen, list elements
in the List editor, and table elements on the Table screen are
displayed according to the Numeric Notation mode selected.
The
Normal
setting displays results with digits to the left and
right of the decimal, as in
123456.78
.
The
Sci
(scientific) setting expresses numbers with one digit to
the left of the decimal and the appropriate power of 10 to the
right of
©
, as in
1.2345678
©
5
, (which is the same as
123456.78
).
Note: Answers that have more than 10 digits and whose
absolute value is greater than .001 are displayed in scientific
notation.
Default
Settings
24
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
7301ENG.DOC CH1 Operating the TI-73, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:55 AM Printed: 05/19/99
8:58 AM Page 24 of 24
Decimal Notation ModeDecimal Notation Mode
The Decimal Notation mode has two settings,
Float
and
0123456789
, which only affect the way an answer is displayed
on the TIN73.
The
Float
(floating decimal point) setting displays up to 10
digits, plus the sign and decimal.
The
0123456789
(fixed decimal point) setting specifies the
number of digits (
0
through
9
) to display to the right of the
decimal. Place the cursor on the desired number of decimal
digits, and then press b.
The decimal setting applies to answers (excluding fractional
ones) on the Home screen, X- and Y-coordinates on a graph
display, list elements in the List editor, table elements on the
Table screen, and regression model results.
Angle ModeAngle Mode
The Angle mode has two settings,
Degree
and
Radian
, which
control how the TIN73 interprets angle values in trigonometric
functions. See Chapter 11: Trigonometry for a detailed
explanation.
Display Format ModeDisplay Format Mode
The Display Format mode has two settings,
A
§
b/c
and
b/c
,
which determine if a fraction is displayed as a mixed or simple
fraction. See Chapter 3: Fractions for a detailed explanation.
Simplification ModeSimplification Mode
The Simplification mode has two settings,
Autosimp
and
Mansimp
, which determine if the calculator automatically
simplifies a fractional result completely or if you must simplify
the results manually step-by-step. See Chapter 3: Fractions for
detailed information.
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 25 of 32
Math OperationsMath Operations
Keyboard Math Operations ................................................27
Basic Operations \, T, M, F.....................................27
Integer Division - Œ............................................28
p - „........................................................................ 28
Percent C....................................................................29
Inverse Function - ƒ .............................................30
Square 6 ....................................................................30
Power 7 ......................................................................31
Square Root - z .................................................... 31
Test Operations - t...........................................32
The 1 MATH Menu ........................................................34
lcm( 1 1 ..................................................................35
gcd( 1 2.................................................................. 36
3
(Cube)
1 3 ...........................................................37
3
( 1 4 ....................................................................38
x
1 5 .....................................................................38
Solver 1 6...............................................................38
The 1 NUM Menu..........................................................44
abs( 1 " 1.............................................................. 44
round( 1 " 2 .........................................................45
iPart( and fPart( 1 " 3 and 4 ...............................46
min( and max( 1 " 5 and 6..................................47
remainder( 1 " 7..................................................48
The 1 PRB Menu ............................................................49
rand 1 " " 1 ........................................................49
randInt( 1 " " 2 ..................................................50
nPr 1 " " 3 ..........................................................51
nCr 1 " " 4 ..........................................................51
! 1 " " 5 ..............................................................52
coin( 1 " " 6........................................................53
dice( 1 " " 7........................................................53
2
26
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 26 of 32
The 1 LOG Menu ........................................................... 54
log( 1 " " " 1 .................................................... 54
10^( 1 " " " 2.................................................... 55
ln( 1 " " " 3 ...................................................... 55
e^( 1 " " " 4...................................................... 56
Chapter 2: Math Operations
27
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 27 of 32
Keyboard Math Operations
The following sections explain how to use the math functions,
including - functions, found on the TIN73 keyboard. All of
the examples in these sections assume that you are on the
Home screen and that defaults are selected (unless specified
otherwise).
Real numbers include fractions unless specified otherwise.
Basic Operations Basic Operations \
, , T
, , M
, , F
Returns the sum (\), difference (T), product (M), or quotient
(F) of valueA and valueB, which can be real numbers,
expressions, or lists.
If both values are lists, they must have the same number of
elements. If one value is a list and the other is a non-list, the
non-list is paired with each element of the list, and a list is
returned.
valueA + valueB
valueA N valueB
valueA ¦ valueB
valueA P valueB
Add M456 + 123.
:a
456
\
123
b
Divide 45.68 P 123.
45
.
68
F
123
b
Multiply log(20) Q cos(60).
1"""
1
20
EM-u
3
60
Eb
³
³
³
In
Degree
mode
28
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 28 of 32
Integer Division Integer Division -
Œ
-
Œ
divides two positive integers and displays the
quotient and the remainder,
r
.
posintegerA
Intà
posintegerB
You can include integer division in an expression, but the
remainder may not be displayed as part of the final answer.
After a calculation with
-
Œ
is completed, only the
quotient from the result is stored in
Ans
(last answer).
Therefore, if you use the result in another calculation, the
remainder is ignored.
Calculate 11 P 2 using integer
division.
:
11
-Œ
2
b
p
-
„
Represents the value for the constant, p, in calculations. The
calculator uses p=3.1415926535898, although it only displays
3.141592654 on the screen. p acts as a real number in any
calculation.
Multiply 4 Q p.
:
4
M-
„b
³
³
5
2
11
10
1
remainder=1
quotient=5
5r1
2
11
10
The result includes
the quotient and the
remainder,
r
.
1
Chapter 2: Math Operations
29
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 29 of 32
Calculate sin(p).
:-u
1
-
„E b
Percent Percent
C
Changes a real_number to percent. Results display according
to the Decimal Notation mode setting.
real_number%
Convert M30.6% to a decimal.
1. Select Float Decimal
setting.
.#b
-l
2. Convert M30.6% to a
decimal.
:a
30.6
C
b
Calculate 20% of 30.
20
CM
30
b
Calculate 30 + 20% of 30.
30
\
20
CM
30
b
³
³
³
³
If in
Radian
mode
If in
Degree
mode
30
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 30 of 32
Inverse Function Inverse Function -
ƒ
Returns the inverse, x
-1
, of value, which is the equivalent of the
reciprocal,
1
/
x
, of a real number, expression, or each element
in a list.
value
-1
Important: To ensure that results are displayed as simple
fractions instead of mixed numbers, select
b/c
Display Format
mode.
Calculate
5
/
8
-1
.
:
5
=
8
"-ƒ
b
Calculate M2.5
-1
.
a
2.5
-ƒb
Square Square 6
Finds the square of a real number, an expression, or each
element in a list. Note: Using parentheses with
6
ensures
that you get the correct answer. Refer to Appendix B:
Reference Information for Equation Operating System (EOS)
calculation rules.
value
2
Calculate 5
2
.
:
5
6b
Compare the results of M5
2
and (M5)
2.
.
1. Calculate M5
2
.
a
5
6b
³
³
³
³
Chapter 2: Math Operations
31
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 31 of 32
2. Calculate (M5)
2.
.
Da
5
E6b
Power Power
7
Raises value to any power. value and power can be real
numbers, expression, or lists. If both are lists, they must have
the same number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each element of the
list, and a list is returned.
value^power
value is limited by mathematical rules. For example, (M4)^.5
results in an error because this is the equivalent of (M4)^
1
/
2
,
which is
M4, a complex number.
Calculate 2
5
.
:
2
7
5
b
Square Root Square Root
-
z
Calculates the square root of value, which can be a positive
real number, an expression that results in a positive real
number, or a list of positive numbers.
(value
)
Calculate 256.
:-z
256
E
b
³
³
32
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 32 of 32
Test Operations Test Operations -
t
The two types of test operations included in the Text editor
are relational operators (
=
,
,
>
,
,
<
, and
) and logic (Boolean)
operators (
and
and
or
).
Both relational and logic operators often are used in programs
to control program flow and in graphing to control the graph
as a function over specific values.
Relational Operators
Relational operators compare conditionA and conditionB and
return
1
if the conditional statement is true. They return
0
if
the conditional statement is false. conditionA and conditionB
can be real numbers, expressions, or lists.
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one condition is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
Test operations are frequently used in programs.
conditionA
relational_operator
conditionB
Relational operators are evaluated after mathematical
functions according to EOS rules (Appendix B: Reference
Information). Therefore, for 2+2=2+3, the TI-73 returns
0
. It
compares 4 with 5 and returns 0, because the operation is
false. For 2+(2=2)+3, the TI-73 returns
6
. The relational test in
parentheses returns 1, because the operation is true. Then it
adds 2+(1)+3.
Chapter 2: Math Operations
33
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 33 of 32
Operator: Returns true (1) if:
=
(equal) Two conditions are equal.
(not equal to) Two conditions are not equal.
>
(greater than) conditionA is greater than conditionB.
(greater than or
equal to)
conditionA is greater than or equal to
conditionB.
<
(less than) conditionA is less than conditionB.
(less than or
equal to)
conditionA is less than or equal to
conditionB.
Logic (Boolean) Operators
Logic (Boolean) operators compare conditionA and
conditionB and return
1
if the conditional statement is true.
They return
0
if the conditional statement is false. conditionA
and conditionB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists.
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one condition is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
conditionA
and
conditionB
conditionA
or
conditionB
Operator: Returns true (1) if:
and
Both conditions are nonzero.
or
A
t least one condition is nonzero.
Test
1
/
2
=
16
/
32
.
-l
:
1
=
2
"
-t
=
b
Done
b
16
=
32
b
³
1
=true
34
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 34 of 32
For
L
1=
{1,2,3}
, test
L
1
>
log(30)
.
1. Define
L
1
.
:-t
{
b
1
¡
2
¡
3}
b
Done
b
X-v
1
b
2. Test
L
1
> log(30)
.
-v
1
-t
>
b
Done
b
1!
1 30
Eb
Test
cos(90)
and
sin(0)
.
:-u
3
90
E-t
and
b
Done
b
-u
1
0
Eb
The 1
MATH Menu
The 1
MATH
menu includes various math functions.
1
³
³
1>log(30)
is false;
2>log(30)
is true;
3>log(30)
is true.
Chapter 2: Math Operations
35
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 35 of 32
1:lcm(
Finds the least common multiple, which is the
smallest number that two integers can divide into
evenly.
2:gcd(
Finds the greatest common divisor, which is the
largest number that divides into two integers
evenly.
3:
3
Calculates the cube.
4:
3
(
Calculates the cube root.
5:
x
Calculates the x
th
root.
6:Solver…
Displays the Equation Solver.
lcm( lcm( 1
1 1
The least common multiple (LCM) function returns the
smallest number that two positive whole numbers can divide
into evenly, of two positive whole numbers or lists of positive
whole numbers. If both arguments are lists, they must have the
same number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each element of the
list, and a list is returned.
lcm(
is frequently used with fractions to find a common
denominator. See Chapter 3: Fractions for more information
on entering fractions.
lcm(
valueA,valueB
)
Find the LCM of 6 and 9.
:1
1
6
¡
9
Eb
³
36
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 36 of 32
Add
1
/
4
+
5
/
6
(using LCM).
1. Find the LCM of the
denominators.
1
1
4
¡
6
Eb
2. Use the LCM to convert
1
/
4
and
5
/
6
to fractions where
12 is the common
denominator (without using
the calculator).
3. Add the newly converted
fractions (without using the
calculator).
4. Verify your answer by
adding the original fractions
on the calculator. Select the
b/c
Display Format mode
setting and clear the Home
screen, if desired.
.###"b
-l:
1
=
4
"\
5
=
6
b
gcd( gcd(
1
2 2
The greatest common divisor (GCD) function returns the
largest number that divides into two positive whole numbers
or lists of positive whole numbers evenly. If both arguments
are lists, they must have the same number of elements. If one
argument is a list and the other a non-list, the non-list is paired
with each element of the list, and a list is returned.
This is frequently used with fractions to reduce them to lowest
terms. See Chapter 2: Fractions for more information on
entering fractions.
³
3
12
+
10
12
=
13
12
5
6
Q
2
2
=
10
12
1
4
Q
3
3
=
3
12
LCM=12
Therefore, 12 is
the common
denominator.
Chapter 2: Math Operations
37
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 37 of 32
gcd(
valueA,valueB
)
Find the greatest common divisor for the fraction,
27
/
36
.
1. Find the GCD of
27
/
36
.
1
2
27
¡
36
Eb
2. Simplify the fraction
completely using the GCD
(without using the
calculator).
3. Verify your answer by
simplifying
27
/
36
by 9 on the
calculator. You must be in
Mansimp
mode setting.
.####"
b-l
27
=
36
"B
9
b
3
1
3 3
Calculates the cube of n, which is equivalent to n Q n Q n of
any real number, expression, or each element in a list.
n
3
Calculate 5
3
.
5
1
3
b
³
³
27
36
P
9
9
=
3
4
GCD=9
5
3
= 5
Q
5
Q
5 = 125
38
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 38 of 32
3
( ( 1
4 4
Calculates the cube root of value, which is equivalent to n
where n
3
=value. value can be a real number, expression, or
list.
3
(
value
)
Calculate
3
(125).
1
4 125
Eb
x
1
5 5
Calculates the x
th
root of value, which is equivalent to n where
n
x
=value. value can be a real number, expression, or list. x
can be any real number.
x
x
(
value
)
Calculate
6
64.
:
6
1
5
64
b
Solver Solver 1
6 6
The Equation Solver allows you to solve for one unknown
one-letter variable in an equation containing up to 5 one-letter
variables. By default, the equation is assumed to be equal to 0;
however, you can set the equation equal to any real number
(or an expression that results in a real number).
The screen you see when you select
Solver
depends on
whether an equation has been defined previously.
To exit Solver and return to the Home screen, press
-
l
.
³
³
For n
x
=value,
x
value=n
3
(125) = 5
because 5
3
=125
6
x
64 = 2
because 2
6
=64
For n
3
=value,
3
value=n
Chapter 2: Math Operations
39
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 39 of 32
The EQUATION SOLVER Screen
If no equation is currently defined, pressing 1
6
takes you
to the
EQUATION SOLVER
screen. Enter the equation at the
cursor, using the Text editor (- t) to enter the variable
names.
1
6
You can have more than one variable on each side of the
equation. For example,
A + B = B + D + E
.
If you do not set the equation equal to a value, the calculator
automatically sets it equal to 0. For example, to enter A+B=0,
just enter
A+B
and press b. You are limited to 5 variables
per equation.
The Equation Variables Screen
If an equation has been defined previously, pressing 1
6
takes you to the Equation Variables screen.
1
6
Your screen
may vary.
40
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 40 of 32
Equation Displays the currently defined
equation.
Equation Variables Displays all equation variables and
their values.
bound
Default={M1©99,1©99}
Displays the
bound
limits that apply to
the unknown variable value for which
you are solving.
Solve
You select one variable, the one you
want to solve for, from this list.
Equation
The first line of the Equation Variables screen displays the
equation you defined on the
EQUATION SOLVER
screen.
If you would like to edit a defined equation, press $ until the
EQUATION SOLVER
screen is displayed. Edit the equation with
:, /, or - m, as necessary. Then press b to
return to the Equation Variables screen.
Equation Variables
All variables included in the defined equation are displayed. If
those variables have never been assigned a value, they are set
equal to 0. If a variable has been defined previously (for
example, from the Home screen), that value appears.
If a value extends beyond the screen, press " to scroll to the
end of the number. This is especially important if a number is
in scientific notation and you need to see whether it has a
negative or positive exponent.
For an equation with more than one variable, you must define
all variables except the unknown variable for which you want
to solve.
Chapter 2: Math Operations
41
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 41 of 32
bound
bound
limits apply to the unknown variable value for which
you are solving. Default bounds are {M1©99,1©99}. Use these
limits to narrow the unknown value solution to a specific
range of numbers, especially if more than one answer exists.
Hint: For answers with many solutions (for example, trig
functions), consider graphing the function first to get an idea
of the most ideal (or specific)
bound
limits.
Solve
Specify the unknown variable from the
Solve
line. This
prompts the calculator to solve for it.
To select a variable on the
Solve
line, highlight the unknown
variable with the cursor, and then press b. After you press
b, a solid black square appears next to the solved
(previously unknown) variable displayed in the Equation
Variables section.
Hint: The Solver allows for a small tolerance when solving a
result, which is noticeable especially when solving complex
equations or those with multiple solutions. For example, a
result of 3.99999999999999 (instead of 4) for the equation
16=x
2
is considered a correct answer.
Solving Equations with Only One Possible Answer
For 2(L+M)=N, solve for L when N=268, and M=40, M14, and
307.
1. Define the equation on the
EQUATION SOLVER
screen.
1
6
$: (if necessary)
³
42
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 42 of 32
2. Enter the equation.
-t
2
D
L
b\
M
b
E
=
b
N
b
Done
bb
3. Enter the first value for
M
,
40, and
N
, 268.
#
40
#
268
4. Solve for
L
.
##b
5. Solve for
L
when
M
=M14.
#a
14
###b
6. Solve for
L
when
M
=307.
#
307
###b
Solving Equations with More Than One Answer
The calculator only returns one solution even if more than one
possible solution exists. When this is the case, you can first
enter a guess by assigning a value to that variable and then
asking the calculator to solve your equation. The TI-73 always
chooses the solution closest to that guess. However, the guess
must be within the bound limits; otherwise, you get an error.
Your variable
values may vary.
Chapter 2: Math Operations
43
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 43 of 32
Find the negative solution to the equation, 16=X
2
.
1. Define the equation on the
EQUATION SOLVER
screen.
1
6
$: (if necessary)
2. Enter the equation.
-t
16=
bI6
Done
bb
3. Use
bound
to limit your
answer to a negative one
(between M16 and 0).
#"a
16
//"
0
///
4. Solve for
X
.
#b
5. The guess,
X=10
, is not
between the limit bounds.
You must clear or change it.
(This step uses a different
guess, M6.)
2
:a
6
6. Solve for
X
.
##b
³
Your
X
value
may vary.
L
6 is between
the bounds.
44
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 44 of 32
The 1
NUM Menu
The 1
NUM
(number) menu includes seven different math
functions.
1"
1:abs(
Calculates the absolute value of a real number,
list, or expression.
2:round(
Rounds a real number, list, or expression.
3:iPart(
Returns only the integer part of a result.
4:fPart(
Returns only the fractional part of a result.
5:min(
Returns the minimum of two real numbers, lists,
or expressions.
6:max(
Returns the maximum of two real numbers, lists,
or expressions.
7:remainder(
Returns the remainder resulting from the division
of two real numbers or lists.
abs( abs( 1
"
1 1
Returns the absolute value of a real number, expression, or
each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is
calculated and the absolute value of that result is returned.
abs(
value
)
Find the absolute value of M35.2.
1"
1
a
35.2
E
b
³
Chapter 2: Math Operations
45
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 45 of 32
round( round( 1
"
2 2
Returns a number, expression, or each element in a list
rounded to 10 digits or #decimal_places (9), if specified. The
final result is always displayed according to the Decimal
Notation mode (
.
) unless #decimal_places is specified,
which overrides the current setting. Notice that the Decimal
Notation mode settings do change the display but not the value
of the result. Therefore, the entire result is stored in the
calculator ready to use for future calculations, as applicable.
round(
value[,#decimal_places]
)
Round p to different numbers of decimal places using different
Decimal Notation mode settings.
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
Float
, if necessary.
.#b
-l:
2. Round p to 3 decimal
places.
1"
2
-„
¡
3
Eb
3. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
4
.
.#"""""
b-l
4. Round p to 3 decimal
places.
-£b
³
46
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 46 of 32
5. Leave the Decimal Notation
mode at
4
and round p to 5
digits.
-£!!
5
b
iPart( and fPart( iPart( and fPart(
1
"
3 and 4 3 and 4
iPart(
returns the integer part of a real number, expression, or
each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is
calculated and the integer part of the result is displayed.
iPart(
value
)
fPart(
returns the fractional part of a real number, expression,
or each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is
calculated and the fractional part of the result is displayed.
If value is a mixed number, the fractional part is returned and
displayed according to the current Simplification mode
setting.
fPart(
value
)
Find the integer and fractional part of 23.45.
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
Float
.
.#b
-l
2. Find the integer part.
:1"
3
23.45
Eb
3. Find the fractional part.
1"
4
23.45
Eb
³
Chapter 2: Math Operations
47
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 47 of 32
Find the fractional part of 1
1
/
2
.
1"
4 1
<
1
=
2
"Eb
min( and max( min( and max(
1
"
5 and 6 5 and 6
These are identical to the
min(
and
max(
commands found on
the - v
MATH
menu.
min(
(minimum) returns the smaller of two values or the
smallest element in one list. value can be a real number,
expression, or a list.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
min(
valueA,valueB
)
min(
list
)
max(
(maximum) functions exactly like
min(
, but it always
returns the larger of two values or the largest element in a list.
max(
valueA,valueB
)
max(
list
)
For this example, the Decimal mode settings are set to
Float
.
Compare
L
1
and
L
2
to find the
min(
and
max(
.
L
1
={1,2,3}
, and
L
2
={3,2,1}
.
1. Define
L
1
and
L
2
in the List
editor.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
³
³
48
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 48 of 32
2. Find the list minimums.
-l:
1"
5
-v
1
¡
-v
2
Eb
3. Find the list maximums.
1"
6
-v
1
¡
-v
2
Eb
remainder( remainder(
1
"
7 7
Returns the remainder resulting from the division of two
positive whole numbers, dividend and divisor, each of which
can be a list of positive whole numbers. They also are subject
to mathematical rules. For example, divisor0.
remainder(
dividend,divisor
)
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is paired with each element of the list, and a list of
remainders is returned.
remainder(
list,divisor
)
remainder(
dividend,list
)
remainder(
list,list
)
Calculate 10P6 and return
the remainder only.
:1"
7
10
¡
6
Eb
³
1
6
10
8
4
remainder=4
dividend=10
divisor=6
Chapter 2: Math Operations
49
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 49 of 32
The 1
PRB Menu
The 1
PRB
(probability) menu lets you select functions
that are often used to calculate probabilities.
1""
1:rand
Generates a random number between 0 and 1.
2:randInt(
Generates a random integer between two values.
3:nPr
Calculates the number of permutations for a group
of items.
4:nCr
Calculates the number of combinations for a group
of items.
5:!
Calculates the factorial of a positive integer.
6:coin(
Simulates one or more coin tosses.
7:dice(
Simulates one or more dice rolls.
rand rand 1
"
"
1 1
Generates a random real number between 0 and 1
(0<number<1).
rand
takes no arguments.
rand
If you want to control a sequence of random numbers, first
store an integer seed value to
rand
. The calculator generates
a specific sequence of random numbers from each seed value.
To get a different sequence, use a different seed value. The
default seed value is 0.
seed X
rand
50
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 50 of 32
Generate a sequence of random numbers using whatever value
happens to be the current seed.
:1""
1
bbb
Generate a sequence of random numbers using seed=1.
:
1
X1"
"
1
b1""
1
bb
randInt( randInt(
1
"
"
2 2
Generates a random integer between lower and upper (both
integers) boundaries.
The random integer returned may be one of the boundaries.
For example,
randInt(1,5)
may return 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
To generate more than one random integer, specify
#ofIntegers, a positive whole number >0.
randInt(
lower,upper[,#ofIntegers]
)
Find a random integer from 2 through 10.
:1""
2
2
¡
10
Eb
Find 4 random integers from 2
through 10. (Recall and edit the
last entry.)
-£!¡
4
E
b
³
³
³
³
Your result
may vary.
Your result may
vary.
Your results
may vary.
Chapter 2: Math Operations
51
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 51 of 32
nPr nPr 1
"
"
3 3
Returns the number of permutations of n items taken
r number at a time. The order in which you select the items
DOES matter. items and number can be nonnegative integers
or lists of nonnegative integers.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is paired with each element in the list, and a list of
permutations is returned.
items
nPr
number
From a group of 4 items (ABCD), how many ways can you
select 2 of the items if the order does matter?
Find 4
nPr
2.
:
4
1""
3
2
b
ABCD
AB AC AD
BA BC BD
CA CB CD
DA DB DC
nCr nCr 1
"
"
4 4
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken
r number at a time. In combinations, the order in which you
select the items DOES NOT matter. items and number can be
nonnegative integers or lists of nonnegative integers.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is paired with each element in the list, and a list of
combinations is returned.
items
nCr
number
³
AB and BA count
as two
permutations.
4 items taken
2 at a time
permutations of
52
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 52 of 32
From a group of 4 items (ABCD), how many ways can you
select 2 of the items if the order does not matter?
Find 4
nCr
2.
:
4
1""
4
2
b
ABCD
AB AC AD
BA
BC BD
CA
CB CD
DA
DB DC
! !
1
"
"
5 5
Returns the factorial of value. value can be an integer or list of
integers between 0 and 69. By definition, 0! = 1.
Factorials are similar to permutations because the order
DOES matter. You can think of 4! as the total number of ways
that 4 items can be arranged.
value
!
Find 4!
:
4
1""
5
b
ABCD
ABCD ABDC ACBD ACDB ADBC ADCB
BACD BADC BCAD BCDA BDCA BDAC
CABD CADB CBAD CBDA CDAB CDBA
DABC DACB DBAC DBCA DCAB DCBA
³
³
4! = 4
Q
3
Q
2
Q
1
AB and BA count
as only one
combination.
4!
4 items taken
2 at a time
combinations of
24 possible arrangements
Chapter 2: Math Operations
53
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 53 of 32
coin( coin( 1
"
"
6 6
Returns a random list of 0s and 1s that represents heads and
tails for one or more coin tosses. tosses is a positive whole
number.
coin(
tosses
)
Simulate tossing a coin 7 times.
:1""
6
7
Eb
dice( dice( 1
"
"
7 7
Returns a random list of numbers (between 1 and 6) that
represents dice rolls.
dice(
takes one optional argument,
#ofdice, a positive whole number>1. If #ofdice is specified,
each list element is the total sum of one rolls results.
dice(
rolls[,#ofDice]
)
Simulate 5 dice rolls for one die.
:1""
7
5
Eb
Simulate 5 rolls of 3 dice.
:-£
!¡
3
Eb
³
³
³
Your result may
vary.
4 heads and 3 tails
(or 3 heads and 4 tails).
Your result may vary.
The three dice totaled 11 on
the first roll, 10 on the
second roll, etc. Your result
ma
y
var
y
.
54
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 54 of 32
The 1
LOG Menu
The 1
LOG
(logarithm) menu lets you select functions that
are used to calculate base-10 and base-e logarithms and
powers.
1"""
NorN
1!
1:log(
Returns the base-10 logarithm of a value.
2:10^(
Raises 10 to a power.
3:ln(
Calculates the natural logarithm of a value.
4:e^(
Raises e to a power (e = 2.71828182846).
log( log( 1
"
"
"
1 1
The logarithm is the exponent, x, indicating the power which a
fixed number (using base 10) must be raised to in order to
produce a given number, a.
log(
returns the logarithm of a positive real number, an
expression that results in a positive real number, or a list of
positive real numbers.
log(
value
)
log(
list
)
Calculate log(30).
:1"""
1
30
Eb
³
For 10
x
=a, log
10
a=x
Chapter 2: Math Operations
55
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 55 of 32
10^( 10^( 1
"
"
"
2 2
Raises 10 to a power of x, where x is an integer, an expression
that results in an integer, or a list of integers. If x10
M
4
or 10
10
,
the result is displayed in scientific notation.
10^(
integer
)
10^(
x
)
Calculate 10^(6), which is often written as 10
6
.
:1"""
2
6
Eb
Calculate 10^(M4).
1"""
2
a
4
Eb
ln( ln( 1
"
"
"
3 3
The natural logarithm is the exponent, x, indicating the power
which the base, e, must be raised to in order to produce a
given number, a.
The calculator uses e=2.718281828459, although it only
displays 2.718281828 on the screen.
ln(
returns the natural logarithm of a positive real number, an
expression that results in a positive real number, or a list of
positive real numbers.
ln(
value
)
ln(
list
)
³
³
For e
x
=a, ln(a)=x
56
Chapter 2: Math Operations
7302ENG.DOC CH2 Math Operations, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 11:58 AM Printed: 05/19/99 8:58
AM Page 56 of 32
Calculate ln(
1
/
2
).
:1"""
3
1
=
2
"Eb
e^( e^(
1
"
"
"
4 4
Raises e to a power of x, where x is a real number, an
expression that results in an real number, or a list of real
numbers.
The calculator uses e=2.718281828459, although it only
displays 2.718281828 on the screen.
e^(
x
)
e^(
list
)
Calculate e^5, which is often written as e
5
.
:1"""
4
5
Eb
³
³
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 57 of 10
FractionsFractions
Entering Fractions................................................................58
Using Fractions in Calculations ...........................................59
Fraction Modes ....................................................................60
Display Format Mode Settings .....................................60
Simplification Mode Settings .......................................60
Autosimp Setting ..........................................................61
Mansimp Setting ........................................................... 62
Converting Between Fractions and Decimals ....................64
Converting Between Mixed Numbers
and Simple Fractions ..............................................65
3
58
Chapter 3: Fractions
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 58 of 10
Entering Fractions
Simple fractions consist of a numerator and denominator.
Mixed numbers combine a whole number with a fraction.
Note: The numerator and denominator cannot be a fraction.
Simple Fractions
numerator = denominator "
Enter
2
/
3
.
1. Enter the numerator, 2.
2
=
2. Enter the denominator, 3.
3
3. End the fraction.
"
Mixed Numbers
whole_number < numerator = denominator "
Enter 1
2
/
3
.
1. Enter the whole number, 1.
1
<
2. Enter the numerator, 2.
2
=
3. Enter the denominator, 3.
3
4. End the mixed number.
"
³
³
2
3
2
=
3
"
1
2
3
2
=
3
"
1 <
Continue the calculation
at the cursor.
Continue the calculation
at the cursor.
Chapter 3: Fractions
59
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 59 of 10
Using Fractions in Calculations
The type of calculation and the input values determine
whether the results of a calculation are shown as a fraction or
a decimal. You can enter fractions with all operation keys (\,
M, F, etc.), most function keys (6, C, ƒ, etc.), and many
menu items (
abs(
,
fPart(
,
sin(
, etc.).
Fractional calculations return fractional results, if possible,
except for those that:
• Use - „, C,
log(
,
ln(
,
e^(
 or 
• Calculate to a result
1000
1
or <
1
1000
 or 
• Include both a fraction and a
decimal
 or 
• Use items from the following
menus: - ‚;
- v
MATH
and
CALC
;
- u
TRIG
and
ANGLE
60
Chapter 3: Fractions
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 60 of 10
Fraction Modes
Two fraction modes exist on the calculator: Display Format
mode and Simplification mode.
Display Format Mode SettingsDisplay Format Mode Settings
The Display Format mode settings,
A§bàc
and
bàc
, determine
whether or not a fractional result is displayed as a mixed
number or a simple fraction. To select a mode setting, press
., highlight the setting with the cursor keys, and then
press b.
.
A§b/c
Displays result as a mixed number, if applicable.
b/c
Displays result as a simple fraction.
Add
4
/
5
+
8
/
5
.
4
=
5
"\
8
=
5
b
Simplification Mode SettingsSimplification Mode Settings
The Simplification mode settings,
Autosimp
and
Mansimp
,
determine whether or not a fractional result is simplified
automatically.
.
³
In
b/c
mode
In
A§b/c
mode
Chapter 3: Fractions
61
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 61 of 10
Autosimp
The calculator automatically simplifies
fractional results.
Mansimp
The user simplifies fractions manually step-by-
step. $ next to the result signifies that it can be
simplified at least one more time.
Add
1
/
9
+
5
/
9
.
1
=
9
"\
5
=
9
b
Autosimp SettingAutosimp Setting
In this example, Display Format mode settings do not affect
the display of the result because the result is a simple fraction.
Add
1
/
4
+
1
/
4
.
1. Select
Autosimp
mode, if
necessary, and return to the
Home screen.
.####b
-l
2. Add
1
/
4
+
1
/
4
.
1
=
4
"\
1
=
4
b
³
³
$
6
9
The total shaded area in the first
diagram is equal to the total
shaded area in the second one.
2
3
In
Autosimp
mode
In
Mansimp
mode
62
Chapter 3: Fractions
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 62 of 10
Mansimp SettingMansimp Setting
When the
Mansimp
setting is selected, the result of a
calculation is not simplified automatically.
$
next to a result
means that it is unsimplified and can be simplified at least one
more time. You then can decide if you want the calculator to
simplify the result step-by-step using simplification factors it
chooses or if you want the calculator to simplify the result
using the simplification factors that you choose.
Letting the Calculator Choose the Simplification Factor
After getting an unsimplified result (one with
$
next to it) from
any fractional calculation, press B b. The simplified
result and simplification factor which the calculator chose are
displayed. For example,
Fac=3
means simplification factor=3.
The Display Format mode settings affect whether a result is
displayed as a mixed number or a simple fraction.
1. Select
Mansimp
mode setting,
if necessary, and return to
the Home screen.
.####"
b-l
2. Add 1
3
/
4
+
2
4
/
8
.
:
1
<
3
=
4
"\
2
<
4
=
8
b
3. Let the calculator simplify
the result.
Bb
³
In
b/c
mode
In
A
§
b/c
mode
In
A
§
b/c
mode
In
b/c
mode
Chapter 3: Fractions
63
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 63 of 10
Choosing the Simplification Factor
After getting an unsimplified result from any fractional
calculation, press B simplification_factor b, where
simplification_factor is a positive integer that you choose.
The Display Format mode settings affect whether a result is
displayed as a mixed number or as a simple fraction.
Add
4
/
16
+
8
/
16
and choose the simplification factor to reduce
the sum to lowest terms.
1. Enter
4
/
16
+
8
/
16
.
-l:
4
=
16
"\
8
=
16
b
2. Simplify by 2.
B
2
b
3. Simplify by 3.
B
3
b
4. Simplify by 2.
B
2
b
Recalling the Factor
-
}
6:Factor
If you execute a fractional calculation in
Mansimp
mode and
then the user or the calculator simplifies the result, you can
recall the simplification factor at a later time by selecting
- }
6:Factor
.
Since
Factor
is a variable, you can use
Factor
in expressions or
on any screen that accepts whole numbers (Y= editor, List
editor, Home screen, etc.).
³
The result did not
change. Try again
with another factor.
Simplification is
complete.
64
Chapter 3: Fractions
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 64 of 10
Only one simplification factor (the last one calculated) is
stored in memory. Also, you can store a positive whole
number to
Factor
using the X key, just as you would store a
number to any variable. For more information about storing
values to variables, see Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73.
From the Home screen, simplify
6
/
8
by a factor of 2, and then
recall the factor.
1. Select
Mansimp
mode, if
necessary.
.####"
b-l
2. Enter the fraction and
simplify.
:
6
=
8
B
2
b
3. Recall the simplification
factor,
2
.
-}
6
b
Converting Between Fractions and
Decimals
To convert a fraction to a decimal or a decimal to a fraction,
use >. If a fractional equivalent of a decimal does not exist,
the calculator returns the same decimal number. Also, the
calculator only recognizes and converts (if possible) the first
ten digits of any decimal number.
You must follow > with b; otherwise, you get an error.
The current Decimal Notation mode determines the display of
the result. In the following example, the calculator is set to
Float
Decimal Notation mode.
³
Chapter 3: Fractions
65
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 65 of 10
Convert
3
/
4
to a decimal and back to a fraction.
1. Convert
3
/
4
to a decimal.
-l:
3
=
4
>b
2. Convert .75 back to a
fraction.
>b
Add 2 plus the decimal equivalent of
1
/
4
.
2
\
1
=
4
>b
Converting Between Mixed Numbers
and Simple Fractions
To convert a mixed number to a simple fraction or a simple
fraction to a mixed number use ?. The Display Format
mode settings do not affect the results when using ?.
You must follow ? with b; otherwise, you get an
error.
Convert 3
1
/
3
to a simple fraction and back to a mixed number.
1. Convert 3
1
/
3
to a simple
fraction.
-l:
3
<
1
=
3
?
b
2. Convert
10
/
3
back to a
mixed number.
?b
³
³
³
In
Autosimp
mode
In
Mansimp
mode
1
/
4
=.25
66
Chapter 3: Fractions
7303ENG.DOC Ch 3 Fractions, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:00 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 66 of 10
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 67 of 10
MeasurementMeasurement
Conversions andConversions and
ConstantConstant
CalculationsCalculations
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu...............................68
Length - ‚ 1 .................................................68
Area - ‚ 2 .....................................................68
Volume - ‚ 3 ................................................69
Time - ‚ 4 .....................................................69
Temp (Temperature) - ‚ 5...........................69
MassàWeight - ‚ 6.......................................69
Speed - ‚ 7 ................................................... 69
Converting a Unit of Measure......................................70
Constants .............................................................................71
Single Mode ..................................................................72
Multiple Mode ..............................................................75
4
68
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 68 of 10
The -
‚
CONVERSIONS Menu
Use this menu to access all conversion categories.
-‚
1:Length
Displays the
LENGTH
menu.
2:Area
Displays the
AREA
menu.
3:Volume
Displays the
VOLUME
menu.
4:Time
Displays the
TIME
menu.
5:Temp
Displays the
TEMPERATURE
menu.
6:MassàWeight
Displays the
MASS/WT.
menu.
7:Speed
Displays the
SPEED
menu.
Length Length -
‚
1 1
mm
........... millimeters
ft
.................... feet
cm
............ centimeters
yard
................ yards
m
.............. meters
km
.................. kilometers
inch
.......... inches
mile
................ miles
Area Area -
‚
2 2
ft
2
............. square feet
in
2
.................. square inches
m
2
............ square meters
cm
2
................. square centimeters
mi
2
............ square miles
yd
2
................. square yards
km
2
.......... square kilometers
ha
................... hectares
acre
.......... acres
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
69
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 69 of 10
Volume Volume -
‚
3 3
liter
........... liters
in
3
...................cubic inches
gal
............ gallons
ft
3
...................cubic feet
qt
.............. quarts
m
3
...................cubic meters
pt
.............. pints
galUK
.............UK gallons
oz
............. ounces
ozUK
..............UK ounces
cm
3
........... cubic centimeters
Time Time -
‚
4 4
sec
............ seconds
day
.................days
min
........... minutes
week
...............weeks
hr
.............. hours
year
................years
Temp (Temperature) Temp (Temperature) -
‚
5 5
degC
......... degrees Celsius
degF
......... degrees Fahrenheit
degK
......... degrees Kelvin
MassMassà
Weight Weight -
‚
6 6
g
............... grams
ton (US)
..........tons
kg
............. kilograms
mton (US)
.......metric tons
lb
.............. pounds
Speed Speed -
‚
7 7
ft
à
s
........... feet per second
km
à
hr
......... kilometers per hour
m
à
s
.......... meters per second
knot
............ knots
mi
à
hr
........ miles per hour
70
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 70 of 10
Converting a Unit of MeasureConverting a Unit of Measure
To convert a measurement value, enter the measurement
value, select the category from the
CONVERSIONS
menu, select
the unit you are converting from, and then the unit you are
converting to. To know which category to select, look at the
units of the original value. You can only convert within one
category.
measurement_value current_unit 4 new_unit
Convert 50 meters to inches.
1. Clear the Home screen, if
desired. Enter the value, 50.
-l:
50
2. Display the
CONVERSIONS
menu.
-‚
3. Select the applicable
category,
1:LENGTH
.
1
4. Select the current unit,
meters.
3
5. Select the unit which you
want to convert to, inches.
4
6. Calculate the result.
b
³
The current unit
is displayed.
m8 inch
is pasted
to the Home screen.
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
71
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 71 of 10
EOS operating rules (Appendix B: Reference Information)
apply when converting negative measurements as shown in
the next example.
Compare the results of M5
¡
F4
¡
C and (M5)
¡
F4
¡
C.
1. From the Home screen,
calculate M5
¡
F4
¡
C.
-l:
a
5
-‚
5
2
1
b
The calculator converts 5
¡
F to
¡
C
and then returns the negative of the
result.
2. Calculate (M5)
¡
F4
¡
C
.
.
-£-!
-mD""
-mEb
The calculator converts (
M
5)
¡
F to
¡
C.
Constants
To save time re-entering long or complicated expressions and
to help prevent entry errors, you can enter numbers,
expressions, lists, commands, or functions into the
calculators memory by defining them as constants in the Set
Constant editor. As constants, they then can be recalled at any
time.
You can define up to four constants in the Set Constant editor
and choose from one of two different modes:
Single
or
Multiple
.
The mode you select determines how many of the constants
you can recall at a time. To enter a constant in the editor,
select the mode from the Set Constant editor (- †), move
the cursor to one of the four constants, and define it.
-†
³
72
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 72 of 10
To use a constant:
1. Define the constant in the Set Constant editor (- †).
2. Recall the constant with the @ key.
Single ModeSingle Mode
By selecting
Single
mode, you tell the calculator that you only
want to access one constant from the list, even if more than
one is defined.
To select the one constant (
C
1
,
C
2
,
C
3
, or
C
4
) you want to use,
highlight the
=
next to it, and then press b. This
automatically deselects any other defined constants.
Defining Constants in Single Mode
Enter the constants in the Set Constant editor as shown in the
following example. At any time you can enter this editor and
edit, delete, or add constants.
Define
C
1
= +
1
/
2
and
C
3
= ¦
1
/
2
.
1. Enter the Set Constant
editor.
-†
2. Highlight
Single
with the
cursor, if necessary.
$b
3. Define
C
1
as +
1
/
2
.
#\
1
=
2
³
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
73
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 73 of 10
4. Define
C
3
as ¦
1
/
2
.
##
M
1
=
2
5. Exit the Set Constant editor.
-l
Single Mode Constant Calculations
After a constant is defined and selected, return to the screen
where you want to use it in a calculation. Pressing @
pastes it to the cursor location. In
Single
mode, only one
defined constant is available for use in calculations, and an
expression using a constant is automatically solved after
pressing @ (without pressing b).
Calculate 40+
1
/
2
.
1. Select
Single
mode, if
necessary.
-†$b
2. Select
C
1
(which deselects
C
3
), and exit the Set
Constant editor.
#!b-l
3. Clear the Home screen, if
desired. Solve the problem
using
C
1
.
:
40
@
Recalling a Constant in a Series of Calculations
When pressing @ more than once in a series of
calculations, the calculator automatically keeps count for you
(shown in the following example) unless the defined constant
includes a list. The counter starts over any time a new entry
precedes @, including
Ans
.
³
Count=1.
You recognize that
C
1
=+
1
/
2
.
The most recently entered
constant (
C
3
) remains
selected.
74
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 74 of 10
Find the multiple of 2 so that 5 ¦ 2
n
=40.
1. Select
Single
mode, if
necessary.
-†$b
2. Enter
C
2
=
¦
2
.
##M
2
3. Return to the Home screen
and clear, if desired.
-l:
4. Count the number of times
you have to multiply 5 by 2
to get 40 (so that 5 Q 2
n
=40).
5
@
@
@
³
Other defined constants are
deselected automatically.
Count=1
Pressing
@
a second time
acts like
-
¢
@
.
n=3 because you
multiplied by 2 three
times in a row.
5
Q
2 is calculated automatically.
5¦2
n
=40
Constant mode = Single
Set
C
n
=
¦
2
The calculator’s constant counter
automatically computes
n
.
5¦2¦2¦2=40, or
5¦2
3
=40
Solution
n=3
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
75
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 75 of 10
Multiple ModeMultiple Mode
In
Multiple
mode, all defined constants are available to use at
any time. To define
Multiple
mode, highlight
Multiple
using the
cursor keys, and then press b.
Defining Constants in Multiple Mode
You define constants in
Multiple
mode exactly the same way
you define them in
Single
mode. All constants are always
selected, even if they are not defined.
Select
Multiple
mode and use the constants defined in the
previous examples.
1. Enter the Set Constant
editor.
-†
2. Select
Multiple
mode.
$"b
Recalling Constants in Multiple Mode
When you press @ from the Home screen and the Set
Constant editor is in
Multiple
mode, the first six characters of
every defined constant is displayed. Undefined constants are
marked as
Empty
.
@
³
All constants are
now selected.
76
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
7304ENG.DOC TI-73, Chap 4, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/16/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM
Page 76 of 10
To select a constant, press the number associated with the
constant (
1
,
2
,
3
, or
4
). You may choose another constant (or
the same one) by pressing @ again. In
Multiple
mode
(unlike in
Single
mode), your constant expression is not
evaluated until you press b.
Define
C
3
=+3
¦
2
and
C
4
=
¦
2+3
in
Multiple
mode.
-†$"b
###:
\
3
M
2
#:
M
2
\
3
Calculate 4+3¦2.
1. Go to the Home screen and
clear it, if desired.
-l:
2. Find the result.
4
@
3
b
Calculate 4¦2+3.
4
@
4
b
³
³
³
Press
b
to evaluate
the expression.
You recognize that
C
3
=+3
¦
2
.
You recognize that
C
4
=
¦
2+3
.
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
77 of 30
ListsLists
Steps for Creating a List ......................................................78
The List Editor 3 ............................................................ 79
Naming a List .......................................................................79
Entering List Elements.........................................................81
Editing Lists in the List Editor .............................................87
Inserting or Deleting a New List ..................................87
Deleting Lists from Calculator Memory.......................88
Inserting or Deleting One Element in a List ................89
Editing an Existing Element ......................................... 89
Clearing All Elements in a List...................................... 90
Clearing All Elements in All Lists..................................90
Editing a List Formula ................................................... 90
The - v Ls Menu .........................................................91
The - v OPS Menu...................................................... 92
SortA( and SortD( - v " 1 and 2 ......................93
ClrList - v " 3 ....................................................95
dim( - v " 4....................................................... 95
@List( - v " 5 .....................................................97
Select( - v " 6 ...................................................98
seq( - v " 7........................................................99
augment( - v " 8............................................100
¨ (List Signifier) - v " 9.................................101
List Commands from the Home Screen ............................102
Creating a List ............................................................. 102
Copying One List to Another ..................................... 103
Displaying One List Element.......................................103
Inserting or Changing a List Element ........................104
Using Math Functions with Lists ................................105
5
78
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
78 of 30
Steps for Creating a List
On the TIN73, a set of numerical or text information is called a
list. Follow these basic steps when defining a list.
Display the List editor.
Name the list you want to define, or
use a prenamed list (
L
1
-
L
6
).
Enter list elements
(numerical or text).
Note:
Surround text elements
with quotation marks.
Edit list as necessary.
- m,
:,
or /
3
- t
(to name a list)
number keys
or
- t
Prenamed lists,
¨
5
and
¨
6
, and one user-named
list,
¨
PET
.
Chapter 5: Lists
79
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
79 of 30
The List Editor 3
You can enter up to 20 lists in the List editor. Each list can
have up to 999 elements. You can only display three lists at the
same time; use " or ! to scroll to see all other defined lists.
List notation looks like this:
L
5=
{1,2,3,4,5,6}.
Read it as elements
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are stored in the list named
L
5
.
3
L
1
,
L
2
,
L
3
,
L
4
,
L
5
,
L
6
, and one empty, unnamed list initially are
included in the List editor.
Numeric Notation, Decimal Notation, and Angle modes affect
the display of an element (except fractional elements).
3
Naming a List
When you are ready to define your list, you can move to one of
the columns labeled
L
1
-
L
6
and begin entering your list
elements.
Entry line
List name across top
Entries in each column display the
first 6 characters of the element.
Highlighted element
is displayed on entry
line in its entirety.
Calculator is in
Sci
Numeric
Notation mode.
Fractions are unaffected by
Numeric Notation mode.
List counter
(cursor is in
the 1st list).
80
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
80 of 30
If you do not want to use
L
1
-
L
6
(you cannot rename them), you
can create a new list and name it anything you want. A list
name can be one to five characters long. The first character
must be a letter from A to Z. The second through fifth
characters can be any combination of letters and numbers.
Access letters from the Text editor (- t). A list accepts
elements only after it is named.
Note: You cannot rename a user-named list, but you can copy
its elements to a list with a different name. See the section
entitled, Copying One List to Another on page 103.
In this guidebook, when a list name is referred to, its name is
always preceded by the
¨
symbol; however, you dont type the
¨
when naming a list in the List editor.
If a defined list name is highlighted, the list elements or the
attached formula are displayed on the entry line.
Create a list named
NUM
.
1. Display the List editor.
3
2. Scroll to the blank,
unnamed list to the far right
of the List editor.
" or !
3. Use the Text editor to name
the list
NUM.
-t
N
b
U
b
M
b
Done
b
4. Move 
NUM
 from the entry
line to the list name line.
b
³
Or, insert a blank list. Highlight
a list name and press
-
m
.
NUM
appears on
the entry line.
¨
NUM
now
accepts
elements.
Chapter 5: Lists
81
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
81 of 30
Entering List Elements
A named list accepts two types of elements: numerical and
text.
• Lists that contain numerical elements not enclosed in
quotation marks are called numerical lists.
• Lists that contain text elements or numerical elements
whose numerical values are ignored (because they are
enclosed in quotation marks) are called categorical lists.
To enter an element, highlight the space in the column under
the list name where you want the element to be entered (you
cant skip any spaces) and type in the element (it is displayed
on the entry line). Press b or # to move the element into
the list. Pressing # or b also moves the cursor to the next
element space.
Access the quotation marks (for categorical lists) from the
Text editor (- t).
Numerical Lists
Numerical lists contain real numbers, fractions, or expressions
that evaluate to real numbers or fractions. If you enter an
expression like
sin(30)
, the calculator displays the decimal
equivalent in the list element space. The Numeric Notation,
Decimal Notation, and Angle modes determine how the
calculator displays all elements, except fractions.
Define
¨
NUM={18,25,45}
.
1. Go to the first element
space of the numerical list
¨
NUM
.
3
" (as necessary)
# (if necessary)
³
82
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
82 of 30
2. Enter the list elements.
18
#
25
#
45
#
Entering Fractional Elements
When entering fractions from the Home screen, parentheses
are optional around the numerator and denominator.
When entering fractions in the List editor (and any other
editor), parentheses are mandatory around the numerator and
denominator ONLY when operators are included:
3
1
\
2
=
3
\
4
b
D
1
\
2
E=
D
3
\
4
Eb
Interpreted as
1+(2/3)+4
Using parentheses
Chapter 5: Lists
83
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
83 of 30
Dependent Numerical Lists
The numerical list described in the previous section (
¨NUM
) is
an independent list. You also can create dependent lists,
which are dependent (or based) upon the contents of another
defined numerical list.
You create a dependent list by attaching a formula to it. For
example,
"2 + L
1
,
"
where
L
1
is already defined, is a formula. The
formula always contains at least one other list. In addition, for
a formula like
L
3
="2+L
1
+ L
2
,"
L
1
and
L
2
must have the same
number of elements. Then, each element in
L
3
is the result of
the attached formula.
When a formula is attached to a list, a small signifier (2)
appears next to the list name. You cannot edit a dependent list
by simply typing over an element as with independent lists.
You must highlight the element you want to change, press
b, and then edit it. However, this changes the entire list
back to an independent list, and the formula and the formula
signifier disappear.
Also, it is possible to have multiple dependent lists all based
on the same list (for example,
L
2
="2+ L
1
,
"
L
3
="3+L
1
,
"
and
L
4
="4+L
1
"
).
An attached formula can be enclosed in quotation marks
(located in the Text editor). A list whose formula:
• Is not enclosed in quotation marks is not automatically
updated if the independent list changes.
• Is enclosed in quotation marks is automatically updated if
the independent list changes.
Convert the following six Celsius temperatures
{M40,M15,M5,30,58,140} to Fahrenheit and display both lists in the
List editor.
³
¨CEL={M40,M15,M5,30,58,140}
¨FRHT="¨CEL degC8degF"
Independent List
Dependent List
84
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
84 of 30
1. Create the independent list,
¨CEL
.
3
" or " (as necessary
to move to the blank
list)
-t
C
b
E
b
L
b
Done
bb
2. Enter the elements.
#a
40
#a
15
#a
5
#
30
#
58
#
140
#
3. Create the dependent list,
¨FRHT
.
"-t
F
b
R
b
H
b
T
b
Done
b
b
4. Attach the formula
"¨CEL
degC8degF"
to
¨FRHT
.
b-t
"
b
Done
b
-v
CEL
b
-‚
5
1
2
-t
"
b
Done
b
5. Display the elements of
¨FRHT
.
b
A small formula
signifier appears.
Chapter 5: Lists
85
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
85 of 30
6. Change
M5
in
¨CEL
to
M8
.
!##ba
8
b
Note
: Since the formula is enclosed
in quotation marks, element 3 in
¨
FRHT
is automatically updated.
Categorical Lists
Categorical lists usually contain words or letters (text
elements). If they contain numerical elements, the numerical
values of those elements are ignored. Categorical lists are
usually used in statistical plotting, but they can allow you to
label elements as explained in the following example. See
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots for details about using categorical
lists in stat plots.
To define a categorical list, enclose the first element in
quotation marks (found in the Text editor). Quotation marks
are optional on the remaining text elements. A categorical list
signifier,
c
, appears next to the list name.
A math class has 4 test scores: 2 tests, 1 midterm test, and 1
final exam. Ivan earned test scores of 85, 80, 74, and 82. Karen
earned test scores of 90, 85, 92, and 79. Reflect this
information in the List editor.
³
¨TEST={TEST1,TEST2,MDTRM,FINAL}
¨IVAN={85,80,74,82}
¨KAREN={90,85,92,79}
1 Categorical
2 Numerical
86
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
86 of 30
1. Display the List editor and
create a list named
TEST
.
3"or ! (as
necessary to move to
the blank list)
-t
T
b
E
b
S
b
T
b
Done
bb
2. Enter the element
TEST1.
#-t
"
b
T
b
E
b
S
b
T
b
1
"
b
Done
bb
3. Repeat for the elements
TEST2
,
MDTRM
, and
FINAL
(quotation marks are
optional after the first
element).
4. Create a list named
IVAN.
"-t
I
b
V
b
A
b
N
b
Done
bb
5. Enter
85
,
80
,
74
,
and
82
.
#
85
#
80
#
74
#
82
#
The categorical
list signifier,
c
.
Chapter 5: Lists
87
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
87 of 30
6. Create a list named
KAREN.
"-t
K
b
A
b
R
b
E
b
N
b
Done
b
b
7. Enter
90
,
85
,
92
, and
79
.
#
90
#
85
#
92
#
79
#
Once you have these lists entered, you can display this data in
various ways using related features on the calculator. For
example, Chapter 6: Statistical Plots explains how you could
easily convert this data into a bar chart. Chapter 7: Statistical
Analyses explains ways to find each students averages as well
as doing other statistical analyses of their test scores.
Editing Lists in the List Editor
From the List editor, you can display, edit, insert, temporarily
delete (not from memory), and move from view all lists stored
in the calculator. You also can edit, insert, move, or delete list
elements and attached formulas.
To see all list names that are stored into the calculators
memory (but not necessarily the List editor), display the
- v
Ls
menu and use $ and # to scroll the menu.
Inserting or Deleting a New ListInserting or Deleting a New List
Inserting a list into the List editor saves it in the calculators
memory. However, deleting a list from the List editor does not
delete it from the calculators memory. A deleted lists name
still appears in the - v
Ls
menu.
Therefore, if you would like to insert the deleted list back into
the List editor, go to a blank list, select the list name from
- v
Ls
menu and press b b.
88
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
88 of 30
Insert
L
1
between
L
4
and
L
5
.
1. Move the cursor so that it
highlights
L
5
.
3$
"or ! (as necessary)
2. Insert a blank list.
-m
3. Identify it as
L
1
.
-v
1
b
Delete
L
1
.
/
Deleting Lists from Calculator MemoryDeleting Lists from Calculator Memory
To delete a list from the calculators memory, use the
- Ÿ
4:Delete
menu. If you delete
L
1
L
6
from the
calculators memory, the names still appear in the - v
Ls
menu. If you delete a user-named list, its name is deleted from
this menu.
³
³
If elements exist
in
L1
, then those
appear also.
Chapter 5: Lists
89
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
89 of 30
Delete
L
2
from the calculators
memory.
-Ÿ
4 3
#b
-l(to return to
the Home screen)
Inserting or Deleting One Element in a ListInserting or Deleting One Element in a List
To insert one element in a list:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element
space where you want to insert the element.
2. Press - m to insert the element space. All following
elements move down one space.
3. Type the element, and press b.
To delete one element from a list:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element
that you want to delete.
2. Press / to delete the element. All following elements
move up one space.
Editing an Existing ElementEditing an Existing Element
You can edit any particular element in a list without having to
reenter the entire list.
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element
that you want to edit.
2. Press b to move the element to the entry line.
3. Edit the element with - m, :, or /, as
necessary.
4. Press b to replace the existing element with the
edited element.
³
90
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
90 of 30
Clearing All Elements in a ListClearing All Elements in a List
To clear all of the elements in a list when the List editor is
displayed:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the list
name. The list elements (or formula) are displayed on the
entry line.
2. Press : b to clear the list elements.
You also can clear elements from the Home screen using the
- v
OPS
3:ClrList
menu item.
Clearing All Elements in All ListsClearing All Elements in All Lists
You clear all elements in all lists using the - Ÿ
6:ClrAllLists
instruction from the Home screen. When you press b, all
elements in all lists are cleared from the calculators memory,
even for those lists not displayed in the List editor.
-l
-Ÿ
6
b
Editing a List FormulaEditing a List Formula
To edit an attached formula:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the name of
the list name that you want to edit.
2. Press b to move the formula to the entry line.
3. Edit the formula with - m, :, or /, as
necessary.
4. Press b to replace the existing formula with the
edited formula. The list elements are updated
automatically according to the new formula.
Chapter 5: Lists
91
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
91 of 30
Deleting a List Formula
You can delete an attached formula in one of two ways. You
can:
• Follow the preceding directions for editing a formula, but
press : b in place of step 3.
• Edit one of the elements in the dependent list as directed
in the steps for editing an element. When you are
finished, the formula signifier disappears, and the list
becomes independent.
The -
v
Ls Menu
Use the - v
Ls
(lists) menu to access all list names
stored in the calculators memory.
L
1
-
L
6
are listed first
followed by all user-named lists in alphabetical order. In this
menu, the user-named lists appear as they do in the List editor
(the List signifier,
¨
, does not precede the name). However, if
you select a list to display it anywhere else on the calculator,
such as the on Home screen, the
¨
automatically appears
before the name.
-v
From the Home screen, you can type in a new list name
directly using the Text editor (except for
L
1
-
L
6
); however,
you
must precede the list name with the list signifier,
¨
.
Notice that
the list signifier,
¨
, is smaller than the
L
in the Text editor. You
can access
¨
by itself from - | or under the
- v
OPS
menu.
If you try to use the
L
from the Text editor, the calculator
reads that
L
plus any following characters as variables
(representing numerical values), not as a list.
User-named lists follow
¨
1
-
¨
6
in alphabetical order.
92
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
92 of 30
The -
v
OPS Menu
Use the - v
OPS
(options) menu to change defined lists
from the Home screen.
-v
"
1:SortA(
(Ascending)
Sorts list elements from lowest to highest
in numerical order or in alphabetical order.
2:SortD(
(Descending)
Sorts list elements from highest to lowest
in numerical order or in reverse
alphabetical order.
3:ClrList
Clears all elements in specified list(s).
4:dim(
Recalls, sets, or changes the dimension
(number of elements) in a list.
5:@List(
Returns the differences between
consecutive elements in a list.
6:Select(
Selects one or more specific data points
from a Scatter or xyLine stat plot, and then
updates the list(s) in memory. (Requires
you to set up a statistical plot. See Chapter
6: Statistical Plots for more information.)
7:seq(
Returns a list that fulfills the requirements
of 5 arguments (expression, variable,
begin, end, and increment) which you
specify.
8:augment(
Combines two lists to make a new list.
9:
¨
List signifier; all text characters or numbers
following it are interpreted as a list name.
Chapter 5: Lists
93
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
93 of 30
SortA( and SortD( SortA( and SortD( -
v
"
1 and 2 1 and 2
SortA(
(sort ascending) sorts numerical list elements from
lowest to highest value and categorical list elements
alphabetically.
SortD(
(sort descending) sorts the list elements
from highest to lowest value or in reverse alphabetical order.
Enter the
SortA(
or
SortD(
instruction on the Home screen; and
then enter all list names that you want to sort (separated by a
comma), and press
b
.
Sorting One List
SortA(
list
)
SortD(
list
)
Define
L
2
={4,7,3,9}
in the List editor, and sort in ascending
order.
1. Define
L
2
in the List editor.
3
2. From the Home screen, sort
L
2
in ascending order.
-l:
-v"
1
-v
2
E
b
3. If desired, display
L
2
on the
Home screen or in the List
editor to see the new order.
-v
2
b
 or 
3
"
(as necessary)
³
On the Home screen
In the List editor
94
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
94 of 30
Sorting Multiple Lists
You can specify more than one list when using
SortA(
and
SortD(
. In this case, the first list specified is the independent
one; any following lists are dependent.
The calculator sorts the independent list first, and then sorts
all the dependent lists by placing their elements in the same
order as their corresponding elements in the independent list.
This allows you to keep sets of related data in the same order
when you sort lists.
SortA(
indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2
)
SortD(
indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2
)
Define
L
2
={3,4,7,9}
(independent),
L
3
={1,2,3,4}
(dependent), and
L
4
={14,13,12,11}
(dependent), and sort all three in descending
order.
1. Define
L
2
,
L
3
,
and
L
4
in the
List editor.
3
2. From the Home screen,
sort the lists in descending
order.
-l:
-v"
2
-v
2
¡
-v
3
¡
-v
4
Eb
3. If desired, display the
elements in the List editor
to see the new order.
3
" (as necessary)
³
¨
2
{
9
} still corresponds
to
L3
{
4
} and
L4
{
11
}
and so on.
Chapter 5: Lists
95
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
95 of 30
ClrList ClrList -
v
"
3 3
Clears all items in specified list(s) from the Home screen.
ClrList
list1[,list2,list3,...]
From the Home screen, clear
L
1
and
L
2
.
-l:
-v"
3
-v
1
¡-v
2
b
dim( dim( -
v
"
4 4
Use
dim(
from the Home screen to return the dimension
(number of elements) of a defined list, to create a new list
with a specified number of elements, or to change the
dimension of a defined list.
When creating a new list with a specified dimension, you
can assign a length from 1 to 999. The elements are set to
zeros.
When changing the dimension of a defined list, all existing
elements in the defined list within the new dimension are not
changed.
• If you are increasing the number of elements, extra list
elements are filled by 0.
• If you are decreasing the number of elements, all existing
elements in the defined list outside the new dimension
are deleted.
To return the dimension of a list:
dim(
list
)
³
96
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
96 of 30
To create a new list with a specific dimension:
dimension#X
dim(
newList
)
To change the dimension of an existing list:
newDimension#X
dim(
list
)
Define
L
5
={1,2,3,4}
in the List
editor.
3
From the Home screen, return
the dimension of
L
5
.
-l:
-v"
4
-v
5
Eb
Create a new list,
¨
NEW
, with 4
elements.
1. Define the list on the Home
screen.
4
X-v"
4
-v"
9
-t
N
b
E
b
W
b
Done
bE
b
2. Display the elements in
¨
NEW
on the Home screen, if
desired.
-v
NEW
b
b
³
³
³
There are 4
elements in
L5
.
Chapter 5: Lists
97
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
97 of 30
1. Change the dimension of
¨NEW
to 3 elements.
3
X-v"
4
-v
NEW
b
Eb
2. Display the elements in
¨NEW
, if desired.
-v
NEW
b
b
@
List( List(
-
v
"
5 5
@
List(
(delta list) returns a list containing the differences
between consecutive elements in a list. It subtracts the first
element in the list from the second element, subtracts the
second element from the third, and so on. The resulting list is
always one element shorter than the original list.
@
List(
list
)
Define
L
6
={9,7,4,3}
and calculate
its
@
List
.
1. Enter the elements in the
List editor.
3
2. From the Home screen,
calculate
@
List
for
L
6
.
-l:
-v"
5
-v
6
Eb
³
³
7
-
9
=
M
2
4
-
7
=
M
3
3
-
4
=
M
1
98
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
98 of 30
Select( Select( -
v
"
6 6
This instruction is used to select a certain portion of an
existing Scatter or xyLine stat plot, both of which contain an
XList and a YList. Before you can use
Select(
, you must define
and select (turn on) the statistical plot you want to use;
otherwise, you get an error message. For a detailed
explanation on setting up Scatter and xyLine plots, see
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
From the Home screen, enter
Select(
followed by two list
names, XList and YList. These list names are where you want
to store the selected data points. All X-values are stored in the
first list and all Y-values are stored in the second list.
XList and YList can be the same two lists as the ones which
set up the stat plot, or you can enter new list names. If you
choose to enter new list names, entering the list signifier (
¨
)
(found under the
-
v
OPS
menu) is optional. Enter the
new list names using the Text editor (
-
t
).
Select(
XList,YList
)
The calculator displays the stat plot and prompts you to select
the left and the right bounds. The calculator then plots the
selected points on the Graph screen for you to see. If desired,
you can enter the List editor to see the lists with the selected
data points.
The following example shows the steps you would follow
when selecting a statistical plot. The data is acquired from a
sample statistical xyLine plot.
¨
TIME
contains 94 X-values;
¨
DIST
contains 94 Y-values.
The example selects the first portion of the graph before
Distance=0 and stores the selected X-values in
¨
NEWT
and the
selected Y-values in
¨
NEWD
.
1. Display the graph or stat
plot and determine the data
points you want to select.
*
Chapter 5: Lists
99
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
99 of 30
2. The
Select(
command and
two new list names are
entered from the Home
screen.
- v "
9
accesses the list
signifier. - t accesses the
Text editor.
3. The left bound is chosen.
b
4. The right bound is chosen.
"
(as necessary)
b
5. The plot is regraphed to
include only the selected
data points.
¨
NEWT
and
¨
NEWD
now exist in the calculators memory. To
display newly selected lists in the List editor, insert them as
you would insert any other list.
seq( seq(
-
v
"
7 7
seq(
returns a list in which each element is the result of the
evaluation of expression with regard to the variable. You also
must specify a value range from begin to end. You can specify
one optional argument, increment, which specifies the
interval between each variable value used to solve expression.
variable need not be defined in memory. increment can be
negative. The default value for increment is 1.
seq(
is not valid
within expressions.
seq(
expression,variable,begin,end[,increment]
)
Left bound
Right bound
100
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
100 of 30
Solve expression,
A
2
, with regard to variable,
A
. Use variable
values ranging from 1 (begin) to 11 (end), and specify
increment as 3.
1. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
2. Enter the
seq(
expression.
-v"
7
-t
A
b6¡
A
b
Done
b¡
1
¡
11
¡
3
Eb
augment( augment(
-
v
"
8 8
augment(
combines the elements of two lists from the Home
screen to create a new list. An augmented list is not saved in
the calculators memory unless you name it or store it to an
existing list name. This is shown in the following example.
augment(
list1,list2
)
Define
L
4
={1,2,3}
and
L
5
={3,4,5,6}
in the List editor, augment
L
4
with
L
5
and store the augmented list to
L
6
.
1. Define
L
4
and
L
5
.
3
2. Return to the Home screen,
and augment
L
4
and
L
5
.
-l:
-v"
8
-v
4
¡
-v
5
Eb
³
³
{1
2
,4
2
,7
2
,10
2
}
Chapter 5: Lists
101
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
101 of 30
3. Store the augmented list to
L
6
.
-¢X-v
6
b
¨
(List Signifier) (List Signifier)
-
v
"
9 9
The list signifier,
¨
, which is not the same as the
L
from the
Text editor, is especially useful in programming when you
want to specify a group of numbers or text characters as a list
name.
¨
listname
The list signifier does not appear in front of a list name in the
List editor or in the - v
Ls
menu because it is obvious
which groups of text characters or numbers are list names.
Also, the list signifier is optional when entering commands
that take only list names for arguments. For example,
Select(
XList,YList
)
Although XList and YList are not preceded by the list
signifier, the calculator interprets them as list names since no
other types of arguments are accepted.
Also, when defining lists from the Home screen, the list
signifier is optional.
{1,2,3}
X
ABC
Since this command structure is only used with list names, the
calculator interprets
ABC
as
¨
ABC
.
Press
3
to view
L6
in the List editor.
102
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
102 of 30
List Commands from the Home Screen
You can create, copy, display, and edit lists directly from the
Home screen. You also can perform mathematical functions
on lists from the Home screen.
Creating a ListCreating a List
To create a list on the Home screen, you must enter the list
elements surrounded by braces and store them to the list
name. You can access the braces from the Text editor
(- t) or from the
CATALOG
(- |).
If you create a list on the Home screen, it is stored in the
calculators memory, but it wont show up in the List editor
unless you specifically insert it there.
{
element1,element2,
}
Xlist
Define
¨
ABC={1,2,3}
on the Home screen.
1. Enter the elements.
-l:
-t
{
b
1
¡
2
¡
3}
b
Done
b
2. Store to the list name.
X-t
A
b
B
b
C
b
Done
b
b
³
List braces { }
Chapter 5: Lists
103
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
103 of 30
Copying One List to AnotherCopying One List to Another
To copy a list on the Home screen, store it to another list
name.
It is easiest to store the elements in the List editor. You then
can review the results in the List editor. Otherwise, any lists
you create on the Home screen are stored in memory, but they
dont appear in the List editor unless you insert them there.
listXnewList
Define
L
1
={1,2,3}
and
L
2
={4,5,6}
and copy
L
1
to
L
2
.
1. Enter the new elements.
3
2. Return to the Home screen
and copy
L
1
to
L
2
.
-l:
-v
1
X
-v
2
b
3. Display the copied list in
the List editor.
3
Displaying One List ElementDisplaying One List Element
From the Home screen, you can display one list element from
a defined list.
list(element#)
³
104
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
104 of 30
Define
L
2
={1,2,3}
in the List editor
and display the second element
from the Home screen
.
1. Define
L
2
.
3
2. Display the 2nd element
only.
-l:
-v
2
D
2
Eb
Inserting or Changing a List ElementInserting or Changing a List Element
From the Home screen, you can insert or change elements in a
defined list. You can only insert elements in order. For
example, you cant insert a 3rd element if the 2nd and 1st
elements are not defined.
Define
L
1
={1,2,3}
and insert a fourth element,
6
. Then change
the 4th element from
6
to
8
.
1. Define
L
1
in the List editor.
3 .
2. Return to the Home screen,
and insert a 4th element,
6
.
-l:
6
X-v
1
D
4
Eb
3. Display results in the List
editor, if desired.
3
³
³
Chapter 5: Lists
105
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
105 of 30
4. Change the 4th element,
6
,
to
8
.
-l
8
X
-v
1
D
4
Eb
5. Display results in the List
editor, if desired.
3
Using Math Functions with ListsUsing Math Functions with Lists
When a math function (see Chapter 2: Math Operations) is
applied to a list, it is calculated for every element in the list.
Therefore, the function must be valid for every element in the
list.
You cannot perform a mathematical function on two lists of
different sizes. For example,
{1,2,3}+{4,5,6,7}
results in an error.
Mathematical rules always apply; for example,
1P{0,1,2}
results
in an error because 1 cannot be divided by 0.
Perform mathematical functions with
L
5
and
L
6
on the Home
screen.
1. Define
L
5
={4,5,6}
and
L
6
={7,8,9}
.
3
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate
L
5
+
L
6
.
-l:
-v
5
\
-v
6
b
³
{4,5,6}+{7,8,9}=
{4+7, 5+8, 6+9}=
{11,13,15}
106
Chapter 5: Lists
7305ENG.DOC CH 5 Lists, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:04 PM Printed: 05/19/99 8:59 AM Page
106 of 30
3. Calculate
L
5
2
.
-v
5
6b
4. Select
Radian
mode setting
and calculate cos(
L
6
).
.##"b
-l:
-u
3
-v
6
Eb
For more information, see Chapter 11:
Trigonometry.
L5
2
=
{4
2
, 5
2
, 6
2
}=
{16,25,36}
Use
"
to scroll to
see the entire
answers.
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 107 of 20
Statistical PlotsStatistical Plots
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot ...........................................108
Defining Statistical Data in Lists ....................................... 109
Deselecting Y
n
Functions..................................................109
Defining a Stat Plot ...........................................................109
Selecting Stat Plot Types ...................................................111
Defining Stat Plot Options................................................112
Adjusting Window Values and Format ............................114
Displaying the Stat Plot.....................................................114
Stat Plot Examples .............................................................114
Scatter Plot Ô and xyLine Plot Ó........................ 114
Pictograph Î............................................................117
Bar Graph Ð .............................................................118
Pie Chart Ï ................................................................120
Histogram Ò ...........................................................121
Box Plot Ö...............................................................123
Modified Box Plot Õ ..............................................124
6
108
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 108 of 20
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot
Follow these basic steps when defining a statistical plot. You
may not have to do all of them each time you graph the
designated lists.
Define numerical and categorical
lists in the List editor.
Define the stat plot by entering the
STAT PLOTS menu and selecting
Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3.
Using ZoomStat
WINDOW values.
Graph the stat plot. Trace the plot
with ), if desired.
Turn on the stat plot,
select the Plot Type and define
all corresponding options.
3
-
e
1
,
2
,
or
3
*
(
7
or
)
Deselect Y
n
functions, if desired.
-
}
2
6
Adjust the WINDOW values and
format, if necessary.
'
"
b
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
109
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 109 of 20
Defining Statistical Data in Lists
Statistical plots (stat plots) are graphical representations of
data that has been stored in lists. Therefore, since you need to
create your lists before you can define stat plots, review
Chapter 5: Lists for information on naming and creating both
numerical and categorical lists.
Note: All examples in this chapter assume that you know how
to enter lists in the List editor.
Deselecting
Y
n
Functions
When you press * or a ( command, the calculator
graphs all selected
Y
n
functions (defined in the Y= editor) and
graphs all stat plots that are defined and turned on. If you have
defined and selected functions in the Y= editor and you dont
want them displayed with your stat plots, deselect all defined
functions with - }
2:Y-Vars
6:FnOff
.
For more information on defining and selecting functions in
the Y= editor, see Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
Defining a Stat Plot
Once you have data lists stored in the calculator, you need to
define the stat plot. This requires two steps:
1. Press - e to display the
STAT PLOTS
menu screen.
2. Select
1
,
2
, or
3
to enter the Stat Plot editor for
Plot1
,
Plot2
,
or
Plot3
. Selecting
4
or
5
turns all stat plots off or on when
you graph.
110
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 110 of 20
The Stat Plot Menu Screen
-e
PlotsOff and PlotsOn
-
e
4 and 5
From the
STAT PLOTS
menu, you can choose to turn all stat
plots off or on. This determines whether or not they are
displayed on the Graph screen when you press * or select
a ( command. The TIN73 can graph all three stat plots at
the same time, if desired. If you select either of these
commands, the calculator returns you to the Home screen.
PlotsOff
and
PlotsOn
accept three optional arguments,
1
,
2
or
3
,
which represent their corresponding stat plot. If you do not
include any arguments, the calculator automatically deselects
(turns off) or selects (turns on) all three.
PlotsOff
[
1
,
2
,
3
]
PlotsOn
[
1
,
2
,
3
]
Turn off
Plot1
and
Plot2
.
-e
4
1
¡
2
b
³
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
111
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 111 of 20
The Stat Plot Editor
-e
1, 2 or 3
If the plot has been defined previously, that information is
displayed when you select a plot number.
From the Stat Plot editor, you select (turn on) or deselect
(turn off) the stat plot, and you can select one of eight plot
types (represented as icons) as well as any options that go
with the type.
Selecting Stat Plot Types
To select a stat plot type, display the Stat Plot editor. Use $
and # to move to the
Type
line, and use " and ! to highlight
the individual
Type
icons. Once you have highlighted the
Type
icon that you want, press b to select it. The options for
the plot type then are displayed automatically.
Icon Plot Type Icon Plot Type
Ô
Scatter plot
Ï
Pie chart
Ó
xyLine plot
Ò
Histogram
Î
Pictograph
Ö
Box plot
Ð
Bar graph
Õ
Modified Box plot
112
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 112 of 20
Defining Stat Plot Options
The plot type you select determines which options you can
select. Therefore, when you select a different type, the options
adjust automatically, if necessary.
• To specify a list name, use the - v
Ls
menu.
Highlight the list name you want with the cursor keys,
and then press b. The TIN73 inserts the name at the
cursor location.
• To select an option, highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press b.
• To enter a numerical value, use the number keys, and
then press b.
Remember that when entering elements in a categorical list,
you must surround the first element by quotation marks; they
are optional for the remaining elements.
The following table includes a list of all possible options for all
stat plot types. You only need to specify or select the options
which apply to the stat plot type you are defining.
For option: Do the following:
Xlist
Specify a defined numerical list.
Ylist
Specify a defined numerical list.
Ylist
must be the same length as
Xlist
and
can be the same as
Xlist
. Plots which
require you to specify both the
Xlist
and
Ylist
plot points from those lists as
coordinate pairs.
Mark
Select one type (
,
+
, or
¦
) to specify
appearance of data points or an
outlier (Modified Box plot) on the
graph screen.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
113
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 113 of 20
For option: Do the following:
CategList
Specify a defined categorical list. List
dimension must be from 1 to 7 and
must be the same length as all
corresponding
Data Lists
.
Data List or
DataList#
Specify a defined numerical list. All
Data Lists
must be the same length as
the corresponding
CategList
.
Scale
Specify a number which represents
the quantity of each Pictograph icon.
1
Scale
99999.
Scale
must be big
enough so that it cannot be broken up
into more than 7 icons. Using (
7:ZoomStat
to display the stat plot
automatically adjusts
Scale
for you.
VertàHor
Select vertical or horizontal
orientation for Pictograph icons or
Bar graph bars.
Icons
Select one of 7
Icons
to represent your
Pictograph: Æ, Ç, È, É, Ê, Ë, Ì.
1 2 3
Select number of bars you want
graphed per category in a Bar graph.
You must specify a corresponding
Data
List
for each bar included in the graph.
NumberàPercent
Select whether you want the values in
DataList
to be displayed as numbers or
converted and displayed as
percentages in a Pie chart.
Freq
(optional)
Default=1
Specify a frequency list that tells the
calculator how many times each data
point in
Xlist
occurs.
Freq
must have
the same number of elements as
Xlist
.
114
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 114 of 20
Adjusting Window Values and Format
If you press * to display all selected stat plots, sometimes
you see a blank screen. Try adjusting your viewing window.
The easiest way to do this is with the (
7:ZoomStat
command. This adjusts the viewing window automatically so
that all points of all turned on stat plots are visible. To adjust
window values manually, press '.
In addition, the calculator automatically selects the
AxesOff
option (- g) for Pictograph, Bar graph, Pie chart stat
plots. However, any other selected options on the - g
screen still apply to stat plots (as they do with function
graphs).
For more information on adjusting
WINDOW
values and
formatting the Graph screen, see Chapter 9: Function
Graphing.
Displaying the Stat Plot
Press * to display a stat plot. (Pressing * also
displays any
Y
n
functions that are defined and selected.) Once
you have a plot displayed, you can press ) and use " and
! to move from point to point.
If you have more than one plot turned on at the same time, you
can trace all the points of each plot. Use $ and # to move
from plot to plot.
Stat Plot Examples
The following examples assume that all
Y
n
functions are
deselected (turned off) (- }
2:Y-Vars
6:FnOff
).
Scatter Plot Scatter Plot Ô
and xyLine Plot and xyLine Plot Ó
Scatter plots (Ô) and xyLine plots (Ó) are especially useful
for plotting data over a period of time to indicate trends. An
xyLine plot (Ó) functions exactly like the Scatter plot, except
that it connects the data points with a line.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
115
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 115 of 20
For the years 1978 -1984, determine in which baseball league,
North or South, the homerun leader tends to hit more home
runs. Use Scatter plots to find your solution.
Year Home Runs Year Home Runs
NORTH SOUTH NORTH SOUTH
1978 40 46 1982 37 39
1979 48 45 1983 40 39
1980 48 41 1984 36 43
1981 31 22
1. Create three lists in the List
editor,
YEAR
,
NORTH
, and
SOUTH
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all stat plots.
-e
4
b
3. Display the
STAT PLOTS
menu.
-e
4. Define
Plot1
as a Scatter
plot as shown to the right.
1
b#b#
-v
YEAR
b
#-v
NORTH
b#b
5. Display the
STAT PLOTS
menu.
-e
³
Select the
Ô
icon.
116
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 116 of 20
6. Define
Plot2
as shown to the
right.
2
b#b#
-v
YEAR
b
#-v
SOUTH
b#"b
7. Display the stat plots using
the
ZoomStat
command.
(
7
8. Trace the Scatter plots to
find the solution to the
question.
)
! and " (to trace
point to point)
$ and # (to move
from plot to plot)
9. Redefining
Plot1
as an
xyLine plot makes it even
easier to follow the trends
of its data.
-e
1
#"b
10. Display
Plot1
and
Plot2
using
the
ZoomStat
command.
Trace, if desired.
(
7
) (optional)
Solution
From 1978-1984, the North
League's home run hitter led in
4 of the 7 years.
Using different marks
helps you distinguish
between
Plot1
and
Plot2
.
The X and Y coordinates
The plot that is
being traced
Select the
Ó
icon.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
117
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 117 of 20
Pictograph Pictograph Î
In a Pictograph, an icon symbolizes the quantities being
represented. Pictographs are useful for observing changes in
quantity over time. They also can illustrate comparisons
between similar situations.
The calculator displays no more than seven Pictograph icons
for up to seven categories on the screen. Therefore, if
Scale
is
not big enough (meaning that
Data List
is broken up by more
than seven icons), you get an
INVALID
DIM
error.
If an element in
Data List
is too large to fit the maximum scale
(99999) so that the calculator cant make all icons fit in one
screen, you get a
DOMAIN
error.
For your geography class, you want to compare distances (in
kilometers) between Dallas, Texas, and seven other cities in
North America. Use a vertical Pictograph to display your
results.
City km City km
Toronto, ON 2215 Denver, CO 1397
Mexico City, MX 1775 Kansas City, KS 836
Los Angeles, CA 2180 Vancouver, BC 3444
Washington, DC 1927
1. Create two lists in the List
editor,
CITY
and
DIST
.
Remember to surround the
first categorical list element
with quotation marks
(found in the Text editor).
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
³
Categorical list
Numerical list
118
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 118 of 20
2. Turn off all stat plots.
-e
4
b
3. Display the
STAT PLOTS
menu.
-e
4. Define
Plot1
as a Pictograph
as shown to the right.
1
b#""b
#-v
CITY
b#-v
MILES
b#
500
#
b#b
5. Display the stat plots.
*
6. Trace, if desired.
)
As you press
"
and
!
, the calculator
highlights whole columns. Both list
names and list values are displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
Bar Graph Bar Graph
Ð
A Bar graph plots a group of up to three data lists (converted
to bars) for comparison among one category. Bar graphs are
especially useful for comparing data lists (especially when
organized in categories) over a period of time.
The calculator adjusts all bars so that they fit within the
graphing screen. Therefore, the data list with the largest values
is scaled to fit the screen, and then all other bars are graphed
relative to it. Each element in
CategList
defines a category. You
can define up to seven categories with up to three data bars
per category.
Highlighted
column
Dallas, TX, to Washington,
DC is 1,927 km.
Select the
Î
icon.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
119
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 119 of 20
The
Xscl
WINDOW
value specifies the range of values for each
interval of a Bar graph. The
Yscl
WINDOW
value specifies the
height of a bar in a Bar graph; in other words, it acts as your
bar scale. To adjust
Xscl
and
Yscl
manually, press ' and
enter the new values with the number keys. For more
information about setting
WINDOW
values, see Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
If you want the calculator to adjust the
WINDOW
values for you
automatically, press (
7:ZoomStat
.
Graph the data lists from the Scatter plot baseball example as
a vertical Bar graph (see that section in this chapter, if
necessary). Assign
¨
YEAR
as
CategList
,
¨
NORTH
as
DataList1
and
¨
SOUTH
as
DataList2
. Ignore
DataList3
. (By default,
L
3
is assigned
to
DataList3
, but if another list name is assigned you dont need
to change it.)
1. Turn off all stat plots.
-l:
-e
4
b
2. Display the
STAT PLOTS
menu.
-e
3. Define
Plot1
as a Bar graph
as shown to the right.
1
b#"""
b
4. Specify
CategList
,
DataList1
,
and
DataList2
.
#-v
YEAR
b#
-v
NORTH
b#-v
SOUTH
b
³
Select the
Ð
icon.
120
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 120 of 20
5. Select
Vert
and
2
, if
necessary.
##b"""
b
6. Display the stat plots.
*
7. Trace the Bar graph, if
desired.
)
! and " (to trace bar
to bar)
Pie Chart Pie Chart
Ï
A Pie chart is used to compare parts of a whole. The area of a
pie piece is proportional to the part of 100% that it
represents. You can display up to seven pie pieces.
To trace the Pie chart with ), use " to trace clockwise
and ! to trace counterclockwise.
Keisha owns 4 cats, 5 dogs, 3 fish, 8 birds, and 14 snakes. Use a
percentage Pie chart to illustrate this.
1. Create two lists in the List
editor,
PETS
and
AMNT
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all stat plots.
-e
4
b
³
CategList
DataList
Name
and bar value
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
121
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 121 of 20
3. Display the
STAT PLOTS
menu and select
Plot1
.
-e
1
b
4. Define
Plot1
as a Pie chart
as shown to the right.
#""""b#
-v
PETS
b#
-v
AMNT
b
#"b
5. Display the stat plot.
*
6. Trace the Pie chart, if
desired.
)
" and ! (to trace
from section to section)
Histogram Histogram
Ò
Histograms are useful for representing data grouped in
intervals, and it plots the datas frequency of occurrence for
each interval.
Thirty students recently took a math test. All scores between
100-90 are considered an A, 89-80 as a B, 79-70 as a C, 69-60 as
a D, 59-0 as an F. Use a Histogram to show the scores grouped
by their letter grade.
³
SCORE
FREQ
{99,96,92,88,84,78,74,70,66,64}
{1,2,3,5,2,7,4,3,2,1}
A percentage
Pie chart
CategList
Data List
name
and section's
numerical value
8 birds is
23.529% of
the total pets
owned.
122
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 122 of 20
1. Create two lists in the List
editor,
SCORE
and
FREQ
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all stat plots.
-e
4
b
3. Display the
STAT PLOTS
menu.
-e
4. Define
Plot1
as a Histogram
as shown to the right.
1
b#""""
"b#-v
SCORE
b#
-v
FREQ
b
5. Display the stat plot using
the
ZoomStat
command and
trace the Histogram.
(
7
)
! and " (to trace bar
to bar)
6. Adjust the graphing window
so that the data is grouped
in intervals of 10 and so
that the lowest test score is
60 and the highest is 100.
'
60
#
100
##
10
#
0
#
20
#
1
WINDOW
values
from
ZoomStat
The adjusted
WINDOW
values
Select the
Ò
icon.
7 scores fall between
the min and max.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
123
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 123 of 20
7. Graph and trace the
adjusted Histogram.
*)
" and ! (to trace bar
to bar)
Box Plot Box Plot
Ö
A Box plot illustrates median applications of a data list. Lines
on the plot, called whiskers, extend from the minimum data
point in the set (
minX
) to the first quartile median point (
Q
1
)
and from the third quartile median point (
Q
3
) to the maximum
point (
maxX
). The middle vertical line is the median (
Med
) of all
the data points.
The first quartile contains all data points between
minX
and
Med
; the third quartile contains all data points between
Med
and
maxX
.
When two Box plots are plotted, the first one plots at the top
of the screen and the second plots in the middle. When three
are plotted, the first one plots at the top, the second in the
middle, and the third at the bottom.
Xmin
and
Xmax
specify minimum and maximum X-axis values
when a Box plot is displayed on the Graph screen. Box plots
ignore
Ymin
and
Ymax
values. To adjust
Xmin
and
Xmax
manually, press ' and enter the new values with the
number keys. If you want the calculator to adjust the window
values for you automatically, press (
7:ZoomStat
.
For more information about setting
WINDOW
values, see
Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
Solution
3 students received a D.
14 students received a C.
7 students received a B.
6 students received an A.
14 scores fall
between 70-80.
Intervals=10
because
Xscl=10
124
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 124 of 20
Graph the test scores data from the Histogram example as a
Box plot. (See previous section, if necessary.)
1. Turn off all stat plots.
-e
4
b
2. Display the Stat Plots menu.
-e
3. Define
Plot1
as a Box plot as
shown to the right.
1
b#""""
""b#-v
SCORE
b#
-v
FREQ
b
4. Display the stat plot using
the
ZoomStat
command.
(
7
5. Trace the Box plot.
)
! and " (to trace
point to point)
Modified Box Plot Modified Box Plot
Õ
The Modified Box plot functions exactly like the Box plot,
except it separates outliers from the plot. Outliers are those
data points which are 1.5¦Interquartile Range beyond the
quartiles. The Interquartile Range is defined as the difference
between the third quartile,
Q
3
, and the first quartile,
Q
1
.
Outliers are plotted individually beyond the whisker, using the
Mark
you select from the Stat Plot editor. Outliers are included
in plot traces with ).
³
Select the
Ö
icon.
Q1
Median point and its value
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
125
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 125 of 20
Graph the test scores data from the Histogram and Box plot
examples as a Modified Box plot. (See those sections, if
necessary.) However, adjust
SCORE
and
FREQ
by inserting two
outlier data points: 112 and 40, both at a frequency of 1.
1. Edit
SCORE
and
FREQ
in the
List editor.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all
STAT PLOTS
.
-e
4
b
3. Display the
STAT PLOTS
menu.
-e
4. Define
Plot1
as a Modified
Box plot as shown to the
right.
1
b#""""
"""b#
-v
SCORE
b#-v
FREQ
b#"
b
5. Display the stat plot using
the
ZoomStat
command.
(
7
6. Trace the plot, if desired.
)
! and " (to trace
point to point)
³
Select the
Õ
icon.
126
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
7306ENG.DOC Statistical Plots and Analyses Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/29/98 3:52 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:00 AM
Page 126 of 20
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 127 of 22
StatisticalStatistical
AnalysesAnalyses
The - v MATH Menu................................................128
min( and max( - v " " 1 and 2 .....................128
mean(, median(, and mode(
- v " " 3, 4, and 5.....................................130
stdDev( - v " " 6 ...........................................131
sum( - v " " 7................................................ 132
The - v CALCULATE Menu.......................................133
Using Frequency Lists with
- v CALC Menu Items.................................133
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats
- v " " " 1 and 2 ..................................... 134
Manual-Fit - v ! 3 ..........................................138
Med-Med - v ! 4............................................140
LinReg(ax+b) - v ! 5 ......................................142
QuadReg - v ! 6............................................. 144
ExpReg - v ! 7................................................146
7
128
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 128 of 22
The -
v
MATH Menu
The - v
MATH
menu allows you to calculate statistical
analyses with lists (see chapter 5: Lists).
-v""
1:min(
Returns the minimum of two real numbers,
lists, or expressions.
2:max(
Returns the maximum of two real numbers,
lists, or expressions.
3:mean(
Returns the calculated average of the values
in a list.
4:median(
Returns the middle value occurring in a list.
5:mode(
Returns the most frequently occurring
element in a list.
6:stdDev(
Returns the standard deviation of the
elements in a list.
7:sum(
Returns the sum of the elements in a list.
min( and max( min( and max( -
v
"
"
1 and 2 1 and 2
These are identical to the
min(
and
max(
commands found on
the 1
NUM
menu.
min(
(minimum) returns the smaller of two values or the
smallest element in one list. value can be a real number,
expression or a list.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
129
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 129 of 22
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
min(
valueA,valueB
)
min(
list
)
max(
(maximum) functions exactly like
min(
, but it always
returns the larger of two values or the largest element in a list.
Simply substitute
max(
in place of
min(
in the syntax models
above.
Compare
L
1
and
L
2
to find the
min(
and
max(
.
L
1=
{1,2,3}
, and
L
2=
{3,2,1}
.
1. Define two lists in the List
editor,
L
1
and
L
2
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Find the list minimums.
-l:
-v""
1
-v
1
¡
-v
2
Eb
3. Find the list maximums.
-v""
2
-v
1
¡
-v
2
Eb
³
130
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 130 of 22
mean(, median(, and mode(mean(, median(, and mode(
-
v
"
"
3, 4, and 5 3, 4, and 5
median(
returns the median (the middle element) of list when
the elements, even if the list elements are not arranged in
numerical order. With an even number of elements, the
calculator returns the average of the two middle elements.
mean(
returns the mean (mathematical average) of list.
mode(
returns the mode (element which occurs most frequently) of
list.
If a second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq must
have the same number of elements. If freq is not included,
then the default is 1 and every element in the first list is only
counted once.
mean(
list[,freq]
)
median(
list[,freq]
)
mode(
list[,freq]
)
Calculate Davids final course average for his math class.
He received an 85 on Test 1, a 78 on Test 2, and a 90 on Test 3.
He received an 82 on his Midterm Exam and a 75 on his
Final Exam.
Tests count 1 time, the Midterm counts 2 times, and the Final
Exam counts 3 times.
1. Create two lists in the List
editor,
TEST
and
FREQ
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5:Lists.
³
{85,78,90,82,75}
{1,1,1,2,3}
¨
TEST
¨
FREQ
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
131
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 131 of 22
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the average of
the test scores.
-l:
-v""
3
-v
TEST
b¡-v
FREQ
bEb
stdDev( stdDev(
-
v
"
"
6 6
stdDev(
returns the standard deviation of list. If a second list,
freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the frequency of the
elements in the first list. list and freq must have the same
number of elements.
stdDev(
list,freq[,type]
)
type=
0
(population standard deviation) or
1
(sample
population deviation). If type is not specified, the calculator
returns sample population deviation.
Find the population standard
deviation of
¨
TEST
(from the
previous example). Use
¨
FREQ
as
your freq.
-v""
6
-v
TEST
b
¡-v
FREQ
b¡
0
Eb
³
Solution
David's final course
average is 80.25.
132
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 132 of 22
sum( sum( -
v
"
"
7 7
sum(
(summation) returns the sum of all elements in list.
Specify the additional optional arguments to return the sum of
the range of elements between start and end. start and end
represent element places, not the element values.
To add the entire list:
sum(
list
)
To add the range of elements from start to the last element in
list:
sum(
list,start
)
To add the range of elements between start and end:
sum(
list,start,end
)
Find the sum of
¨
SUM
between elements 4 and 6, where
¨
SUM={3,10,36,14,33,5,22,45}
.
1. Create a list, in the List
editor,
SUM
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the partial list
sum.
-l:
-v""
7
-v
SUM
b
¡
4
¡
6
Eb
³
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
133
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 133 of 22
The -
v
CALC Menu
The - v
CALC
menu allows you to calculate statistical
analyses on lists. When you choose an item from the menu, the
calculator returns a list of statistical variables. Following the
1-Var Stats
and
2-Var Stats
explanation, a list and definition of all
possible statistical variables is provided.
-v""" o r
-v!
1:1-Var Stats
Calculates 1-variable statistics.
2:2-Var Stats
Calculates 2-variable statistics.
3:Manual-Fit
Allows user to fit a line manually to
plotted data.
4:Med-Med
Calculates a Median-Median line for the
plotted data.
5:LinReg(ax+b)
Fits a linear model to plotted data.
6:QuadReg
Fits a quadratic model to plotted data.
7:ExpReg
Fits an exponential model to plotted data.
Using Frequency Lists with Using Frequency Lists with -
v
CALC CALC
Menu ItemsMenu Items
For all menu items, you can specify a second list, freq, which
is interpreted as the frequency of the elements in the first list.
Each element in freq must be 0, and at least one element
must be > 0.
134
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 134 of 22
Non-integer freq elements are valid. This is useful when
entering frequencies expressed as percentages or parts that
add up to 1. However, if freq contains non-integer frequencies,
Sx
and
Sy
(sample standard deviation) are undefined, and
values are not displayed for
Sx
and
Sy
in the statistical results.
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats 1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats -
v
!
1 and 2 1 and 2
1-Var Stats
(one-variable statistics) analyzes data from one list
with one measured variable (X).
1-Var Stats
accepts two
optional arguments, XList and freq. If XList is not specified,
the default list name is
L
1
.
1-Var Stats
[XList,freq]
2-Var Stats
(two-variable statistics) analyzes paired data from
two lists with two measured variables, X, the independent
variable, and Y, the dependent variable.
2-Var Stats
accepts
three optional arguments, XList, YList, and freq. If XList and
YList are not specified, the default list names are
L
1
and
L
2
.
2-Var Stats
[XList,YList,freq]
Find the
1-Var Stats
for
L
1
, where
L
1
={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
. Use
L
2
as
freq, where
L
2
={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
.
1. Define two lists in the List
editor,
L
1
and
L
2
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
³
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
135
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 135 of 22
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the
1-Var Stats
for the lists.
-l:
-v!
1
-v
1
¡
-v
2
b
Find the 2-Var Stats for
L
1
(XList) and
L
2
(YList), where
L
1
={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
and
L
2
={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
. Use
L
3
as freq, where
{L
3
=1,2,2,2,4,4,3,3}
.
1. Define the three lists in the
List editor,
L
1
,
L
2
, and
L
3
.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the
2-Var Stats
for the lists.
-l:
-v!
2
-v
1
¡
-v
2
¡
-v
3
b
³
Press
$
and
#
to
scroll all results.
Press
$
and
#
to
scroll all results.
136
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 136 of 22
What Do the Results Mean?
1-Var Stats
and
2-Var Stats
variables are calculated and stored as
indicated below. To access these variables for use in
expressions, press - }
3:Statistics
and select the
appropriate menu. If you edit a list or change the type of
analysis, all statistical variables are cleared.
Variables Definition VARS Menu
x
or
y
Mean of all
x
or
y
values.
XY
Gx
or
Gy
Sum of all
x
values or
y
values.
G
Gx
2
or
Gy
2
Sum of all
x
2
values or
y
2
values.
G
Sx
or
Sy
Sample standard deviation of
x
or
y.
XY
sx
or
sy
Population standard deviation
of
x
or
y.
XY
n
Number of
x
or
x
,
y
data points.
XY
minX
minY
Minimum of
x
values or
y
values.
XY
maxX
maxY
Maximum of
x
values or
y
values.
XY
Gxy
Sum of
x
¦
y
for all
xy
pairs in
two lists.
G
Q
1
Median of the elements
between
minX
and
Med
(1st
quartile). Only calculated for
1-Var Stats
.
PTS
Med
Median of all data points.
PTS
Q
3
Median of the elements
between
Med
and
maxX
(3rd
quartile). Only calculated for
1-Var Stats
.
PTS
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
137
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 137 of 22
Variables Definition VARS Menu
r
Correlation coefficient
EQ
r
2
or R
2
Coefficient of determination
EQ
RegEQ
Regression equation
EQ
x1,y1,x2,y2,
x3,y3
Summary points
PTS
a, b, c
Regressionà fit coefficients
EQ
n (number of data points)
n
=number of
x
data points in a
1-Var Stats
analysis or the
number of
x
and
y
data points in a
2-Var Stats
analysis. Since
both variable lists always have the same number of list
elements in
2-Var Stats
,
n
for
x
is always equal to
n
for
y
.
Therefore,
n
applies to both the
x
and
y
analyses.
freq (Frequency Lists)
If freq is specified,
n
is equal to the sum of the elements in that
list. For example, if the freq is {2,2,3,1,2},
n
={2+2+3+1+2}=10.
Q
1
, Q
3
, and Med
Q
1
,
Q
3
, and
Med
are undefined if the freq contains non-integer
values. They also are not calculated if the freq contains a value
larger than 99.
RegEQ
The calculator stores the most recently generated regression
equation (see - v
CALC
menu items 37) to the variable,
RegEQ
. If, for example, you execute
5: LinReg(ax+b)
, but you
dont initially store
RegEQ
to a
Y
n
variable, you can later insert
RegEQ
into the Y= editor. The calculator graphs the regression
equation when it is selected.
If the frequency for an element or data pair is 0, the element or
data pair is ignored in the calculation.
138
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 138 of 22
Manual-Fit Manual-Fit -
v
!
3 3
Manual-Fit
allows you to fit a line to plotted data on the Graph
screen manually (as opposed to the calculator automatically
drawing it for you). You can execute
Manual-Fit
from either the
Graph screen or the Home screen.
From the Graph screen, select
Manual-Fit,
and then draw the
line (steps provided below). The linear equation in the form
y=ax+b
is shown at the top of the Graph screen. You can use
the cursors to adjust the line, if necessary, and the
a
and
b
equation values change accordingly.
From the Home screen,
Manual-Fit
accepts one optional
argument, Yn. The calculator stores to Yn (in the Y= editor)
the
ax+b
equation that manually fits the plotted data. To access
the
Y
n
variables, press
-
}
2
.
Manual-Fit
Yn
From either the Home screen or the Graph screen or Program
editor, select
Manual-Fit
after you have plotted the stat plot. To
draw the
Manual-Fit
line:
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the line segment
that you want to draw, and then press
b
.
2. As you press the cursor keys, the line is drawn and the
slope is adjusted. When you have matched the plotted
points as desired, press
b
.
3. The line segment is drawn across the entire screen and
the
ax+b
equation is shown at the top of the Graph screen.
4. Continue to adjust the lines slope with
$
and
#
, and the
y-intercept with
!
and
"
, if desired.
5. If you specified a
Y
n
variable on the Home screen, you can
view the selected and defined equation in the Y= editor
(
&
). If you no longer want to view the Manual-Fit line,
deselect it in the Y= editor by highlighting the
=
and
pressing
b
.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
139
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 139 of 22
Graph a scatter plot for
L
1
and
L
2
, where
L
1
={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
and
L
2
={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
, and use
Manual-Fit
to draw a line through the
points.
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
2
, if desired.
.#"""b
2. After entering the lists,
define
Plot1
as a scatter plot
using
L
1
and
L
2
, as shown to
the right.
-eb
For more information on defining stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off
Y
2
,
Y
3
, and
Y
4
, if
they have been previously
defined and selected.
-l:
-}
2
6
2
¡
3
¡
4
b
4. Plot
L
1
and
L
2
.
(
7
5. From the Home screen,
assign the
Manual-Fit
(ax+b)
line to
Y
1
.
-l:
-v!
3
-}
2
1
b
³
140
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 140 of 22
6. Move the cursor to the
beginning point of line.
"!$# (as
necessary)
b
7. Move the cursor to the end
point of line.
"!$# (as
necessary)
8. Draw the line.
b
9. Adjust line with cursor
keys, if necessary.
"!$#
b(when finished)
10. View the equation in the
Y= editor, if desired.
&
Med-Med Med-Med
-
v
!
4 4
Med-Med
(Median-Median) fits the model equation,
y=ax+b
, to
the data using the median-median line (resistant line)
technique, calculating the summary points
x1
,
y1
,
x2
,
y2
,
x3
, and
y3
.
Med-Med
displays values for
a
(slope) and
b
(y-intercept).
You can execute
Med-Med
from either the Graph screen, the
Home screen, or the Program editor.
From the Home screen or the Program editor,
Med-Med
accepts
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and
YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation variable, Yn. freq
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList and YList.
Cursor changes to a small box.
ax+b
Y
2
,
Y
3
, and
Y
4
may vary.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
141
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 141 of 22
If freq is omitted, all values are used once. If XList and YList
are not specified, the default list names are
L
1
and
L
2
. To
access
Y
n
variables, press - }
2
:
Y-Vars
.
Med-Med
[XList,YList,freq,Yn]
Graph a scatter plot for
L
1
and
L
2
, where
L
1
={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
and
L
2
={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
, and use
Med-Med
to draw the median-median
line through the points.
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
2
, if desired.
.#"""b
2. After entering the lists,
define
Plot1
as a scatter plot
using
L
1
and
L
2
, as shown to
the right.
-e
For more information on defining stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off
Y
3
and
Y
4
, if they
have been previously
defined and selected.
-l:
-}
2
6
3
¡
4
b
4. Find the
Med-Med
line, and
store the results to
Y
2
.
:-v!
4
-}
2
2
b
Specifying
¨
1
and
¨
2
is optional since
they are the default
listnames
.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the
Yn
variable.
³
142
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 142 of 22
5. View the line on the Graph
screen.
(
7
6. View the equation stored to
Y
2
, if desired.
&
LinReg(ax+b) LinReg(ax+b)
-
v
!
5 5
LinReg(ax+b)
(linear regression) fits the model equation
y=ax+b
to the data using a least-squares fit. It displays the value for
a
(slope) and
b
(y-intercept); when
DiagnosticOn
is set, it also
displays values for
r
2
(coefficient of determination) and
r
(correlation coefficient). The
DiagnosticOn
command is in the
CATALOG
(-|).You can execute
LinReg(ax+b)
from the
Graph screen, Home screen, or the Program editor.
It is also helpful to compare the slope of the line you draw
with
Manual-Fit
to the slope of the line the calculator calculates
with the
LinReg(ax+b)
command.
From the Home screen or the Program editor,
LinReg(ax+b)
accepts four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names,
XList and YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation
variable, Yn. freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once. If XList and YList are not specified,
the default list names are
L
1
and
L
2
. To access
Y
n
variables,
press - }
2:Y-Vars
.
LinReg(ax+b)
[XList,YList,freq,Yn]
The
Med-Med
line
The Manual-Fit line,
Y
1
(previous section).
Y
3
and
Y
4
may vary.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
143
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 143 of 22
Graph a scatter plot for
L
1
and
L
2
, where
L
1
={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
and
L
2
={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
, and use
LinReg(ax+b)
to draw the linear
regression line through the points.
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
2
, if desired.
.#"""b
2. After entering the lists,
define
Plot1
as a scatter plot
using
L
1
and
L
2
, as shown to
the right.
-e
For more information on defining stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off
Y
3
and
Y
4
, if they
have been previously
defined and selected.
-l:
-}
2
6
3
¡
4
b
4. Find the
LinReg(ax+b)
line,
and store the results to
Y
2
.
-l:
-v!
5
-}
2
2
b
Specifying
¨
1
and
¨
2
is optional since
they are the default
listnames
.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the
Yn
variable.
³
144
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 144 of 22
5. View the line on the Graph
screen.
(
7
6. View the equation stored to
Y
2
, if desired.
&
QuadReg QuadReg
-
v
!
6 6
QuadReg
(quadratic regression) fits the second-degree
polynomial
y=ax
2
+bx+c
to the data. It displays values for
a
,
b
,
and
c
; when
DiagnosticOn
is set, it also displays a value for
r
2
(coefficient of determination). The
DiagnosticOn
command is in
the
CATALOG
(- |). You can execute the
QuadReg
command from the Graph screen, the Home screen, or the
Program editor.
For three data points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for four
or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least three data
points are required.
From the Home screen or the Program editor,
QuadReg
accepts
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and
YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation variable, Yn. freq
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted, all values are used
once. If XList and YList are not specified, the default list
names are
L
1
and
L
2
. To access
Y
n
variables, press - }
2
.
QuadReg
[XList,YList,freq,Yn]
The
LinReg(ax+b)
line
The
Manual-Fit
line,
Y
1
(see
example from that section)
Y
3
and
Y
4
may vary.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
145
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 145 of 22
Graph a scatter plot for
L
1
and
L
2
, where
L
1
={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
and
L
2
={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
, and use
QuadReg
to draw the quadratic
regression curve through the points.
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
2
, if desired.
.#"""b
2. After entering the lists,
define
Plot1
as a scatter plot
using
L
1
and
L
2
, as shown to
the right.
-e
For more information on defining Stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off
Y
2
,
Y
3
and
Y
4
, if they
have been previously
defined and selected.
-l:
-}
2
6
2
¡
3
¡
4
b
4. Find the
QuadReg
curve, and
store the results to
Y
1
.
-l:
-v!
6
-}
2
1
b
Specifying
¨
1
and
¨
2
is optional since
they are the default
listnames
.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the
Yn
variable.
5. View the curve on the
Graph screen.
(
6
³
146
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 146 of 22
6. View the equation stored to
Y
1
, if desired.
&
ExpReg ExpReg
-
v
!
7 7
ExpReg
(exponential regression) fits the model equation
y=ab
x
to the data using a least-squares fit and transformed values x
and ln(y). It displays values for
a
and
b
; when
DiagnosticOn
is
set, it also displays values for
r
2
(coefficient of determination)
and
r
(correlation coefficient). The
DiagnosticOn
command is in
the
CATALOG
(- |). You can execute
ExpReg
from the
Graph screen, the Home screen, or the Program editor.
From the Home screen or the Program editor,
ExpReg
accepts
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and
YList; a frequency list, freq: and an equation variable, Yn. freq
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted, all values are used
once. If XList and YList are not specified, the default list
names are
L
1
and
L
2
. To access
Y
n
variables, press - }
2
.
ExpReg
[XList,YList,freq,Yn]
Graph a scatter plot for
L
1
and
L
2
, where
L
1
={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
and
L
2
={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
, and use
ExpReg
to draw the exponential
regression curve through the points.
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to
2
, if desired.
.#"""b
³
Y
2
,
Y
3
, and
Y
4
may vary.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
147
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 147 of 22
2. After entering the lists,
define
Plot1
as a scatter plot
using
L
1
and
L
2
, as shown to
the right.
-e
For more information on defining stat
zplots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off
Y
2
,
Y
3
, and
Y
4
, if
they have been previously
defined and selected.
-l:
-}
2
6
2
¡
3
¡
4
b
4. Find the
ExpReg
curve, and
store the results to
Y
1
.
-l:-
v!
7
-}
2
1
b
Specifying
¨
1
and
¨
2
is optional since
they are the default
list names
.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the
Yn
variable.
5. View the curve on the
Graph screen.
(
6
6. View the equation stored to
Y
1
, if desired.
&
Y
2
,
Y
3
, and
Y
4
may vary.
148
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
7307ENG.DOC CH 7, Statistical Analyses, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:07 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:00 AM Page 148 of 22
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 149 of 14
TablesTables
What Is a Table? ................................................................150
Steps for Creating a Table.................................................151
Defining and Selecting Functions in the Y= Editor &....152
Setting Up the Table - f .................................... 153
Displaying the Table - i.......................................154
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Auto ...............................155
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Ask..................................156
Indpnt=Ask .................................................................. 157
Editing Y
n
from the Table Screen..............................160
Table Setup from the Home Screen .................................161
8
150
Chapter 8: Tables
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 150 of 14
What Is a Table?
A table displays coordinate pair (
X
,
Y
) solutions for a defined
function. One column displays independent variable values
(
X
), and all others display corresponding dependent variable
values (
Y
).
On the TIN73, functions can be displayed in one of three ways,
as shown here with the function,
Y
1
=X
2
-4X+3
.
For more information about the Y= editor and function
graphing, see Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
The Y= editor (&) shows
an algebraic representation.
The Graph screen (*)
shows a graphic representation.
The Table screen (- i)
shows a numeric representation
in coordinate pairs.
Independent variable (X)
Dependent variable (Y)
Y= X
2
N4X+3
Chapter 8: Tables
151
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 151 of 14
Steps for Creating a Table
Follow these basic steps when defining a table.
Define or edit up to four functions
in the Y= editor.
Select the Y
n
function(s) that you
want to be included in the table.
Set up the table.
Display the table. Numeric
Notation, Decimal Notation, and
Angle mode settings determine the
display of the elements.
Y
1
and
Y
2
are
selected;
Y
3
is
deselected.
&
Highlight
=
, and
press b.
- f
- i
152
Chapter 8: Tables
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 152 of 14
Defining and Selecting Functions
in the Y= Editor &
To create a table of values for a function, you first must define
the function in the Y= editor. Press & to display the Y= editor;
then define up to four functions,
Y
1
,
Y
2
,
Y
3
, and
Y
4
, in terms of
the independent variable,
X
.
For every selected function in the Y= editor, the calculator
automatically creates a column of
Y
n
values. Because the
Y= editor holds up to four functions, the TIN73 can create up
to four
Y
n
columns in a table, one for each function.
When you first enter a function, it is selected automatically. To
select or deselect a function, highlight the
=
with the cursor,
and then press b.
For more details on entering functions, see Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
Define Y
1
=X
2
N4X+3.
1. Display the Y= editor.
&
2. Move the cursor to
Y
1,
and
clear if necessary.
#:
3. Enter
Y
1
= X
2
N4X+3
.
I6T
4
I\
3
³
Your screen may vary.
When you first enter a
function, it is selected
automatically.
Chapter 8: Tables
153
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 153 of 14
Setting Up the Table -
f
Use the
TABLE SETUP
screen to specify the initial settings for
your table. To select an
Indpnt
or
Depend
setting, highlight the
one you want with the cursor, and then press b.
-f
TblStart
Default=
0
Specifies the first value displayed in the
independent variable (
X
) column and can be
any real number.
@Tbl
Default=
1
Specifies the increment by which the
X
values
increase or decrease.
Indpnt:
Default=
Auto
Refers to the independent variable (
X
) column
v
alues. You must select one of two choices:
•
Auto
X
values are automatically
displayed in the independent variable
column when you view the Table screen.
•
Ask
 No
X
values are shown when you
view the Table screen. Instead, you enter
the values for the
X
column.
Depend:
Default=
Auto
Refers to all dependent variable (
Y
n
) column
v
alues. You must select one of two choices:
•
Auto
Y
n
values of all selected functions
are automatically displayed in their
respective columns when you view the
Table screen.
•
Ask
 No
Y
n
values are shown when you
view the Table screen. Instead you select
which
Y
n
values you want the calculator to
display.
154
Chapter 8: Tables
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 154 of 14
Displaying the Table -
i
Once your functions are defined and selected in the Y= editor
and you have set up your table in the
TABLE SETUP
screen, if
necessary, you can display the table with - i.
-i
On the Table screen, you can see lower
X
values by placing the
cursor anywhere in the
X
column and pressing $, as necessary
(you cant scroll up from the
Y
n
columns). To see higher
X
values, use # from anywhere on the Table screen.
Only two
Y
n
columns appear at a time on the Table screen. Use
" to display a third or fourth
Y
n
column.
When you highlight a table element, the entry line displays the
value in its entirety.
The values displayed in the table are affected by the mode
settings. If the calculator is set to the
Sci
Numeric Notation
mode, all applicable values in all columns are displayed in
scientific notation. If your calculator is set to
Radian
Angle
mode and a defined function is a trig function, all the table
values for that function are interpreted as radians, not degrees.
Chapter 8: Tables
155
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 155 of 14
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=AutoIndpnt=Auto and Depend=Auto
Select these settings on the
TABLE SETUP
screen when you
want all
X
and
Y
n
values to appear automatically.
You have two dogs, Rover and Spot. You feed Rover 3 times a
day. You feed Spot 4 times a day. How many times will Spot
and Rover have eaten after 3 and 5 days?
1. Reset default settings.
-Ÿ
7
2
2
Note
: This resets table settings and
all mode settings, and deselects any
previously defined and selected
Y
n
functions.
2. Display the Y= editor.
&
3. Clear
Y
1
,
if necessary. Enter
Y
1
=3X
.
:
3
I
4. Clear
Y
2
,
if necessary. Enter
Y
2
=4X
.
#:
4
I
5. Display the table (using
default table settings).
-i
³
Your Y= editor may
look different.
When
X=3
,
Y
1
=9
and
Y
2
=12
.
Y
1
=3X
X=number of days
Y=total times Rover has eaten
Y
2
=4X
X=number of days
Y=total times Spot has eaten
After Day 3
Rover has eaten 9 times.
Spot has eaten 12 times.
Rover has eaten 15 times.
Spot has eaten 20 times.
After Day 5
156
Chapter 8: Tables
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 156 of 14
How many times will Spot and Rover have eaten after 1, 3, and
4 weeks? (Refer to the previous example, if necessary.)
1. Set up the table where
TblStart=0
,
@Tbl=7
,
Indpnt=Auto
, and
Depend=Auto
.
-f
0
#
7
#b
#b
2. Display the table.
-i
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=AskIndpnt=Auto and Depend=Ask
Select these settings on the
TABLE SETUP
screen when you
want
X
values to appear automatically, but you want to be able
to reveal
Y
n
values one at a time. It is also helpful in
recognizing patterns between different
Y
n
solutions.
³
TblStart=0
X
values change by
7 since
@
Tbl=7.
After Day 7
(End of Week 1)
Rover has eaten 21 times.
Spot has eaten 28 times.
Rover has eaten 63 times.
Spot has eaten 84 times.
Rover has eaten 84 times.
Spot has eaten 112 times.
After Day 21
(End of Week 3)
After Day 28
(End of Week 4)
Chapter 8: Tables
157
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 157 of 14
Display the number of times Rover has eaten after 4 days and
8 days, and display the number of times Spot has eaten after 3
days and 6 days. (Refer to the previous example, if necessary.)
1. Setup the table where
TblStart=3
,
@Tbl=1
,
Indpnt=Auto
, and
Depend=Ask
.
-f
3
#
1
#b#"
b
2. Display the table.
-i
3. Display how many times
Rover (
Y
1
) has eaten after 4
and 8 days.
#"b
####b
4. Display how many times
Spot (
Y
2
) has eaten after 3
and 6 days.
"$$b
$$$b
Indpnt=AskIndpnt=Ask
Select these settings on the
TABLE SETUP
screen when you
want to find specific table values, especially those that are not
in chronological order or which span across a large range of
numbers.
TblStart
and
@Tbl
do not apply when
Indpnt=Ask
.
³
X
starts with 3 because
TblStart=3
.
Spot has eaten 12 times.
Rover has eaten 12 times.
After Day 6
After Day 8
Spot has eaten 24 times.
Rover has eaten 24 times.
After Day 3
After Da
4
158
Chapter 8: Tables
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 158 of 14
How many total times will Spot and Rover have eaten after 16
days, 37 days, 52 days, and 74 days? (Refer to the previous
examples, if necessary.)
1. Setup the table where
Indpnt=Ask
and
Depend=Auto
.
-f
##"b
#b
2. Display the table.
-i
3. Enter
X=16
.
16
b
4. Enter
X=37
,
X=52
, and
X=74
.
37
b
52
b
74
b
³
TblStart
and @
Tbl
values are ignored.
After Day 16
Rover has eaten 111 times.
Spot has eaten 148 times.
Rover has eaten 156 times.
Spot has eaten 208 times.
After Day 37
After Day 52
Rover has eaten 222 times.
Spot has eaten 296 times.
After Day 74
Rover has eaten 48 times.
Spot has eaten 64 times.
Chapter 8: Tables
159
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 159 of 14
Editing X Values from the Table Screen
You can edit
X
values from the Table screen when
Indpnt=Ask
.
Change X=37 to X=36. (Refer to the previous example, if
necessary.)
1. Display the current table.
-i
2. Highlight
X=37
.
# or $ (as necessary)
3. Move the cursor to the
entry line.
b
4. Clear the entry line.
:
5. Enter
36
and insert it into
table.
36
b
³
Table values
are adjusted.
160
Chapter 8: Tables
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 160 of 14
Editing Editing
YY
n
from the Table Screen from the Table Screen
At any time you can edit
Y
n
from the Table screen without
returning to the Y= editor.
Change Y
1
=3x to Y
1
=3x+5. (Refer to the previous example, if
necessary.)
1. Display the Table screen,
and highlight
Y
1
with the
cursor.
-i
"a nd $ (as
necessary)
2. Move the cursor to the
entry line.
b
3. Clear the entry line.
:
4. Enter
3X+5
.
3
I\
5
5. Insert the equation back
into the table.
b
6. If desired, display the
Y= editor to confirm that
Y
1
has indeed been changed.
&
³
Table values
are adjusted.
Chapter 8: Tables
161
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 161 of 14
Table Setup from the Home Screen
You can store values to
TblStart
and
@Tbl
from the Home screen
or the Program editor. These table variable names are on the
- }
5:Table
menu.
You also can select
DependAsk
,
DependAuto
,
IndpntAsk
, and
IndpntAuto
from a Program editor to turn on these settings
during program execution.
Assign 6 to
TblStart
and 3 to
@Tbl
from the Home screen.
1. Go to Home screen and
clear, if desired.
-l:
2. Store 6 to
TblStart
.
6
X-}
5
1
b
3. Assign 3 to
@Tbl
.
3
X-}
5
2
b
4. Display the
TABLE SETUP
screen to confirm that the
values you entered have
indeed been set.
-f
³
162
Chapter 8: Tables
7308ENG.DOC CH 8 Tables, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:08 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM
Page 162 of 14
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 163 of 24
Function GraphingFunction Graphing
Steps for Graphing a Function..........................................164
Example of Function Graphing......................................... 165
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor & .........................167
Entering Functions ......................................................167
Editing Functions ........................................................168
Selecting Functions .....................................................168
Exiting the Y= Editor ..................................................169
Selecting a Graph Style .....................................................169
Setting the Window Format - g........................ 171
Defining Window Values ..................................................173
The Window Values Screen ' .........................174
Determining Window Values for a Specific Graph ...175
Displaying a Graph ............................................................177
Smart Graph ................................................................178
Exploring the Graph with the Free-Moving Cursor.....178
Exploring a Function Graph with ) ....................178
Controlling the Increments of a Trace.......................179
Adjusting Window Values with the ( ZOOM Menu... 181
Zoom Box (1.......................................................182
Zoom In and Zoom Out ( 2 and 3 .....................183
ZStandard ( 6 .....................................................184
ZInteger ( 0 ........................................................ 184
Other Zoom Commands .............................................185
The ( MEMORY Menu................................................185
ZPrevious ( " 1 ..................................................185
SetFactors ( " 2 .................................................186
9
164
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 164 of 24
Steps for Graphing a Function
Follow these basic steps when graphing a function. You may
not have to do all of them each time.
( 6 values
Define or edit up to four functions
in the Y= editor.
Select the Y
n
function(s) that you
want to graph. Deselect statistical
plots, if desired (Chapter 7).
Define the viewing Window
values. This may include using the
ZOOM
menu.
Y
1
is selected;
Y
3
is deselected.
Set the graph style for each
selected function.
&
Highlight
=
, and then
press b to select
or deselect.
Highlight the area to
the left of
Y
n
. b
cycles through 7
styles.
Xmin=M10
Xmax=10
@x=.21276595744681
Xscl=1
Ymin=M10
Ymax=10
Yscl=1
'
or
(
The Above graph
style is selected
for
Y
1
Set the window format.
*
,
)
,
or
(
-
g
Graph the selected functions with
*. ) and ( also
automatically display the graph.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
165
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 165 of 24
Example of Function Graphing
For every cookie Tham eats, Antonio eats two. How many
cookies does Antonio eat if Tham eats 1 cookie, 2 cookies, 3
cookies, and 4 cookies?
Find the equation that represents the relationship between
how many cookies Tham eats and how many Antonio eats,
and represent your answers in the form of a function graph.
These steps explain what the calculator does internally when
you define a function graph. The next page shows how to use
the TIN73 to find the answers to this example.
1. This example uses these
X values:
X=1
X=2
X=3
X=4
2. The TIN73 solves for Y
using specific X values.
Y = 2¦
X
Y = 2¦1 = 2
Y = 2¦2 = 4
Y = 2¦3 = 6
Y = 2¦4 = 8
3. It generates a table of
(X, Y) coordinate pairs
for you to look at.
XY
12
24
36
48
4. It graphs the (X,Y) pairs.
³
Y=2X
X=number of cookies Tham eats
Y=number of cookies Antonio eats
2
2
3
4
5
1
0
4
6
6
8
166
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 166 of 24
Graph Y=2X on your calculator and find the solutions to the
word problem.
1. Display the Y= editor.
&
2. Clear
Y
1
=,
if necessary.
Enter
Y
1
=2X
.
:
2
I
3. Show the table of (X,Y)
coordinate pairs, if desired;
use
TblStart=0
and
@Tbl=1
.
-i
See Chapter 8: Tables for more
information about function tables.
4. Define the viewing window
for Quadrant 1 only.
(
4
5. Trace the graph with the
cursor keys.
)
(Use ! and " to move the
cursor along the graph.)
6. Find the Y values when
X=1, 2, 3,and 4.
1
b
2
b
3
b
4
b
³
Your Y= editor may vary.
Deselect all other
defined functions, if
necessary.
Use
$
and
#
to scroll
the
X
column.
X
- and
Y
-
coordinates of
cursor
The trace cursor
When
X=1, Y=2.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
167
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 167 of 24
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor &
Use the Y= editor to define up to four functions,
Y
1,
Y
2,
Y
3
, and
Y
4
, in terms of the independent variable, X.
Press & to display the Y= editor. The TIN73 graphs up to four
defined functions at the same time.
If the result of an expression is not a real number, that point is
not plotted. You do not get an error.
&
Entering FunctionsEntering Functions
Functions can consist of variables, lists, trigonometric or
logarithmic expressions, or variations of already defined
functions (for example,
Y
2
=2
¦
Y
1
). Access a
Y
n
variable by
pressing - }
2:Y-Vars
.
Define Y
2
=3X+5.
1. Display the Y= editor.
&
2. Move the cursor to the
function that you want to
define,
Y
2
.
#
3. Clear
Y
2
, if necessary.
:
4. Enter
Y
2
=3X+5
.
3
I\
5
³
If you tried the chapter
example problem, then
Y
1
=2X
.
168
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 168 of 24
Editing FunctionsEditing Functions
You can edit or delete functions at any time in the Y= editor.
Move the cursor to the function in the Y= editor that you want
to change.
You can:
• Use the edit keys such as / and - m to delete and
insert characters.
• Overwrite current entries.
• Delete a function with :. Position the cursor
anywhere on the function.
Selecting FunctionsSelecting Functions
Even if a function is defined in the Y= editor, the TIN73 only
graphs the function if it is selected (turned on). You know that
a function is selected because the background behind a
functions equal sign (
=
) is dark.
When you first define a function, it is selected automatically.
To select or deselect a function,
highlight its
=
using the cursor
keys, and then press b.
You can change the on/off status of a statistical plot in the
Y= editor. To select or deselect
Plot1
,
Plot2
, or
Plot3
, highlight
the name (across the top of the Y= editor) using the cursor
keys, and then press b. A plot is selected (on) if the
background behind its name is dark.
Y
2
is selected.
Y
2
is deselected.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
169
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 169 of 24
See Chapter 6: Statistical Plots for more information on
defining and graphing stat plots.
Exiting the Y= EditorExiting the Y= Editor
To select another screen, press the appropriate key, such as
* or '. Press - l to return to the Home
screen.
Selecting a Graph Style
For a defined function, you can set one of seven styles that
specify the appearance of a function graph. The graph style
icons described below are located to the left of
Y
n
in the
Y= editor. If you do not select a style, the calculator graphs all
defined functions with the default style,
Line
.
To select a style, press ! from the
Y
n
equal sign (
=
) to
highlight the graph style icon, and then press b, as
necessary, to cycle through the seven styles. Press " " to
return to the
Y
n
entry line.
Graph styles are especially useful when graphing multiple
functions. For example, you can set
Y
1
as a solid line,
Y
2
as a
dotted line, and
Y
3
as a thick line.
The graph style icon.
Plot1
is selected.
Plot2
and
Plot3
are deselected.
170
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 170 of 24
Icon Style Description Example (
Y
1
=2x
)
ç
Line
Connects plotted points
with a line. This is the
default.
è
Thick
Connects plotted points
with a thick line.
é
Above
Shades the area above
the graph.
ê
Below
Shades the area below
the graph.
ë
Path
A circular cursor traces
the graph and draws the
path.
ì
Animate
A circular cursor traces
the graph without
drawing the path.
í
Dot
Displays a dot at each
plotted point.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
171
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 171 of 24
Set the
Below
graph style for Y
2
=3X+5.
1. Enter the Y= editor and
define
Y
2
=3X+5
.
&#:
3
I\
5
2. Highlight the graph style
icon (to the left of the
Y
2
)
and select the graph style,
Below
.
!!!!!!
bbb
3. Display the graph.
(
6
Setting the Window Format
-
g
The window format screen lets you choose display settings.
These apply to function graphing and statistical plotting.
-g
³
172
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 172 of 24
Setting Turns these on or off: Example:
CoordOn/
CoordOff
X- and Y-coordinates of
the cursor at the bottom
of the screen. Useful
when tracing a graph.
GridOff/
GridOn
Grid lines that
correspond to the axes
tick marks.
AxesOn/
AxesOff
X- and Y-axes.
LabelOff/
LabelOn
Labels for the X- and Y-
axes. These settings are
disregarded when
AxesOff
is selected.
LabelOn
is especially
helpful when displaying
Quadrant I ((
4
)
graphs.
ExprOn/
ExprOff
Expression which is
currently being traced.
The expression is shown
in the top left corner of a
graph.
When
CoordOn
and
ExprOff
are both selected,
the number in the top-
right corner specifies
which function is being
traced.
CoordOn
GridOn
AxesOff
A Quadrant I graph with
LabelOn
selected
ExprOn
ExprOff
Y
1
is being traced.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
173
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 173 of 24
Defining Window Values
If you enter a function in the Y= editor and press *, but
nothing happens or the graph doesnt look the way you expect
it to, you may need to adjust the
WINDOW
values (').
Depending upon which section of a graph you specify through
the
WINDOW
values, the display on your calculator screen can
look very different.
In the example below, the first calculator screen uses
WINDOW
values which include all four quadrants for the function,
Y
1
=X
¦
cos(X)
. (Calculator is in
Degree
mode.) Then, Quadrants I,
II, III, and IV are shown separately, so you can see how
WINDOW
values affect the display. The next section explains
how to redefine the values.
Xmin=
M
500
All Quadrants
Xmin=
M
500
Xmax=500
Xscl=90
Ymin=
M
500
Ymax=500
Yscl=75
Y
1
=
X
¦
cos
(X)
Quadrant II
Xmin=
M
500
Xmax=0
Xscl=90
Ymin=0
Ymax=500
Yscl=75
Quadrant I
Xmin=0
Xmax=500
Xscl=90
Ymin=0
Ymax=500
Yscl=75
Quadrant III
Xmin=
M
500
Xmax=0
Xscl=90
Ymin=
M
500
Ymax=0
Yscl=75
Quadrant IV
Xmin=0
Xmax=500
Xscl=90
Ymin=
M
500
Ymax=0
Yscl=75
Ymin=
M
500
Ymax=500
Xmax=500
174
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 174 of 24
The Window Values Screen The Window Values Screen '
WINDOW
values put specific boundaries on the display. For an
explanation of
@X
,
see the section in this chapter entitled
Controlling the Increments of a Trace.
To exit the
WINDOW
menu, select another screen by pressing
the appropriate key, or press
-
l
to return to the Home
screen.
'
Xmin
The minimum value on the X-axis; must be less
than
Xmax
.
Xmax
The maximum value on the X-axis.
@x
When tracing the graph with
)
, this
determines the increments between X values.
Xscl
The distance between tick marks on the X-axis.
To turn off the tick marks, set
Xscl=0
.
Ymin
The minimum value on the Y-axis; must be less
than
Ymax
.
Ymax
The maximum value on the Y-axis.
Yscl
The distance between tick marks on the Y-axis.
To turn off the tick marks, set
Yscl=0
.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
175
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 175 of 24
Determining Window Values for a Specific GraphDetermining Window Values for a Specific Graph
The following example shows how you can adjust the
WINDOW
values manually (as opposed to using the standard
WINDOW
values set by (
6:ZStandard
).
Yuko practices the piano 50 minutes per day. How many
minutes has he practiced after 2, 4, and 5 days? Graph your
answer.
1. A table of coordinate
pairs would look like
this:
X Y
2 100
4 200
5 250
2. A possible graph of the ordered pairs would look like this
(the
WINDOW
values are labeled):
³
Y=50X
X=number of days
Y=number of total minutes
The
Y
-axis is
measured in
increments of 50;
therefore,
Yscl=50
.
Ymax=300
Xmin=0
Ymin=0
Xmax=6
50
2
34
5
6
1
0
100
150
200
300
250
The
X
-axis is measured in increments
of 1; therefore,
Xscl=1
.
176
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 176 of 24
Graph the function, Y
1
=50X, on your calculator.
1. Display the Y= editor.
&
2. Enter
Y
1
=50X.
:
50
I
Note:
Deselect any other functions by
highlighting the corresponding = and
pressing
b
.
3. Graph the function using
standard window values
(
ZStandard
).
(
6
4. Adjust the
WINDOW
values
to match the sample graph
from the previous page.
'
0
#
6
##
1
#
0
#
300
#
50
5. Graph
Y
1
.
*
6. Trace the graph.
)
(Use ! and " to move the
cursor along the graph.)
³
Y
2
is now deselected.
Standard values
do not work well
for all functions.
@
x adjusts
automatically.
The graph now
resembles the
graph on the
previous page.
The trace
cursor.
X
- and
Y
- coordinates
of cursor.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
177
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 177 of 24
7. Find the Y values when
X= 2, 4, and 5.
2
b
4
b
5
b
Note: Consider using the
CONVERSIONS
menu (
-
‚
4
)
to convert your answers (in minutes) to
seconds, hours, days, weeks, or years.
If you trace ()) the graph with the cursor keys to an X
value greater than
Xmax
or less than
Xmin
, the cursor goes off
the Graph screen, but the corresponding Y values are still
displayed since they exist. However, you cannot enter X values
(as you did in step 7 above) that are greater than
Xmax
or less
than
Xmin
.
Displaying a Graph *
Press * to display the graph of the selected function(s).
(Some operations, such as ) and (, display the graph
automatically.) As a graph is plotted, the busy indicator comes
on (upper right corner) until the graph is completely drawn
and X and Y are updated.
Pressing *, ), or
selecting a ( function graphs
all defined and selected
functions.
• If the desired
WINDOW
values are already set, press
* or ).
• Press ( to change the
WINDOW
values and graph
all selected functions.
( , then select a
function from the menu
When
X=4
,
Y=200
.
Standard default
window values
are set.
(
6:ZStandard
is selected.
178
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 178 of 24
To pause while a graph is being drawn, press b; press
b again to resume plotting.
Press ^ to stop graphing. Press * to start over and plot
again.
Smart GraphSmart Graph
When you press *, the Graph screen immediately displays
(instead of replotting) the previous function graph(s) if no
changes were made. If changes were made, the functions are
replotted.
The graph is replotted if you have:
• Changed a function.
• Selected or deselected a function.
• Changed the value of a variable in a selected function.
• Changed a
WINDOW
variable or a - g setting.
• Cleared drawings by selecting
ClrDraw
(Chapter 10: Draw).
• Changed a stat plot definition (Chapter 6: Statistical
Plots).
Exploring the Graph with the Free-Moving CursorExploring the Graph with the Free-Moving Cursor
Use ", !, $, and # to move the cursor around the Graph
screen. When you first display the graph, the cursor is in the
middle of the screen but is not visible. When you press a
cursor key, the cursor moves from that point and can be seen.
(Remember to use the - g
CoordOn
setting if you want
to see the (X,Y) coordinates at the bottom of the screen.)
Exploring a Function Graph with Exploring a Function Graph with
)
Pressing ) allows you to move the ! and " cursor keys
from one plotted point to another and displays the cursor
coordinates at the bottom of the screen (if
CoordOn
is set). If
ExprOn
(- g) is set, the expression being traced
appears in the top left corner.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
179
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 179 of 24
When more than one function (or stat plot) is selected and
graphed, press $ and # to move the cursor from one function
graph to another.
The cursor movement is based on the order of the functions as
they appear in the Y= editor and not on the appearance of the
functions as graphed on the screen. (However, the TIN73 starts
with selected statistical plots first.)
The function number in the upper right corner of the display
changes as you move to the various graphs.
To quit ) mode, select another screen by pressing the
appropriate key, such as ' or (, or press - l
to return to the Home screen. Press : to stay on the
Graph screen.
Using QuickZoom
While tracing, you can press b to adjust the viewing
window. The cursor location then becomes the center of the
new viewing window, and the cursor remains in ) mode.
This is called
QuickZoom
. If you do a
QuickZoom
accidentally,
and you want to return to the zoom settings in the previous
window, select (
MEMORY
1:ZPrevious
.
Controlling the Increments of a TraceControlling the Increments of a Trace
By assigning a specific value to
@X
(which is optional), you can
control the X coordinates of a trace.
@X
is a
WINDOW
value;
change it by pressing '.
The TIN73 automatically calculates
@X
as:
@X
=
(
Xmax
-
Xmin
)
94
If standard window values are set (
ZStandard
),
@X = .21276595744681
. If you assign a value to
@X
, the values for
Xmin
and
Xmax
are adjusted automatically according to the
formula above.
180
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 180 of 24
Graph Y
1
=2X with
ZStandard
.
1. Define
Y
1
=2X
in the
Y= editor.
&:
2
I
Note:
Deselect any other functions by
highlighting the corresponding = and
pressing
b
.
2. Graph and trace the
function.
(
6
)"! (as
necessary)
Assign .5 to
@X,
and graph and
trace
Y
1
=2X
.
'##
.5
)
! and "
³
³
The TI
N
73 chooses the
X
-value increments.
X
- coordinates
change in
increments of .5.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
181
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 181 of 24
Adjusting Window Values with the
(
ZOOM Menu
The (
ZOOM
menu items allow you to adjust the viewing
WINDOW
of a graph quickly in a variety of ways. From the
Graph screen, press ' to see the adjusted
WINDOW
values.
1:ZBox
,
2:Zoom In
, and
3:Zoom Out
, require you to move the
cursor first to define the viewing window.
(
1:ZBox
Lets you draw a box around a specific
section of the Graph screen. The calculator
then zooms in on the area inside the box.
2:Zoom In
Lets you select a point with the cursor keys.
The calculator then zooms in around the
point by an amount defined by
SetFactors
(found on the (
MEMORY
menu).
3:Zoom Out
Lets you select a point with the cursor keys.
The calculator then zooms out around the
point by an amount defined by
SetFactors
.
4:ZQuadrant1
Displays Quadrant I only. Replots the graph
immediately.
5:ZSquare
Adjusts
WINDOW
variables so that a square
or a circle is shown in correct proportion
(instead of a rectangle or an ellipse).
Replots the graph immediately.
182
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 182 of 24
6:ZStandard
Sets the standard (default)
WINDOW
variables. Replots the graph immediately.
7:ZoomStat
Sets the
WINDOW
values for the current stat
lists. Replots the graph immediately.
8:ZDecimal
Sets
@X
and
@Y
to 0.1 and centers the origin.
Replots the graph immediately; press )
to view the new coordinate values.
9:ZoomFit
Adjusts
Ymin
and
Ymax
so that the Graph
screen displays the full range of Y variable
values. Replots the graph immediately.
10:ZInteger
Lets you select a new center point, and then
sets
@X
and
@Y
to 1 and sets
Xscl
and
Yscl
to
10. Replots the graph immediately; press
) to view the new coordinate values.
11:ZTrig
Sets
WINDOW
variables to preset values that
are often appropriate for graphing trig
functions. Replots the graph immediately.
ZBox ZBox
(
1 1
With
ZBox
, use the cursor keys to draw a box around a specific
section of the Graph screen that you would like to view up
close. The calculator then zooms in on the area inside the box
with the cursor in the center of the screen.
Explore the function graph,
Y
1
=2X with
ZBox
.
1. Display the graph of a
selected function (the
example shows
Y
1
=2X
).
(
6
³
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
183
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 183 of 24
2. Select the
ZBox
function and
return to the function
graph.
(
1
3. Move the cursor to one
corner of the box you want
to define.
"!$#b
4. Move the cursor to the
corner diagonally opposite
from the first one.
"!$#
5. Replot the graph.
b
Zoom In and Zoom Out Zoom In and Zoom Out
(
2 and 3 2 and 3
Zoom In
magnifies the graph around the cursor location.
Zoom Out
displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on
the cursor location, to provide a more global view. (The
procedure is the same for both.)
After a
Zoom In
or
Zoom Out
operation is selected, move the
cursor, as necessary, and press b to select the new center
point. Repeat the operation until another operation is selected
or you exit the Graph screen.
1. Display the graph of a
selected function (the
example shows
Y
1
=X
2
).
(
6
³
The cursor is in the
center of the new screen.
Cursor changes
to a small square.
184
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 184 of 24
2. Select the
Zoom In
operation
for the function graph.
(
2
3. Move the cursor to the
point that you want as the
center of the new viewing
window.
"!$#
4. Replot the graph.
b
Zoom Out
works exactly the same way as
Zoom In
. The
calculator zooms out automatically around the center point.
ZStandard ZStandard
(
6 6
ZStandard
is one of the more popular zoom commands because
many function graphs look good when graphed according to
the standard (default)
WINDOW
values:
Xmin=M10
,
Xmax=10
,
Xscl=1
,
Ymin=-M10
,
Ymax=10
,
Yscl=1
.
If you select the
ZStandard
operation, either from the Graph
screen or another screen, all selected functions are
immediately replotted according to these standard
WINDOW
values.
ZInteger ZInteger
(
0 0
ZInteger
requires you first to select a new center point. The
calculator then replots the graph immediately using the
adjusted
WINDOW
values which set
@X
and
@Y
to 1, and
Xscl
and
Yscl
to 10.
Select the center point (as you would do for
ZoomIn
and
ZoomOut
) by moving the cursor with the cursor keys, and then
pressing b. Press ) to view the new coordinate
values.
You want to
zoom in on
this side of the
graph.
The cursor point
becomes the center
of the new window.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
185
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 185 of 24
Other Zoom OperationsOther Zoom Operations
All other Zoom commands,
ZQuadrant
,
ZSquare, ZoomStat,
ZDecimal
,
ZoomFit
, and
ZTrig
,
replot immediately all selected
functions and adjust
WINDOW
values according to their
definitions. For
ZDecimal
, press ) to view the new
coordinate values.
Examples of these operations are included in Appendix A:
Function and Instruction Reference.
The
(
MEMORY Menu
("
1:ZPrevious
Replots all selected function graphs using
the
WINDOW
variables of the graph that was
displayed before you executed the last
ZOOM
operation.
2:SetFactors
Define the magnification or reduction factor
used to
Zoom In
or
Zoom Out
around a cursor
point. There are two:
XFact
and
YFact
.
ZPrevious ZPrevious
(
"
1 1
Selecting
ZPrevious
automatically replots all selected functions
and stat plots and adjusts
WINDOW
values according to the
definition of the previous graph.
186
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
7309ENG.DOC CH 9 Function Graphing, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:14 PM Printed: 05/19/99
9:01 AM Page 186 of 24
SetFactors SetFactors (
"
2 2
The zoom factors,
XFact
and
YFact
, are positive real numbers
1. They define the magnification or reduction factor used to
Zoom In
or
Zoom Out
around a cursor point. The default values
for both
XFact
and
YFact
are 4. Highlight the factor you want to
change, press
:
, and then enter the new value.
XFact
and
YFact
do not affect any other
Zoom
operations.
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 187 of 22
DrawingDrawing
The 2 DRAW Menu ..................................................... 188
ClrDraw 2 1.........................................................189
Line( 2 2 ..............................................................189
Horizontal and Vertical 2 3 and 4 ..................... 191
Shade( 2 5 ...........................................................193
Circle( 2 6 ............................................................195
Text( 2 7 ..............................................................197
Pen 2 8 ................................................................199
The 2 POINTS Menu....................................................201
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change(
2 " 1, 2, and 3 ...............................................202
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change(
2 " 4, 5, and 6 ...............................................205
pxl-Test( 2 " 7.................................................... 206
The 2 STO Menu .........................................................206
StorePic 2 " " 1................................................207
RecallPic 2 " " 2............................................... 208
Deleting a Graph Picture ............................................ 208
10
188
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 188 of 22
The 2
DRAW Menu
The 2
DRAW
menu items let you draw on top of function
graphs and stat plots (see Chapter 9: Function Graphing and
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots). The way the TIN73 interprets
draw instructions depends on whether you accessed the menu
items from the Home screen or the Program editor, or directly
from a graph.
Note: Redefining
WINDOW
values, graphing a
Y
n
function or
stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items from the
Graph screen.
2
1:ClrDraw
Clears all drawn elements.
2:Line(
Draws a line segment between two points.
3:Horizontal
Draws a horizontal line.
4:Vertical
Draws a vertical line.
5:Shade(
Shades an area between two functions.
6:Circle(
Draws a circle.
7:Text(
Draws text on a Graph screen.
8:Pen
Activates the free-form drawing tool.
When using a 2
DRAW
menu item or 2
POINTS
menu
item to draw directly on a graph, the cursor coordinates are
displayed if
CoordOn
is selected (- g). If a graph is not
displayed when you select a 2
DRAW
menu item, the Home
screen is displayed.
Chapter 10: Drawing
189
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 189 of 22
ClrDraw ClrDraw 2
1 1
ClrDraw
clears all drawn elements from the Graph screen. All
points, lines, and shading drawn with
2
DRAW
menu items
are temporary. Therefore, if you leave the Graph screen, and
then return, all drawings are erased.
If you select
ClrDraw
from the Graph screen, the current graph
is replotted and displayed with no drawn elements. You can
save drawings and recall them with the
2
STO
menu.
If you select
ClrDraw
from the Home screen or a program, it is
pasted to the cursor location. Pressing
b
executes the
instruction, all drawings on the current graph are erased, and
the message
Done
is displayed. When you display the graph
again, all drawn elements disappear.
Line( Line( 2
2 2
Line(
draws a line from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ). You can execute
the
Line(
instruction from the Graph screen, the Home screen
or Program editor.
Line( from the Graph Screen
To draw a line on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select
2
2
. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen. If
they are not, you can turn them on by selecting
CoordOn
(
-
g
).
2. Position the cursor at the beginning point of the line
segment that you want to draw, and then press
b
.
The cursor becomes a small box.
3. Move the cursor to the end point of the line segment, and
then press
b
. The line segment is drawn as you move
the cursor.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel
Line(
, press
:
.
190
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 190 of 22
Draw a line segment from the Graph screen.
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the beginning
point of the line segment.
(
6
2
1
2
2
#$"!
(as necessary)
b
2. Select the ending point of
the line segment.
#$"!
(as necessary)
b
Line( from the Home Screen or Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor,
Line(
can draw
or erase a line segment from point (X
,Y ) to (X ,Y ) on the
Graph screen.
You follow the
Line(
instruction with the coordinates of the
beginning point (X
1
,Y
1
) and the ending point (X
2
,Y
2
) of the line
segment. Including the argument,
0
, after the X and Y
coordinates erases a line from (X
,Y ) to (X ,Y ).
To draw the line segment:
Line(
X
1
,Y
1
,X
2
,Y
2
)
To erase a line segment:
Line(
X
1
,Y
1
,X
2
,Y
2
,
0)
³
The cursor
becomes
a small box.
The line segment
is finished.
The line segment
is finished.
Chapter 10: Drawing
191
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 191 of 22
From the Home screen, draw a line segment from (0,0) to
(6,9).
1. From the Home screen,
clear the Graph screen.
-l:
2
1
b
2. Specify the (X,Y)
coordinates and draw the
line segment.
2
2
0
¡
0
¡
6
¡
9
Eb
Erase the portion of the line from (2,3) to (4,6).
-l2
2
2
¡
3
¡
4
¡
6
¡
0
E
b
Horizontal and Vertical Horizontal and Vertical
2
3 and 4 3 and 4
Horizontal
and
Vertical
draw a horizontal or vertical line on the
Graph screen. You can execute both instructions from the
Graph screen, Home screen or the Program editor.
³
³
'
is set to
standard default
values.
192
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 192 of 22
Horizontal and Vertical from the Graph Screen
To draw a horizontal or vertical line on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2
3
or
4
. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and
Y-coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. A line is displayed that moves as you move the cursor.
Place the cursor on the Y-coordinate (for horizontal lines)
or the X-coordinate (for vertical lines) through which you
want the line to pass.
3. Press b to draw the line on the graph.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel
Horizontal
or
Vertical
, press :.
Draw a horizontal line from the
Graph screen.
*2
1
2
3
#$ (as necessary)
b
Draw a vertical line from the
Graph screen.
*2
4
"! (as necessary)
b
Horizontal and Vertical from the Home Screen or
Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor,
Horizontal
draws
a horizontal line at Y=y. y can be an integer or an expression.
Horizontal
y
³
³
'
is set to
standard default
values.
Chapter 10: Drawing
193
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 193 of 22
Vertical
draws a vertical line at X=x. x can be an integer or an
expression.
Vertical
x
From the Home screen, draw a
horizontal line at Y=4.
-l:
2
1
b2
3
4
b
Draw a vertical line at X=4.
-l2
4
4
b
Shade( Shade(
2
5 5
With
Shade(
, you can shade areas above and below functions
on the Graph screen.
You can execute
Shade(
only from the Home screen or in a
programming instruction.
Shade(
accepts two mandatory
arguments and four optional arguments. However, you cannot
skip any arguments. For example, if you want to specify the
5th argument, pattern, you also must specify the 3rd and 4th
arguments, left and right.
Shade(
lower,upper[,left,right,pattern,res]
)
³
³
'
is set to
standard default
values.
194
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 194 of 22
To use
Shade(
from the Home screen or a program:
1. Select 2
5
.
2. Enter two functions, lower and upper, in terms of X. After
the instruction is executed, the calculator graphs the
functions and shades above lower and below upper.
3. Enter left and right, the left and right X boundaries, if
desired.
Xmin
and
Xmax
are the defaults.
4. Enter the shading pattern number, pattern, if desired.
The four shading patterns are:
1
=Vertical (default)
2
=Horizontal
3
=Diagonal upper left to lower right
4
=Diagonal lower left to upper right
5. Specify the pattern resolution, res, an integer number
between
1
and
8
, if desired.
res=
1
is the default and represents the lowest resolution
(lines drawn very close together). res=
8
represents the
highest resolution (lines drawn very far apart).
6. Press b to execute the instruction.
Shade above the function Y=X-2
(lower) and below the function
Y=X
3
-8X (upper).
(The functions are shown to the
right as they would look if
graphed individually.)
³
Y=X-2
Y=X
3
-8X
Chapter 10: Drawing
195
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 195 of 22
-l:
2
1
b
2
5
IT
2
¡I
1
3
T
8
IEb
Enter a left X boundary, M2, and a right X boundary, 5, for the
same functions.
-l2
1
b
-£-£
!¡a
2
¡
5
Eb
`
Circle( Circle(
2
6 6
You can execute the
Circle(
instruction from the Graph screen,
Home screen, or the Program editor.
Circle( from the Graph Screen
To draw a circle on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2
6
. The cursor appears
in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. Place the cursor at the center point of the circle you want
to draw. Press b.
3. Move the cursor to a point on the circumference. Press
b. The circle is drawn automatically on the graph.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel
Circle(
, press
:.
³
5
is the right
boundary.
M
2
is the left boundary.
196
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 196 of 22
Draw a circle from the Graph screen.
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the center point
of the circle.
*2
1
2
6
#$"! (as
necessary)
b
2. Move the cursor to a point
on the circumference.
$#"!
(as necessary)
3. Draw the circle.
b
Circle( from the Home Screen or Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw a
circle on the Graph screen.
Circle(
accepts three mandatory
arguments: X and Y, the coordinates of the center point of the
circle, and radius, the radius length which must be a positive
real number.
Circle(
X,Y,radius
)
Draw a circle with center point=(0,0) and radius=7.
-l:2
1
b2
6
0
¡
0
¡
7
Eb
Note:
Use
(
5:
ZSquare
to adjust
them and make the circle circular.
³
³
Chapter 10: Drawing
197
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 197 of 22
Text( Text( 2
7 7
You can access
Text(
from the Graph screen, Home screen, or
the Program editor.
Text(
allows you to draw text on the Graph
screen when a graph is displayed. Use the Text editor
(
-
t
) to access all text characters. You may enter TIN73
functions, variables, and instructions as text. The font is
proportional, so the exact number of characters you can place
on the graph varies.
Text( from the Graph Screen
To draw text on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select
2
7
. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen.
2. Place the cursor at the point where you want the text to
begin.
3. Press
-
t
to display the Text editor. Select the text
characters. Highlight
Done
with the cursor, and then press
b
. The selected text is pasted onto the Graph screen.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel
Text(
, press
:
.
From the Graph screen, Label Quadrant I with
QUAD1
.
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the beginning
point where you want the
text to start.
*2
1
2
7
#$"!
(as necessary)
2. Using the Text editor, enter
QUAD1
.
-t
Q
b
U
b
A
b
D
b
1 Done
b
³
198
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 198 of 22
Text( from the Home Screen or the Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw
text on the Graph screen.
Text(
accepts three mandatory arguments: row and column,
which specify the pixel value of the top-left corner of the first
character, and text, which can be functions, variables, or text
instructions.
Text(
row,column,text
)
Text(
row,column,
"
text
")
row is an integer between 0 and 57 and column is an integer
between 0 and 94. Therefore, (0,0) is the top left corner, (0,94),
is the top right corner, (57,0) is the lower left corner, and
(57,94) is the lower right corner. If you try to draw text on any
edge of the Graph screen, the calculator only displays text that
fits; text does not wrap to the next row.
If text is surrounded by quotation marks (
"
"
) (found in the
Text editor), the calculator interprets any characters,
numbers, or expressions as text. If the quotation marks are
omitted, the TIN73 calculates and displays the result, if
applicable, with up to 10 characters.
Label Quadrant I with
QUAD1
from the Home screen. Start the
text at the pixel value of (10,60).
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the beginning
point of the text.
-l:
2
1
b
2
7 10
¡
60
¡
³
Chapter 10: Drawing
199
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 199 of 22
2. Using the Text editor, enter
"QUAD1"
.
-t
"
b
Q
b
U
b
A
b
D
b
1
"
b
Done
bE
b
Pen Pen
2
8 8
Pen
draws any shape you want, including irregular or unusual
ones.
You can execute
Pen
only from the Graph screen. You cannot
execute
Pen
from the Home screen or the Program editor.
To draw your own shape on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2
8
. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. Place the cursor at the point where you want to begin
drawing. Press b to turn on the pen.
3. Move the cursor. As you move the cursor, you draw on
the graph, shading one pixel at a time.
4. Press b to turn off the pen.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4, as necessary. To cancel
Pen
,
press :.
200
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 200 of 22
Draw a happy face on the Graph screen.
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and then select
AxesOff
.
*2
1
-g##"
b
2. First draw a circle.
*2
6
b
$(as necessary)
b
3. Use
Pen(
to draw the eyes.
2
8
# and !
(as necessary)
bb
"(as necessary)
bb
4. Draw the mouth.
#b(to begin
smile)
!# (repeat as
necessary)
! (repeat as
necessary)
!$ (repeat as
necessary)
³
Chapter 10: Drawing
201
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 201 of 22
The 2
POINTS Menu
The 2
POINTS
menu items let you draw or erase individual
points or pixels on top of function graphs and stat plots (see
Chapter 9: Function Graphing and Chapter 6: Statistical Plots).
The way the TIN73 interprets the point instructions depends
on whether you accessed the instructions from the Home
screen or the Program editor, or directly from a graph.
Redefining
WINDOW
values ((
6:ZStandard
), graphing a
Y
n
function or stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items
from the Graph screen.
Note: All examples in this section show the Graph screen set
to standard
WINDOW
values and with all
Y
n
functions and stat
plots deselected.
2"
1:Pt-On(
Turns on a point.
2:Pt-Off(
Turns off a point.
3:Pt-Change(
Toggles a point on or off.
4:Pxl-On(
Turns on a pixel.
5:Pxl-Off(
Turns off a pixel.
6:Pxl-Change(
Toggles a pixel on or off.
7:pxl-Test(
Returns 1 if pixel is on, 0 if pixel is off.
202
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 202 of 22
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change(Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change(
2
"
1, 2, and 3 1, 2, and 3
Pt-On(
,
Pt-Off(
, and
Pt-Change(
turn on, off, or change the status
of a point from the Graph screen, Home screen, or Program
editor.
A point (as opposed to a pixel) is tied directly to the X- and Y-
axes. The screen is divided into X- and Y-coordinates as
specified by (X,Y). The points that you can view depend upon
how the
WINDOW
values are defined.
For example, if standard
WINDOW
values are set, M10X10 and
M10Y10. This does not mean that points outside these
boundaries do not exist, only that you cannot see any turned
on points outside these boundaries.
Pt-On(, Pt-Off( and Pt-Change( from the Graph Screen
To use
Pt-On(
,
Pt-Off(
, and
Pt-Change(
on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select
2
"
1
,
2
, or
3
. The
cursor appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X-
and Y-coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. Move the cursor:
• To the position where you want to draw the point
(
Pt-On(
).
• To the position of the point you want to erase
(
Pt-Off(
).
• To the position of the point you want to change
(toggle on or off) (
Pt-Change(
).
3. Press
b
to draw, erase, or change the point.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel
Pt-On(
,
Pt-Off(
, or
Pt-Change(
, press
:
.
Chapter 10: Drawing
203
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 203 of 22
Draw points from the Graph screen.
1. Select
AxesOn,
if desired,
and then clear all previous
drawings.
-g##b
*2
1
2. Select the beginning point
where you want to draw the
point.
2"
1
"!$#
(as necessary)
3. Draw the point.
b
4. Repeat as necessary.
Erase four points from the
Graph screen.
1. Move the cursor to the
point you want to erase.
*2"
2
"!$#
(as necessary) b
2. Repeat as necessary.
³
³
204
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 204 of 22
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( from the Home Screen
and Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw,
erase, or change a points status on the Graph screen.
Pt-On(
,
Pt-Off(
, and
Pt-Change(
accept two mandatory arguments:
X and Y, which specify the coordinates of the point that you
want to draw, erase, or change.
Pt-On(
and
Pt-Off(
have one
optional argument, mark, which determines the points
appearance. Specify
1
(default),
2
, or
3
, where:
1
(default)=
¦
(dot)
2
=
(box)
3
=
+
(cross)
If you specify mark to turn on a point with
Pt-On(
, you must
specify the same mark when you turn off the point with
Pt-Off(
.
Pt-Change(
does not have the mark argument.
Also note that if, for example, you specify the point (20,30) but
your viewing window is set to the standard values, you do not
see the point since the viewing window does not include the
specific part of the graph where (20,30) exists. Press '
to redefine the
WINDOW
values.
Note: Redefining
WINDOW
values, graphing a
Y
n
function or
stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items from the
Graph screen.
Pt-On(
X,Y[,mark]
)
Pt-Off(
X,Y[,mark]
)
Pt-Change(
X,Y
)
Turn on point (M5,3) and assign the box mark to it.
-l:
2
1
b2"
1
a
5
¡
3
¡
2
Eb
³
Chapter 10: Drawing
205
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 205 of 22
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change(Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change(
2
"
4, 5, and 6 4, 5, and 6
Pxl-On(
,
Pxl-Off(
, and
Pxl-Change(
turn on, off, or change the
status of a pixel only from the Home screen or the Program
editor.
When you select a pixel instruction from the
2
POINTS
menu, the TIN73 returns you to the Home screen or the
Program editor. Since the pixel instructions are not
interactive, they cannot be used from the Graph screen.
A pixel is independent of the X- and Y- axes. It is based instead
on the physical size of the screen. The screen is divided into
pixels specified as (row,column). 0row62 and 0column94.
Pxl-On(
,
Pxl-Off(
, and
Pxl-Change(
accept two mandatory
arguments: row and column, which specify the pixel that you
want to draw, erase, or change.
Pxl-On(
row,column
)
Pxl-Off(
row,column
)
Pxl-Change(
row,column
)
Turn on the pixel at (45,35).
1. From the Home screen,
clear the Graph screen.
-l:
2
1
b
2. Turn on the pixel.
2"
4
45
¡
35
Eb
³
206
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 206 of 22
pxl-Test( pxl-Test( 2
"
7 7
You can execute
pxl-Test(
only from the Home screen or the
Program editor.
pxl-Test(
tests a pixel at (row,column) to see if it is turned on or
off. If it is on,
pxl-Test(
returns 1. If it is off,
pxl-Test(
returns 0.
0row57 and 0column94.
pxl-Test(
row,column
)
Test to see if the pixel at (45,35) is turned on or off.
-l2"
7
45
¡
35
Eb
The 2
STO Menu
The
2
STO
(store) menu lets you store or recall up to three
pictures in memory. When you select an instruction from the
2
STO
menu, the TIN73 returns to the Home screen or the
Program editor. The picture instructions are not interactive,
which means you cannot use them from the Graph screen.
Note: All examples in this section show the Graph screen set
to standard
WINDOW
values (
(
6:ZStandard
) and with all
Y
n
functions and stat plots deselected.
2""
1:StorePic
Stores the current picture.
2:RecallPic
Recalls a stored picture.
³
Chapter 10: Drawing
207
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 207 of 22
StorePic StorePic 2
"
"
1 1
You can execute
StorePic
only from the Home screen or
Program editor. You can store up to three pictures, each of
which is an image of the current graph display, in picture
variables
Pic1
,
Pic2
, or
Pic3
. Later, you can superimpose the
stored picture onto a displayed graph from the Home screen
or a program.
A picture includes drawn elements, plotted functions, axes,
and tick marks. The picture does not include axes labels,
lower and upper bound indicators, prompts, or cursor
coordinates. Any parts of the display hidden by these items are
stored with the picture.
StorePic
accepts one mandatory argument, number, which
specifies the number of the picture variable to which you want
to store the picture. For example, if you enter
3
, the TIN73
stores the picture to
Pic3
. Pressing
b
displays the current
graph and stores the picture.
StorePic
number
To see which graph variables have pictures stored to them, use
the
PICTURE
secondary menu (
-
}
4:Picture
). Each
variable
Pic1
,
Pic2
, and
Pic3
is marked as either
Defined
or
Empty
. If selected, the variable is pasted next to
StoPic
.
Store the drawn picture (to the
right) in picture variable 2.
For more information on drawing lines,
see the previous section entitled
“Line(.”
-l:
2""
1 2
b
³
You return to
the Graph
screen.
208
Chapter 10: Drawing
7310ENG.DOC Draw Texas Instruments Revised: 05/29/98 6:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:01 AM Page 208 of 22
RecallPic RecallPic 2
"
"
2 2
You can execute
RecallPic
only from the Home screen or
Program editor. Use
RecallPic
to recall the graph picture stored
in the picture variables
Pic1
,
Pic2
, or
Pic3
.
RecallPic
accepts one mandatory argument, number, which
specifies the number of the picture variable that you want to
recall. For example, if you enter
3
, the TIN73 recalls
Pic3
.
Pressing
b
displays the current graph and superimposes
Pic3
on it. Since pictures are drawings, you cannot trace a
curve that is part of a picture.
RecallPic
number
To see which graph variables have pictures stored to them, use
the
PICTURE
secondary menu (
-
}
4:Picture
). Each
variable
Pic1
,
Pic2
, and
Pic3
is marked as either
Defined
or
Empty
. If selected, the variable is pasted next to
RecallPic
.
1. Clear the Graph screen.
-l
2
1
b*
2. Recall picture variable
2
. (A
picture was stored to it in
the previous example.)
2""
2 2
b
Deleting a Graph PictureDeleting a Graph Picture
To delete graph pictures from memory, use the
MEMORY
DELETE:Pic
menu (
-
Ÿ
4:Delete
7:Pic
).
³
You return to the
Graph screen.
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 209 of 12
TrigonometryTrigonometry
The - u TRIG Menu...................................................210
Trig Functions - u 1, 3, and 5 ..........................210
Inverse Trig Functions - u 2, 4, and 6 ...............211
Angle Mode Settings ..................................................211
Graphing Trig Functions ...................................................214
The - u ANGLE Menu...............................................215
Using
¡
and
r
to Specify Degrees and Radians
- u " 1 and 4...............................................216
Converting between Degrees and Radians ...............217
Entering Angles in DMS Notation
- u " 1, 2, and 3..........................................218
8DMS - u " 5 ..................................................220
11
210
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 210 of 12
The -
u
TRIG Menu
The - u
TRIG
(trigonometry) menu accesses the
trigonometric (trig) functions (
sin(
,
cos(
,
tan(
) and their inverses
(
sin
-1
(
,
cos
-1
(
,
tan
-1
(
).
-u
The sine, cosine, and tangent of an angle (q) are defined by the
lengths of the sides of a right triangle.
sin q =
opposite
hypotenuse
cos q =
adjacent
hypotenuse
tan q =
opposite
adjacent
Trig Functions Trig Functions -
u
1, 3, and 5 1, 3, and 5
All trig functions return the sine, cosine, or tangent of a real
number, expression, or a each element in a list. If value is a
list, the calculator calculates the trig function of each element
in the list, and a list is returned.
sin(
value
)
cos(
value
)
tan(
value
)
For
tan
, value cannot be 90, 270, etc., or M90, M270, etc. In other
words, since tan q=sinàcos by definition, tan q is undefined
when cos q=0.
adjacent
opposite
q
hypotenuse
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
211
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 211 of 12
Hint: This chapters section entitled Graphing Trig
Functions contains an example which graphs and traces
Y
1
=tan(X)
to show undefined Y values for the function.
Inverse Trig Functions Inverse Trig Functions -
u
2, 4, and 6 2, 4, and 6
The inverse trig functions calculate the smallest angle that
gives a particular sine, cosine, or tangent. For example,
sin
-1
(.5)
calculates the angle whose sine is .5.
sin
-1
(
value
)
cos
-1
(
value
)
tan
-1
(
value
)
For
cos
-1
(also called arccosine) and
sin
-1
(also called arcsine),
M1value1.
All inverse trig functions return the arcsine, arccosine, or
arctangent of value or of each element in a list. If value is a
list, the calculator calculates the inverse trig function of each
element in the list, and a list is returned.
Angle Mode SettingsAngle Mode Settings
In trig calculations, angles are interpreted as degrees (
¡
) or
radians (
r
), depending on the Angle mode setting,
Degree
or
Radian
.
Set the Angle mode from the mode screen.
.
Depending on the Angle mode, sin(1) is the sine of either 1
¡
or
1
r
. As you can see in the following illustration, 1
¡
is not the
same as 1
r
. Therefore, sin(1
¡
) sin(1
r
). For correct results,
enter angle values in the same units (degrees or radians) as the
Angle mode setting.
212
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 212 of 12
To perform a trig calculation, select the Angle mode for your
value and then select the function. In
Radian
Angle mode,
angles are often defined in terms of p.
Calculate sin(30) in both degrees and radians.
1. Select the
Degree
Angle
mode.
.##b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Enter
sin(30)
.
-u
1
30
Eb
4. Change to the
Radian
Angle
mode, and return to the
Home screen.
.##"b
-l
5. Recall the previous entry to
recalculate
sin(30)
.
-£b
³
Degrees (
¡
)
90
¡
270
¡
180
¡
0
¡
, 360
¡
1
¡
=
1
360
of a circle
Radians (
r
)
p
2
3
p
2
p
0, 2
p
1
r
=
1
2
p
of a circle
Note:
1
r
= 57.29578
¡
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
213
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 213 of 12
In
Degree
Angle mode, calculate tan
-
1
(1). Check your answer.
1. Select the
Degree
Angle
mode.
.##b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Enter
tan
-1
(1)
.
-u
6
1
Eb
4. Using the result, enter
tan(45)
.
-u
5
45
Eb
In Radian mode, calculate cos(p/4).
1. Select the
Radian
Angle
mode.
.##"b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Enter
cos(p/4)
.
-u
3
-„F
4
Eb
³
³
This confirms the
previous result.
214
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 214 of 12
Graphing Trig Functions
In addition to using the calculator to solve trig functions
numerically, as described so far in this chapter, you can solve
trig functions graphically.
For more information on generating function tables or
graphing functions, see Chapter 8: Tables and Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
In
Degree
Angle mode, find four Y values where
Y
1
=tan(X)
is
undefined. Check your answer by displaying the table for
Y
1
.
1. Select
Degree
Angle mode, if
necessary.
.##b
2. Deselect all
Y
n
functions.
-}
2
6
b
3. Define
Y
1
=tan(X)
in the
Y= editor.
&:-u
5
IE
4. Graph the function using
the
ZTrig
command.
($b
5. Trace the graph and
observe where the Y value
is undefined.
)
" and ! , as necessary
³
When
X=90
,
Y
is undefined.
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
215
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 215 of 12
6. Use the table to check your
result. Set
TblStart=90
,
@Tbl=60
,
Indpnt=Auto
and
Depend=Auto
.
-f
90
#
60
-i
$ or # , as necessary
The -
u
ANGLE Menu
The
ANGLE
menu lets you specify the unit (degrees, radians, or
DMS) of an angle, and it lets you convert an angle from one
unit to another.
-u"
1:
¡ Designates an angle as degrees, regardless of the
current Angle mode setting or DMS notation.
2:'
In DMS (degrees¡ minutes
'
seconds
"
) notation,
specifies the minutes.
3:"
In DMS (degrees¡ minutes
'
seconds
"
) notation,
specifies the seconds.
4:
r
Specifies an angle as radians, regardless of the
current Angle mode setting.
5:8DMS
Converts an angle to DMS (degrees¡ minutes
'
seconds
"
) notation.
From these two screens, you
know that
tan(X)
is undefined at
X
=
M
270,
M
90, 90, 270, 450.
216
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 216 of 12
Using Using
¡
and and
r
to Specify Degrees and Radians to Specify Degrees and Radians
-
u
"
1 and 4 1 and 4
Normally, angles are interpreted according to the Angle mode
setting. However, you can specify an angle as degrees or
radians regardless of the Angle mode.
Suppose a series of trig calculations uses radians, but a few
use degrees. Rather than change from
Radian
to
Degree
Angle
mode and then back again, you can stay in the
Radian
Angle
mode and specify some angles as degrees.
In
Radian
Angle mode, calculate sin(p/3). Then, without
changing to the
Degree
Angle mode, calculate sin(60¡).
1. Select
Radian
Angle mode.
.##"b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Enter
sin(
p
/3)
.
-u
1
-„F
3
Eb
4. Use the
¡
designator to
enter
sin(60
¡
)
.
-u
1
60
-u"
1
Eb
Likewise, you can use
r
to specify an angle as radians in the
Degree
Angle mode.
³
60 is specified as degrees
even in
Radian
angle mode.
p
/3
r
=60
¡
.
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
217
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 217 of 12
Converting between Degrees and RadiansConverting between Degrees and Radians
Set the Angle mode to the unit you want to convert to because
results are displayed according to the Angle mode setting.
Then use
¡
or
r
to designate the unit to convert from.
Convert 50¡ to radians.
1. Set Angle mode to
Radian
.
.##"b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Enter the value to convert,
50
. Use
¡
to specify it as
degrees.
50
-u"
1
b
Convert 50
r
to degrees.
1. Set the Angle mode to
Degree
.
.##b
-l
2. Enter the value to convert,
50
. Use
r
to specify it as
radians.
50
-u"
4
b
³
³
50
r
converted to
degrees.
50
¡
converted to
radians.
218
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 218 of 12
Entering Angles in DMS NotationEntering Angles in DMS Notation
-
u
"
1, 2, and 3 1, 2, and 3
DMS (degrees¡ minutes
'
seconds
"
) is often used for angles
involving latitude and longitude. The degrees can be any real
number; minutes and seconds must be 0. To enter an angle
in DMS notation, use the
-
u
ANGLE
menu.
If you enter the angle of a trig function, where the angle is in
DMS notation (as shown in the following example), the angle
is interpreted as degrees, even in
Radian
mode.
Calculate sin(30¡10
'
23
"
) in
Degree
and
Radian
mode.
1. Select
Degree
Angle mode.
.##b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Enter
sin(30¡10'23")
.
-u
1
30
-u"
1
10
-u"
2
23
-u"
3
E
b
4. Select
Radian
Angle mode.
.##"b
³
30
¡
10'23"
30
-
u
"
1
10
-
u
"
2
23
-
u
"
3
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
219
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 219 of 12
5. Calculate
sin(30¡10'23")
.
-l
-£b
In
Radian
mode, if you enter an angle only (without a trig
function) in DMS notation (as shown in the following
example), the angle is interpreted as degrees, but converted to
a result in radians.
Convert 20¡10
'
14
"
to radians.
1. Select
Radian
Angle mode.
.##"b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Enter
20¡10'14"
.
20
-u"
1
10
-u"
2
14
-u"
3
b
³
DMS notation overrides
Radian
mode.
The result is in radians.
220
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
7311ENG.DOC CH 11 Trigonometry, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 11:12 AM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 220 of 12
8
DMS DMS -
u
"
5 5
To convert angles to DMS notation, use
8
DMS
from the
-
u
ANGLE
menu.
angle
8
DMS
Entering ¡ overrides
Radian
mode. For example, if you enter
50
¡8
DMS
in
Radian
mode, the calculator still interprets 50 as
degrees and displays the DMS equivalent.
In
Radian
mode, if you enter
50
8
DMS
(no ¡), the calculator
interprets 50 as radians, and then displays the DMS equivalent.
For example,
50
8
DMS
in
Radian
mode shows
2804
¡
47'20.312"
.
Likewise, in
Degree
mode, if you enter
50
8
DMS
(no ¡), the
calculator interprets 50 as degrees, and then displays the DMS
equivalent. For example,
50
8
DMS
in
Degree
mode shows
50
¡
0'0"
.
In
Degree
Angle mode, convert 50.672¡ to DMS.
1. Select
Degree
Angle mode.
.##b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
-l:
3. Convert
50.672
¡
to DMS.
50.672
-u"
5
b
³
Entering
¡
after 50.672 is
optional in
Degree
mode.
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 221 of 32
ProgrammingProgramming
What Is a Program? ...........................................................223
Steps for Creating a Program ...........................................223
Creating and Naming a New Program.............................224
Create New 8 " " 1..........................................224
The Program Editor.....................................................225
Entering Program Commands...........................................226
The 8 CTL Menu ..........................................................227
If 8 1 ....................................................................229
If-Then 8 1 and 2 ................................................229
If-Then-Else 8 1, 2, and 3.................................... 230
For( 8 4 ................................................................231
While 8 5.............................................................232
Repeat 8 6...........................................................232
End 8 7 ................................................................233
Pause 8 8 .............................................................233
Lbl and Goto 8 9 and 0.......................................234
IS>( 8 A................................................................235
DS<( 8 B...............................................................235
Menu( 8 C............................................................236
SetMenu( 8 D......................................................237
prgm 8 E..............................................................238
Return 8 F............................................................239
Stop 8 G...............................................................239
DelVar 8 H...........................................................240
GraphStyle( 8 I .................................................... 240
12
222
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 222 of 32
The 8 I/O Menu ........................................................... 241
Input 8 " 1......................................................... 242
Prompt 8 " 2 ..................................................... 244
Disp 8 " 3........................................................... 244
DispGraph 8 " 4 ................................................ 245
DispTable 8 " 5 ................................................. 245
Output( 8 " 6 .................................................... 245
getKey 8 " 7 ...................................................... 246
ClrScreen and ClrTable 8 " 8 and 9.................. 247
GetCalc( 8 " 0.................................................... 247
Get( and Send( 8 " A and B.............................. 247
Editing Program Commands............................................. 248
Inserting, Deleting, and Editing Command Lines ..... 249
Copying and Renaming a Program............................ 249
Calling a Program from Another Program................ 250
Executing a Program......................................................... 251
Breaking Out of a Program........................................ 252
Debugging a Program ...................................................... 252
Chapter 12: Programming
223
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 223 of 32
What Is a Program?
A program is a series of one or more programming commands
to be executed by the calculator. Each command is an
expression or instruction and begins with a colon (:). The
number and size of programs that the TIN73 can store is
limited only by available memory.
Steps for Creating a Program
Follow these basic steps when creating and executing a
program. You may not have to do all of them each time.
Create a new program
by naming it.
Enter, delete, and edit
command lines in the
Program editor.
- l exits the
Program editor.
Execute the Program.
8
"
"
b
8
prgm
name
b
b
If it is necessary to debug the
program, go back to the Program
editor to edit commands.
8"
prgm
name
b
224
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 224 of 32
Creating and Naming a New Program
You create a new program by selecting
1:Create New
from the
8
NEW
menu. You then are prompted to name the new
program.
8""
1:Create New
Creates a new program and displays
the
PROGRAM Name=
screen, prompting
you to name the new program.
Create New Create New 8
"
"
1 1
After you select
1:Create New
from the 8
NEW
menu, the
TIN73 displays
Name=
to prompt you to name the new program.
A program name can be one to eight characters long. The first
character must be a letter from A to Z. The second through
eighth characters can be any combination of letters and
numbers.
Access letters from the Text editor (- t). If you type a
name with more than eight characters, the calculator accepts
the first eight characters and disregards the rest.
Create a new program and name it
PROGRAM1
.
1. Display the 8
NEW
menu.
8""
2. Select
1:Create New
.
b
³
Chapter 12: Programming
225
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 225 of 32
3. Enter
PROGRAM1
at the
cursor.
-t
P
b
R
b
O
b
G
b
R
b
A
b
M
b
1
Done
b
4. Display the Program editor
with the name of the
program on the top line.
b
The Program EditorThe Program Editor
You use the Program editor to enter and edit program
commands. Enter the Program editor in one of two ways:
• Create and name a new program from the 8
NEW
menu with
1:Create New
. Once the name is entered, the
calculator automatically enters the Program editor with
the name of the program on the top line.
• Select a program to edit from the 8
EDIT
menu
(8 "). The calculator automatically enters the
Program editor with the name of the program on the top
line.
Each new command line in the Program editor begins with a
colon (
:
). Enter programming commands at the cursor. You
can enter more than one command per line. To do this,
separate the two commands with a colon (- |
$ $ $ b). If the command line is longer than the screen
is wide, the command wraps to the next screen line.
To exit the Program editor, press - l. All commands are
automatically saved.
Begin entering the
name at the cursor.
226
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 226 of 32
8"prgmName
 or 
8""
1
-t
prgmName
Done
bb
Entering Program Commands
The calculator contains built-in programming commands on
three menus. You access these menus by pressing 8 from
the Program editor. The first two menus, the 8
CTL
menu
and the 8
I/O
menu, are discussed extensively in the next
two sections. The third menu, the 8
EXEC
menu, lets you
call existing programs as subroutines. It is discussed in the
section entitled, Executing a Program.
Entering Functions, Instructions, and Variables
In the Program editor, you also can select from function
menus on the calculator (1, - ‚, etc.), change
settings (., - f, etc.), as well as select function
keys (=, 6, etc.). Simply press the appropriate key, and the
function, instruction, or mode setting is pasted at the cursor
location in the Program editor. Also, remember that all
instructions and functions are listed in the
CATALOG
(- |).
Programs can access variables and lists saved in memory. If a
program stores a new value to a variable or list, the program
changes the value in memory during execution.
The following menus or keystroke sequences change
appearance or operate differently when accessed from the
Program editor:
• 8 (accesses programming command menus)
• - e (changes appearance)
• - † (changes appearance)
• - f (changes appearance)
Program Name
Chapter 12: Programming
227
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 227 of 32
• 2
DRAW
(excludes
8:Pen)
• 1
MATH
(excludes
6:Solver)
• (
MEMORY
(excludes
2:SetFactors)
Exiting the Program Editor
Pressing &, ', *, - Ÿ, - l, or 3 exits
the Program editor and displays the applicable screen. The
calculator automatically saves all command lines in memory
whenever you exit the Program editor.
The 8
CTL Menu
You can only access the 8
CTL
(control) menu by pressing
8 from the Program editor. These programming
commands help control the flow of an executing program.
They make it easy to repeat or skip a group of commands
(block) during program execution.
If
,
For(
,
While
,
Repeat, IS>(,
and
DS<(
check a defined condition to
determine which command to execute next. Conditions
frequently use relational or Boolean tests (Chapter 2: Math
Operations). When you select an item from the menu, the
name is pasted to the cursor location on a command line in the
program. To return to the Program editor without selecting an
item, press :.
8 (from the Program
editor only)
228
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 228 of 32
1:If
Creates a conditional test.
2:Then
Executes commands when
If
condition is
true.
3:Else
Executes commands when
If
condition is
false.
4:For(
Creates an incrementing loop.
5:While
Creates a conditional loop.
6:Repeat
Creates a conditional loop.
7:End
Signifies the end of a block.
8:Pause
Pauses program execution.
9:Lbl
Defines a label.
0:Goto
Goes to a label.
A:IS>(
Increments and skips if greater than.
B:DS<(
Decrements and skips if less than.
C:Menu(
Defines menu items and branches.
D:SetMenu(
Views and modifies variables on a menu.
E:prgm
Executes a program as a subroutine.
F:Return
Returns from a subroutine.
G:Stop
Stops execution.
H:DelVar
Deletes a variable from within program.
I:GraphStyle(
Designates the graph style to be drawn.
Chapter 12: Programming
229
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 229 of 32
If If 8
1 1
Use
If
to execute one command depending upon condition. If
condition is true (non-zero), then command1 is executed. If
condition is false (zero), then command1 is skipped.
If
instructions can be nested.
:If
condition
:
command1 (if true)
:
command2
Write a program named
COUNT
that adds one to variable A and
displays the current value until A2.
PROGRAM:COUNT
:0"A
:Lbl Z
:A+1
"
A
:Disp "A IS",A
:Pause
:If A 2
:Stop
:Goto Z
If-Then If-Then 8
1 and 2 1 and 2
Use
If
with
Then
to execute more than one command (block)
depending upon condition. If condition is true (non-zero),
then block is executed. If condition is false (zero), then block is
skipped.
End
identifies the end of the block. Both
Then
and
End
must be on a line by itself.
:If
condition
:
Then
:
block (if true)
:End
:
command
³
Press
b
.
230
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 230 of 32
Write a program named
TEST
that tests the values of variable
X. If X<10, manipulate X and Y and then display both values. If
X10, then display X and Y (without manipulating them).
PROGRAM:TEST
:1
"
X:10
"
Y
:If X<10
:Then
:2X+3
"
X
:2Y-3
"
Y
:End
:Disp {X,Y}
:Pause
If-Then-Else If-Then-Else 8
1, 2, and 3 1, 2, and 3
Use
If
with
Then
and
Else
to execute only one of two blocks of
commands depending upon condition. If condition is true
(non-zero), then block1 is executed. If condition is false
(zero), then block2 is executed.
End
identifies the end of
block2.
Then
,
Else
, and
End
each must be on a line by itself.
:
If
condition
:
Then
:block1 (if true)
:
Else
:block2 (if false)
:
End
:command
³
Chapter 12: Programming
231
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 231 of 32
Write a program named
TESTELSE
that tests an input value, X.
If X<0, then square it and store it to Y. If X0, then store it to
Y. Display X and Y.
PROGRAM:TESTELSE
:Input "X=",X
:If X<0
:Then
:X
"
Y
:Else
:X
"
Y
:End
:Disp {X,Y}
:Pause
For( For( 8
4 4
Use
For(
to control how many times a loop is repeated. A
For(
command loops to repeat the same group of commands
(block) and increments to control the number of times the loop
is repeated.
It executes commands in block through end, increasing
variable from begin by increment until variable>end.
increment is optional (default=1) and can be negative
(end<begin). end is a maximum or minimum value not to be
exceeded, which identifies the end of the loop.
End
identifies
the end of block. When variable>end, the program executes
each command following
End
.
For(
loops can be nested.
:For(
variable,begin,end[,increment]
)
:
block (while variable { end)
:End
:
command
Write a program named
SQUARE
that displays A
2
, where
0=begin, 8 =end, and 2=increment.
PROGRAM:SQUARE
:For(A,0,8,2)
:Disp A
:Pause
:End
³
³
Press
b
between results.
232
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 232 of 32
While While 8
5 5
Use
While
to test condition before the commands in the loop
are executed.
While
performs a block of commands WHILE
condition is true (non-zero). condition is frequently a
relational test (Chapter 2: Math Operations) and is tested
when
While
is encountered.
End
identifies the end of block.
When condition is false (zero), the program executes each
command following
End
.
While
instructions can be nested.
:While
condition
:
block (while condition is true)
:End
:
command
Write a program named
LOOP
that increments two variables, I
and J, and displays the value of J when I6.
PROGRAM:LOOP
:0
"
I
:0
"
J
:While I<6
:J+1
"
J
:I+1
"
I
:End
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
Repeat Repeat 8
6 6
Use
Repeat
to test condition after the commands in the loop
are executed.
Repeat
executes block UNTIL condition is true
(non-zero). It is similar to
While
, but condition is tested when
End
is encountered; therefore, the group of commands is
always executed at least once. When condition is false (zero),
Repeat
instructions can be nested.
:Repeat
condition
:
block (until condition is true)
:End
:
command
³
Chapter 12: Programming
233
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 233 of 32
Write a program named
RPTLOOP
that increments two
variables, I and J, and displays the value of J while I6.
PROGRAM:RPTLOOP
:0"I
:0
"
J
:Repeat I|6
:J+1
"
J
:I+1
"
I
:End
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
End End 8
7 7
End
identifies the end of a group of commands. You must
include an
End
instruction at the end of each
For(
,
While
, or
Repeat
loop. Also, you must enter an
End
instruction at the end
of each
If-Then
group and each
If-Then-Else
group.
:End
Pause Pause 8
8 8
After a program has been executed, the screen is erased.
Therefore,
Pause
is useful to suspend program execution until
you press
b
, or to display value (such as answers or
graphs) and suspend program execution until you press
b
.
During the pause, the pause indicator is on in the top-right
corner. Press
b
to resume execution.
Pause
without value temporarily pauses the program. If the
DispGraph
or
Disp
instruction has been executed, the
appropriate screen is displayed.
:Pause
Pause
with value displays value on the Home screen. value can
be scrolled.
:Pause
value
³
234
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 234 of 32
Write a program named
PAUSE
that stores a value to A, an
equation to
Y
1
, graphs
Y
1
using standard
WINDOW
values
(
ZStandard
), pauses, and then displays A.
PROGRAM:PAUSE
:2"A
:FnOff
:"X+A""Y
:ZStandard
:Pause
:Disp "A=",A
:Pause
Lbl and Goto Lbl and Goto 8
9 and 0 9 and 0
Lbl
(label) and
Goto
are used together for branching.
Lbl
gives a name (label) to a particular location in a program.
label can be one or two text characters (
A
through
Z
,
0
through
99
).
:Lbl
label
Goto
causes the program to branch to label when
Goto
is
encountered.
:Goto
label
Write a program named
SQUARE2
that asks for an input, A,
squares A, and then displays A until A
100.
PROGRAM:SQUARE2
:Lbl 99
:Input A
:If A| 100
:Stop
:Disp A
:Pause
:Goto 99
³
³
Press
b
to get to next
screen.
For
FnOff
and
Y
1
,
press
-
}
2 1
.
For
ZStandard
,
press
(
6
.
Press
b
to end
execution.
Press
b
after answer is
displayed.
Chapter 12: Programming
235
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 235 of 32
IS>( IS>( 8
A A
IS>(
(increment and skip if greater than) is used for testing and
branching. IS>( adds 1 to variable. If the answer is > value
(which can be an expression), then command1 is skipped; if
the answer is { value, then command1 is executed.
command2 is always executed. variable cannot be a system
variable.
IS>(
is not a looping instruction.
:IS>(
variable,value
)
:
command1 (if answer { value)
:
command2
Write a program named
ISKIP
that displays A until A>5.
PROGRAM:ISKIP
:0
"
A
:Lbl S
:Disp A
:Pause
:IS>(A,5)
:Goto S
:Disp "A IS NOW >5"
:Pause
DS<( DS<( 8
B B
DS<(
(decrement and skip if less than) is used for testing and
branching.
DS<(
subtracts 1 from variable. If the answer is
< value (which can be an expression), then command1 is
skipped; if the answer is | value, then command1 is executed.
command2 is always executed. variable cannot be a system
variable.
DS<(
is not a looping instruction.
:DS<(
variable,value
)
:
command1 (if answer | value)
:
command2
³
Press
b
between
A
values.
236
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 236 of 32
Write a program named
DSKIP
that displays A until A<5.
PROGRAM:DSKIP
:9"A
:Lbl S
:Disp A
:Pause
:DS<(A,5)
:Goto S
:Disp "A IS NOW < 5"
:Pause
Menu( Menu( 8
C C
Menu(
generates a menu of up to seven items during program
execution. The pause indicator stays on until you select a
menu item. The calculator then branches to the label
corresponding with that item.
The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks (
"
"
) and can
have up to 16 characters. Up to seven pairs of menu items
follow. Each pair consists of a text item (also enclosed in
quotation marks) to be displayed as a menu selection, and a
label item to which to branch if you select the corresponding
menu selection.
:Menu("
title
"
,
"
item1
"
,label1[,
"
item2
"
,label2,]
)
Write a program named
DATES
that displays a menu of dates.
Label the title 
DATES
, and label option one 
JANUARY 16
 with
A
, label option two 
FEBRUARY 19
 with
B
, label option three
APRIL 9
 with
C
, label option four 
JULY 29
 with
D
, label
option five 
AUGUST 2
 with
E
, label option six 
NOVEMBER 10
with
F
, and label option seven 
DECEMBER 8
 with
F.
PROGRAM:DATES
:Menu("DATES","JANUARY
16",A,"FEBRUARY 19",B,"APRIL
9",C,"JULY 29",D,"AUGUST
2",E,"NOVEMBER 10",F,"DECEMBER
8",G)
³
³
Press
b
between
A
values.
Chapter 12: Programming
237
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 237 of 32
The program above pauses until you select 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
If you select
2:FEBRUARY 19
, for example, the menu disappears
and the program continues execution at
Lbl B
.
SetMenu( SetMenu( 8
D D
Like
Menu(
,
SetMenu(
sets up a menu of up to seven items.
During program execution, the user assigns (and edits, as
necessary) numerical values to each item. To assign a value,
enter the value using the number keys, and then press
b
or
#
.
Long values do not wrap; they scroll off the screen, and an
ellipsis () is displayed. Use
"
and
!
to scroll the whole
value. Use
$
and
#
to move between menu items as
necessary.
:SetMenu("
title
"
,
"
item1
"
,variable1[,
"
item2
"
,variable2,]
)
The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks (
"
"
) and can
have up to 16 characters. Up to seven menu items (also
enclosed in quotation marks) follow. During program
execution, the menu displays the first 10 characters of item.
Each item needs a corresponding variable where the entered
value is stored.
The values you enter for the variables (assigned to the menu
items) are stored in the calculators memory. Also, if you
assign to a menu item a variable that has been previously
defined in the calculators memory, that value displays when
you first execute the program.
Press
-
l
to exit the menu and end program execution.
238
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 238 of 32
Write a program named
SETMENU
that displays a menu of
animal weights. Label the title 
WEIGHTS
, show weight values
of five different animals, and allow the user to change the
weight values.
PROGRAM:SETMENU
:SetMenu("WEIGHTS","AARDVARK",
A,"ELEPHANT",B,"ARMADILLO",
C,"MONKEY",D," KANGAROO",E)
prgm prgm 8
E E
Use
prgm
to execute other programs as subroutines. When you
select
prgm
, it is pasted to the cursor location. Use the Text
editor to enter the characters needed to spell a program name.
Using
prgm
is equivalent to selecting existing programs from
the
8
EXEC
menu (see the section in this chapters entitled
Calling a Program from Another Program; however, it
allows you to enter the name of a program that you have not
yet created.
:prgm
name
Write two programs named
CALCAREA
and
VOLUME
.
CALCAREA
calculates the area of a circle.
VOLUME
inputs the circle
diameter D, and height H, calls
CALCAREA
as a subroutine,
which calculates the area using D and H, and then displays the
volume of a cylinder .
³
³
A
,
B
, and
C
were previously
defined.
For example, the
ARMADILLO
's weight is
assigned to variable
C
.
Enter new
weights.
Chapter 12: Programming
239
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 239 of 32
PROGRAM:VOLUME
:Input "DIAMETER=",D
:Input "HEIGHT=",H
:prgmCALCAREA
:A¦HÜV
:Disp "VOLUME=",V
:Pause
PROGRAM:CALCAREA
:D/2ÜR
:p¦R
ÜA
:Return
Return Return
8
F F
Return
quits the subroutine and returns execution to the calling
program, even if it is encountered within nested loops. Any
loops are ended. An implied
Return
exists at the end of any
program that is called as a subroutine. Within the main
program,
Return
stops execution and returns to the Home
screen.
:Return
See the program examples (on the previous page),
CALCAREA
and
VOLUME
, explaining the programming command,
prgm
. The
subroutine,
CALCAREA
, ends with a
Return
command.
Stop Stop
8
G G
Stop
ends program execution and returns to the Home screen.
Stop
is optional at the end of a program.
:Stop
Write a program named
STOP
that inputs T. If T20, then the
program displays T20. If T<20, then the program stops
execution. (Note: The example screens show two program
executions so that you can see what happens with both types
of input.)
³
Press
b
after inputs.
240
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 240 of 32
PROGRAM:STOP
:Input "T=",T
:If T20
:Then
:Disp "T20"
:Pause
:Else
:Stop
DelVar DelVar 8
H H
DelVar
(delete variable) deletes the contents of variable from
memory. You cannot delete a program or a system variable.
:DelVar
variable
Write a program named
DELVAR
that deletes the value for
variable A from the calculators memory.
PROGRAM:DELVAR
:{1,2}
Ü
L
1
:Disp L
1
:Pause
:DelVar L
1
:Disp L
1
:Pause
GraphStyle( GraphStyle( 8
I I
GraphStyle(
defines one of seven graph style types for Y
n
. Y
n
=
1
,
2
,
3
, or
4
(for
Y
1
,
Y
2,
Y
3
, or
Y
4
). The type icons described below
are located to the left of
Y
n
in the Y= editor.
1
=
ç
(line)
5
=
ë
(path)
2
=
è
(thick line)
6
=
ì
(animate)
3
=
é
(shade above)
7
=
í
(dot)
4
=
ê
(shade below)
:GraphStyle(
Y
,type
)
³
Press
b
after input.
Press
b
after input.
You are returned
to the Home screen.
Press
b
.
Chapter 12: Programming
241
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 241 of 32
For a detailed description of each graph style, see Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
Write a program named
GRPHSTYL
that defines the shade
below graph style for
Y
1
=2X+5
and graphs it.
PROGRAM:GRPHSTYL
:FnOff
:"2X+5"ÜY
:GraphStyle(1,4)
:ZStandard
The
8
I/O Menu
You can only access the 8
I/O
(input/output) menu by
pressing 8 " from the Program editor. The 8
I/O
menu
instructions allow you to input values and output answers
during program execution.
To return to the Program editor without selecting an item,
press :.
8 " (from the
Program editor only)
1:Input
Lets the user enter a value or display a
graph.
2:Prompt
Prompts the user to enter variable values.
3:Disp
Displays text or values on the Home screen.
4:DispGraph
Displays the current graph.
³
For
FnOff
and
Y
1
,
press
-
}
2
1.
For
ZStandard
, press
(
6
.
242
Chapter 12: Programming
12PROG~1.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 11:31 AM Printed: 02/08/01 1:11
PM Page 242 of 32
5:DispTable
Displays the current table.
6:Output(
Displays text or values at a specified
position.
7:getKey
Checks the keyboard for a keystroke.
8:ClrScreen
Clears the Home screen.
9:ClrTable
Clears the current table.
0:GetCalc(
Gets a variable from another TI
N
73.
A:Get(
Gets a variable from the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.
B:Send(
Sends a variable to the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.
Input 8 " 1
Input
functions in two different ways. You can use it to store to
a variable value or to display the current graph.
Storing to a Variable
Input
accepts input and stores it to
variable
. When the program
is executed, a
?
(question mark) prompt (unless otherwise
defined) is displayed. Enter a real number, a list name, or a
Y
n
function. Then press
b
, which tells the calculator to
evaluate the input and store the value to
variable
.
:Input
variable
To input lists and expressions during program execution, you
must use the Text editor to include braces ( {} ) around the list
elements and quotation marks (
"
"
) around the expressions
and
Y
n
functions.
You also can display text of up to 16 characters as a prompt.
During program execution, enter a value after the prompt, and
then press
b
. The value is stored to
variable
, and the
program resumes execution.
:Input "
text
"
,
variable
Chapter 12: Programming
243
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 243 of 32
Write a program named
INPUTVAR
that inputs two sets of data
and a function, and then solves the function using both of the
data sets.
PROGRAM:INPUTVAR
:Input "Y
=",Y
:Input "A=",A
:Input "¨DATA=",¨DATA
:Disp "Y
(A)=",Y (A)
:Pause
:Disp "Y
(¨DATA)=",Y (¨DATA)
:Pause
Displaying the Current Graph
Input
, with no arguments, displays the current graph. Once the
graph screen is shown, you can move the free-moving cursor,
which updates
X
and
Y
by a value of .1. The pause indicator is
displayed. Press b to resume program execution. The
Home screen then displays the X- and Y-coordinates.
:Input
Write a program named
GRPHINPT
that gets input from the
graph screen (the (X,Y) coordinates of the cursors position)
and displays the values on the Home screen.
PROGRAM:GRPHINPT
:FnOff
:PlotsOff
:ZDecimal
:Input
:Disp X,Y
:Pause
³
³
Surround
Y
1
with quotation marks.
For
Y
1
, press
-
}
2
1.
For
¨
, press
-
v
"
9.
Press
b
between
data displays.
Enclose list in { }.
For
FnOff
, press
-
}
2
6.
For
PlotsOff
, select
-
e
4.
For
ZDecimal
, press
(
8
.
Move cursor to
desired location,
and press
b
.
X=2.6;
Y=1.5.
244
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 244 of 32
Prompt Prompt 8
"
2 2
During program execution,
Prompt
displays the specified
variables followed by
=?
, one at a time on separate lines.
During program execution, the user enters a value or
expression for each variable, and then presses
b
. The
values are stored, and the program resumes execution.
Y
n
functions are not valid with
Prompt
.
:Prompt
variableA[,variableB,variableC]
Write a program named
WINDOW
that requests inputs to be
stored to
WINDOW
variables.
PROGRAM:WINDOW
:Prompt Xmin
:Prompt Xmax
:Prompt Ymin
:Prompt Ymax
Disp Disp 8
"
3 3
Disp
displays one or more variable values during program
execution. To display text, surround the text with quotation
marks.
:Disp
valueA[,valueB,valueC,
…]
:Disp "
text
"
[,valueA]
Pause
after
Disp
halts execution temporarily so that you can
examine the screen. To resume execution, press
b
. If a
list is too large to display in its entirety, an ellipsis (
…
) is
displayed in the last column, but the list cannot be scrolled.
• If value is a variable, the current value stored to the
variable is displayed.
• If value is an expression, it is evaluated and the result is
displayed on the right side of the next line.
• If value is text within quotation marks, it is displayed on
the left side of the current display line.
"
is not valid as
text.
³
For
WINDOW
variables, press
-
}
1.
Chapter 12: Programming
245
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 245 of 32
Write a program named
DISPNOTE
that displays the messages,
I LOVE MATH
 and 
TEST1 GRADE=95
.
PROGRAM:DISPNOTE
:Disp "I LOVE MATH"
:Pause
:Disp "TEST1 GRADE=",95
:Pause
DispGraph DispGraph 8
"
4 4
DispGraph
(display graph) displays the graph of all defined and
selected
Y
n
functions during program execution. If
Pause
is
encountered after
DispGraph
, the program halts temporarily so
that you can examine the screen. Press
b
to resume
execution.
:DispGraph
DispTable DispTable 8
"
5 5
DispTable
(display table) displays the table for all defined and
selected
Y
n
functions during program execution. If
Pause
is
encountered after
DispTable
, the program halts temporarily so
that you can examine the screen. Press
b
to resume
execution.
:DispTable
Output( Output( 8
"
6 6
Output(
displays text or value on the Home screen beginning at
row (1-8) and column (1-16), overwriting any existing
characters. You may want to precede
Output(
with
ClrScreen
.
Expressions are evaluated and values are displayed according
to the current mode settings.
"
is not valid as text.
:Output(
row,column,
"
text
")
:Output(
row,column,value
)
³
Press
b
.
246
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 246 of 32
Write a program named
OUTPUT
that writes the contents of B
to a specific area on the screen.
PROGRAM:OUTPUT
:3+5"B
:ClrScreen
:Output(5,4,"ANSWER: ")
:Output(5,12,B)
:Pause
getKey getKey 8
"
7 7
getKey
returns a number corresponding to the last key pressed,
according to the following key code diagram. If no key has
been pressed,
getKey
returns 0. Use
getKey
inside loops to
transfer control, for example, when creating programs that use
a key to control the logic flow.
:getKey
TIN
73
Key Code Diagram
³
^
has no number associated with it.
It stops program execution.
Chapter 12: Programming
247
12PROG~1.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 11:31 AM Printed: 02/08/01 1:12
PM Page 247 of 32
Write a program named
GETKEY
that displays the key code for
the last key pressed, represented as variable
K
. End the
program when
K
=45 (
:
).
PROGRAM:GETKEY
:Lbl A
:0
"
K
:While K=0
:getKey
"
K
:End
:Disp K
:If K
ƒ
45
:Goto A
ClrScreen and ClrTable 8 " 8 and 9
ClrScreen
(clear Home screen) clears the Home screen during
program execution.
:ClrScreen
ClrTable
(clear table) clears the values in the table during
program execution.
:ClrTable
GetCalc( 8 " 0
GetCalc(
gets the contents of
variable
from another TI
N
73 and
stores it to
variable
on the receiving 73.
variable
can be a real
number, list element, list name,
Y
n
variable, or picture.
:GetCalc(
variable
)
You can access
GetCalc(
from the
CATALOG
(
-
|
) to
execute it from the Home screen.
Get( and Send( 8 " A and B
Get(
gets data from the Calculator-Based Laboratory
è
(CBL 2™, CBL™), or Calculator-Based Ranger
è
(CBR
è
)
system and stores it to
variable
on the receiving TI
N
73.
variable
can be a real number, list element, list name,
Y
n
variable, or picture.
³
:
(45)
stops execution.
248
Chapter 12: Programming
12PROG~1.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 11:31 AM Printed: 02/08/01 1:12
PM Page 248 of 32
:Get(
variable
)
Send(
sends the contents of
variable
to the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.
You cannot use it to send to another TI
N
73.
variable
can be a
real number, list element, list name,
Y
n
variable, or picture.
variable
can be a list of elements.
:Send(
variable
)
Write a program named
GETSOUND
that gets sound data and
time in seconds from a CBL 2/CBL.
PROGRAM:GETSOUND
:
Send({3,.00025,99,1,0,0,0,0,
1})
:Get(L
1
)
:Get(L
2
)
Editing Program Commands
To edit a stored program, select the program name that you
want to edit from the
8
EDIT
menu. The calculator displays
the Program editor and all existing program lines for that
program.
The
8
EDIT
menu lists in alphabetical order all created
programs. From this list, select the program you want to edit.
The calculator then displays the Program editor which
displays all existing programming commands that make up the
selected program.
This menu labels the first 10 items using
1
though
9
, then
0
. All
other programs are still included in the list but are not labeled
with a number. To select a menu item, press the number
associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor keys,
and then press
b
.
8"
³
Chapter 12: Programming
249
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 249 of 32
Inserting, Deleting, and Editing Command LinesInserting, Deleting, and Editing Command Lines
• To insert a new command line anywhere in the program,
place the cursor where you want the new characters,
press - m, and then press b. A colon indicates a
new line.
• To insert characters on an existing line, place the cursor
where you want the new line, press - m, and then
enter the new characters.
• To delete a command line, place the cursor on the line,
press : to clear all instructions and expressions on
the line, and then press / to delete the command line,
including the colon.
• To move the cursor to the beginning of a command line,
press - !; to move to the end, press - ".
Copying and Renaming a ProgramCopying and Renaming a Program
You can copy all command lines from one program into a new
or existing program.
• To copy into a new program, use the (8 " ") menu
to create and name the new program. The calculator then
automatically displays the Program editor with the
program name on the top line.
• To copy into an existing program, use the 8
EDIT
(8 ") menu and select the existing program name.
The calculator then automatically displays the Program
editor with the existing program name on the top line.
250
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 250 of 32
Then follow these steps:
1. Position the cursor where you want the copy of the
program to begin.
2. Press - P.
Rcl
is displayed on the bottom line of the
Program editor.
3. Press 8 " " to display the 8
EXEC
menu.
4. Select a name from the menu.
prgm
name is pasted to the
bottom line of the Program editor. You cannot directly
enter the subroutine name using the Text editor when
using
Rcl
. You must select the name from the 8
EXEC
menu.)
5. Press b. All command lines from the selected
program are copied into the new or existing program.
Calling a Program from Another ProgramCalling a Program from Another Program
The 8
EXEC
(execute) menu (8 " "), accessed only
from the Program editor, lets you call any stored program into
the current program. The called program then becomes a
subroutine in the current program.
The 8
EXEC
menu lists in alphabetical order all created
programs. From this list, select the program that you want to
call. The program name is pasted to the cursor location in the
Program editor.
This menu labels the first 10 items using
1
though
9
, then
0
. All
other programs are still included in the list, but are not labeled
with a number. To select a menu item, press the number
associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor keys,
and then press b.
You also can enter a program name on a command line by
selecting
E:prgm
from the 8
CTL
menu, and then entering
the program name using the Text editor.
Chapter 12: Programming
251
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 251 of 32
8"" (from the
Program editor only)
When
prgm
name is encountered during execution, the next
command that the program executes is the first command in
the subroutine. It returns to the subsequent command in the
first program when it encounters either
Return
or the implied
Return
at the end of the second program.
Notes about Calling Programs
• Variables are global.
• label used with
Goto
and
Lbl
is local to the program where
it is located. label in one program is not recognized by
another program. You cannot use
Goto
to branch to a
label in another program.
•
Return
exits a subroutine and returns to the calling
program, even if it is encountered within nested loops.
Executing a Program
The 8
EXEC
(execute) menu lists in alphabetical order all
created programs. From this list, select the program that you
want to execute. The program name is pasted to the cursor
location on the Home screen. Pressing b begins executing
the program. Pressing b after a program is completed
returns you to the Home screen.
The 8
EXEC
menu labels the first 10 items using
1
though
9
,
then
0
. All other programs are still included in the list, but are
not labeled with a number. To select a menu item, press the
number associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor
keys, and then press b.
252
Chapter 12: Programming
7312ENG.DOC CH 12 Programming, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 12:17 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:02
AM Page 252 of 32
8 (except from the
Program editor)
Breaking Out of a ProgramBreaking Out of a Program
To stop program execution, press ^. The
ERR:BREAK
menu is
displayed.
• To return to the Home screen, select
1:Quit
.
• To go where the interruption occurred, select
2:Goto
.
Debugging a Program
The TIN73 checks for program errors during program
execution. It does not check for errors as you enter a program.
If the calculator finds an error during program execution, it
stops execution and then displays an error screen.
• To return to the Home screen, press
1:Quit
.
• To go where the error occurred in the program code,
select
2:Goto
.
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 253 of 22
Communication Link
and
the CBL/CBR
Application
TI
N
73 Link Capabilities ......................................................254
Linking to Another Calculator ................................... 254
Linking to the CBL 2/CBL System or CBR....................255
The Link SEND Menu
9
1.............................................255
The Link RECEIVE Menu
9
1
"
.................................257
Transmitting Data Items.................................................... 258
Repeating a Transmission to an Additional TI
N
73 ....259
DuplicateName Menu................................................. 259
Transmission Error Conditions....................................260
Backing Up Memory..........................................................261
Upgrading your TI
N
73 Graph Explorer Software............. 262
Graph Explorer Software Upgrades...........................262
Where to Get Upgrades..............................................262
How to Install Upgrades ............................................. 262
Backing Up Your Unit before an Installation............ 263
The APPLICATIONS Menu
9
......................................263
Steps for Running the CBL
à
CBR Application ...................264
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application...................................265
Specifying the Data Collection Method...........................265
Specifiying Data Collection Options................................. 266
GAUGE .........................................................................266
DATA LOGGER.............................................................269
RANGER ....................................................................... 272
Collecting the Data ...........................................................273
Stopping Data Collection..................................................274
13
254
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
13apps.doc Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 01/17/02 10:58 AM
Printed: 01/17/02 11:10 AM Page 254 of 22
TI-73
Link Capabilities
The TI
N
73 comes with a unit-to-unit link cable. With this cable,
you can connect to and communicate with another TI
N
73, a
TI
N
82, a TI
N
83, the Calculator-Based Laboratory™ (CBL 2™,
CBL™), or the Calculator-Based Ranger
è
(CBR
è
). You can
communicate with a personal computer using TI™ Connect or
TI-GRAPH LINK™ software and a TI-GRAPH LINK cable.
For information about any of these accessories, contact Texas
Instruments Customer Support (see Appendix C:
Battery
à
Service and Warranty Information).
To connect the TI
N
73 to another device using the unit-to-unit
cable, use the link port located at the center of the bottom
edge of the calculator.
1. Insert either end of the unit-to-unit cable into the TI
N
73
port very
firmly
.
2. Insert the other end of the cable into the port of the other
device.
Linking to Another Calculator
By linking two TI-73’s you can transfer all variables and
programs to another TI
N
73 or back up the entire RAM
(Random Access Memory) of a TI
N
73. To transmit from one
TI
N
73 to another, you first must set up one TI
N
73 to send and
the other to receive using the
9
1:Link
SEND
and
RECEIVE
menus (see page 255 and 257).
Linking a TI
N
73 to a TI
N
82 or TI
N
83 lets you transfer some
types of data between the calculators. Use the
9
1:Link
SEND
menu items
9:Vars to TI82
and
0:Vars to TI83
(see page 256).
•
You can only transfer numerical list data stored in
L
1
–
L
6
(NOT categorical lists) to a TI
N
82. All fractional elements
are converted to decimals.
If dimension>99 for a TI
N
73 list that is selected to be sent
to a TI
N
82, the TI
N
82 truncates the list at the 99
th
element
during transmission.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
255
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 255 of 22
•
You can only transfer numerical list data stored in
L
1
–
L
6
or user-named numerical lists to a TI
N
83 (NOT
categorical lists). All fractional elements are converted to
decimals.
•
From a TI
N
82 or a TI
N
83 to a TI
N
73, you cannot perform a
memory backup (but you can send real numbers, real
number lists, and picture variables).
Linking to the CBL 2/CBL System or CBR
Connect a CBL 2/CBL or CBR to a TI
N
73 using one of the
unit-to-unit link cables that are included with the calculator,
the CBR and the CBL 2/CBL. See the section entitled,
“Selecting the CBL/CBR Application” in this chapter.
Linking to a PC or Macintosh
è
TI-GRAPH LINK
è
is an optional application that connects to a
TI
N
73 to enable communications with a personal computer.
The Link SEND Menu
9
1
You choose the type of data you want to send from the TI
N
73
to another device from the
9
1:Link SEND
menu.
To communicate between two calculators, you must set up
one calculator to send the data and the other calculator to
receive the data. The following section describes how to set
up the TI
N
73 to
send
data. To set up a TI
N
82 or TI
N
83, refer to
its user manual.
9
1
256
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 256 of 22
1:All+…
Displays all RAM items as selected.
2:All–…
Displays all RAM items as deselected.
3:Prgm…
Displays all program names.
4:List…
Displays all list names.
5:Pic…
Displays all picture data types.
6:Real…
Displays all real variables.
7:Y-Vars…
Displays all
Y
n
variables.
8:Consts…
Displays all constants.
9:Vars to TI82…
Displays list names
L
1
-
L
6
that are
defined as numerical lists, real number
variables and picture variables.
0:Vars to TI83…
Displays list names that are defined as
numerical lists, real number variables,
and picture variables.
A:Apps…
Displays all software applications.
B:AppVars…
Displays all software applications
variables.
C:SendId
Sends the Calculator ID number
immediately. (You do not need to
select
TRANSMIT.
)
D:Back Up…
Selects all RAM for backup to a TI
N
73.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
257
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 257 of 22
To select data items to send from the sending unit to another
calculator, follow these steps:
1. Press
9
to display the
APPLICATIONS
menu.
2. Select
1:Link
to display the
Link SEND
menu.
3. Select the type of data you want to send. The
corresponding
SELECT
screen is displayed. Each
SELECT
screen, except the one for
All+
, is displayed initially with
no data items selected.
4. Press
$
and
#
to move the selection cursor (
4
) to an
item you want to select or deselect.
5. Press
b
to select or deselect an item. Selected names
are marked with a black box (
0
). To exit a
SELECT
screen
without transmitting any items, press
-
l
.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select or deselect additional
items.
The Link RECEIVE Menu
9
1
"
You set up the TI
N
73 to receive data from another device using
the
9
1:Link RECEIVE
menu.
To communicate between two calculators, you must set up
one calculator to send the data and the other calculator to
receive the data. The following section describes how to set
up the TI
N
73 to
receive
data. To set up a TI
N
82 or TI
N
83, refer
to its user manual.
9
1
"
1:Receive
Sets unit to receive data transmission.
SELECT
LIST
screen includes
L1-L6
and any user-named lists.
258
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 258 of 22
To set up the TI
N
73 to receive data, follow these steps:
1. Press
9
to display the
APPLICATIONS
menu.
2. Select
1:Link
and press
"
to display the
Link RECEIVE
menu.
3. Select
1:Receive
. The message
Waiting…
and the busy
indicator are displayed. The receiving unit is ready to
receive transmitted items.
To exit the receive mode without receiving items, press
^
, and then select
1:Quit
from the
Error in Xmit
menu.
When transmission is complete, the unit is still in the
receive mode. Press
-
l
to exit the receive mode.
Transmitting Data Items
To transmit data items from a TI
N
73, follow these steps:
1. Select items to send on the sending unit. Keep the
SELECT
screen displayed on the sending unit (see page 257).
2. Set the receiving unit to receive mode (see page 257).
3. Press
"
on the TI
N
73 to display the
TRANSMIT
menu.
4. Confirm that
Waiting…
is displayed on the receiving unit,
which indicates it is set to receive.
5. Select
1:Transmit
. The name and type of each data item are
displayed line by line on the sending unit as the item is
queued for transmission, and then on the receiving unit as
each item is accepted.
6. After all selected items have been transmitted, the
message
Done
is displayed on both calculators. Press
$
and
#
to scroll through the names.
To stop a transmission, press
^
. The
Error in Xmit
menu is
displayed on both units. To leave the error menu, select
1:Quit
.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
259
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 259 of 22
During transmission, if the receiving unit does not have
sufficient memory to receive an item, the
Memory Full
menu is
displayed on the receiving unit.
•
To skip this item for the current transmission, select
1:Omit
. Transmission resumes with the next item.
•
To cancel the transmission and exit transmission mode,
select
2:Quit
.
Repeating a Transmission to an Additional
TI-73
After sending and receiving data between two TI
N
73s, you can
repeat the same transmission without having to reselect data
items to send. Use the original sending unit
only
and as many
additional TI
N
73 units as necessary.
Simply repeat the transmission process without selecting or
deselecting any new items.
Note
: You cannot repeat the
transmission if you selected
All+
or
All-
.
DuplicateName Menu
During transmission, if a variable name is duplicated, the
DuplicateName
menu is displayed on the receiving TI
N
73.
1:Rename
Prompts you to rename the receiving
variable.
2:Overwrite
Overwrites data while receiving the
variable.
3:Omit
Skips transmission of sending variable.
4:Quit
Stops transmission.
The duplicate variable name,
L1
,
and its type,
LIST
, are displayed.
260
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 260 of 22
•
When you select
1:Rename
, the
Name=
prompt is displayed,
and you can enter another appropriate variable name
using the
-
}
menu (for example, renaming
Pic1
to
Pic2
where
Pic2
is undefined), or you can enter text using
the Text editor (
-
t
) (for example, renaming
L
1
to
¨
ABC
where
¨
ABC
is undefined). When renaming lists, do
not enter the
¨
(
-
v
OPS
9
). The calculator assumes
that it is a list name. Press
b
to resume transmission.
Note
: You cannot rename software applications or
constants (the
1:Rename
option is excluded from the
DuplicateName
menu).
•
When you select
2:Overwrite
, the sending unit’s data
overwrites the existing data stored on the receiving unit.
Transmission resumes.
•
When you select
3:Omit
, the sending unit does not send
the data in the duplicated variable name. Transmission
resumes with the next item.
•
When you select
4:Quit
, transmission stops, and the
receiving unit exits receive mode.
Transmission Error Conditions
A transmission error (
Error in Xmit
) occurs after one or two
seconds if:
•
The unit-to-unit cable is not attached to the sending or
receiving unit.
Note
: If the cable is attached, push it in
firmly and try again.
•
The receiving unit is not set to receive transmission.
•
You attempt a backup between a TI
N
73 and a TI
N
82 or
TI
N
83.
•
You attempt a data transfer from a TI
N
73 to a TI
N
82 with
data other than numerical lists,
L
1
-
L
6
, or without using
menu item
9:Vars to TI82
.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
261
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 261 of 22
•
You attempt a data transfer from a TI
N
73 to a TI
N
83 with
data other than numerical lists,
L
1
-
L
6
, or user-named
numerical lists, or without using menu item
0:Vars to TI83
.
Although a transmission error does not occur, these two
conditions may prevent successful transmission:
•
You try to use
Get(
with a calculator instead of a
CBL 2/CBL.
•
You try to use
GetCalc(
with a TI
N
82 or TI
N
83 instead of a
TI
N
73.
Backing Up Memory
The TI
N
73 includes two types of memory: RAM (Random
Access Memory) and F-ROM (Flash Read Only Memory). RAM
includes all lists, programs, variables, and equations. F-ROM
includes software applications, such as the
CBL
à
CBR
application (
9
2
).
To copy (and overwrite) the exact contents of RAM in the
sending TI
N
73 to the memory of the receiving TI
N
73, follow
these steps:
1. Set up the receiving unit in receive mode (see page 257).
2. Then, on the sending unit, select
D:Back Up
from the
Link
SEND
menu.
3. Select
1:Transmit
from the
MEMORYBACKUP
menu on the
sending unit to begin transmission. Selecting
2:Quit
returns you to the
Link SEND
menu.
4. As a safety check to prevent accidental loss of memory,
the message
WARNING–BACKUP
is displayed when the
receiving unit receives notice of a backup.
Select
1:Continue
to begin the backup transmission.
Select
2:Quit
to prevent the backup and return to the
Link
SEND
menu.
When the backup is complete, both the sending calculator and
receiving calculator display a
MEMORY BACKUP
confirmation
screen. If a transmission error occurs during a backup, the
receiving unit’s memory is reset.
262
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
13apps.doc Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 01/17/02 10:58 AM
Printed: 01/17/02 11:09 AM Page 262 of 22
Upgrading your
TI-73
Graph Explorer
Software
You can upgrade the software, or operating system, on your
TI
N
73. You do this by transferring this software from a
computer to your TI
N
73 using the TI Connect™ or
TI-GRAPH LINK™ software and a TI-GRAPH LINK cable.
Graph Explorer Software Upgrades
You can upgrade two different types of software. These are
stored in F-ROM. Therefore, this software is unaffected if you
select
-
Ÿ
7:Reset
1:All
RAM
. These include:
•
New versions which enhance the existing software
(released free of charge).
•
Feature upgrades which modify or add functionality to
existing software (available for purchase).
If you want to download these feature upgrades, which
must be purchased from the TI web site, you must provide
the unique ID number that identifies your TI
N
73. To find
the ID number, press
-
Ÿ
1:About
.
Where to Get Upgrades
For up-to-date information about available upgrades and how
to install them, check the TI web site at
education.ti.com or contact Texas Instruments as
described in Appendix C: Battery
à
Service and Warranty
Information.
How to Install Upgrades
To install new Graph Explorer Software, including free or
purchased upgrades and applications, you need your TI
N
73, a
computer, TI Connect or TI-GRAPH LINK software, and a
TI-GRAPH LINK cable. Extensive directions for installing
upgrades are provided on the web site at
education.ti.com
.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
263
13apps.doc Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 01/17/02 10:58 AM
Printed: 01/17/02 11:09 AM Page 263 of 22
1. Transfer the software from the web site to your
computer.
2. Transfer the software from the computer to your unit.
Backing Up Your Unit before an Installation
When you install new operating system software, the
installation process:
•
Deletes all user-defined data items located in RAM.
•
Resets all system variables and modes to their original
factory settings. This is equivalent to using the
MEMORY
RESET
menu to reset all memory.
To retain any existing data items, do either of the following
before installing the upgrade:
•
Transmit the data items to another TI
N
73 as described on
page 258.
•
Use the TI Connect™ or TI-GRAPH LINK™ software and a
TI-GRAPH LINK cable to send the data items to a
computer.
The APPLICATIONS Menu
9
For the TI
N
73, you can buy additional software applications,
which allow you to customize further your calculator’s
functionality. The calculator reserves four spaces
(placeholders) within ROM memory specifically for
applications. The TI
N
73 comes with the
CBL
à
CBR
application
already listed on the
APPLICATIONS
menu (
9
2
).
264
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 264 of 22
Steps for Running the
CBL
à
CBR Application
Follow these basic steps when using the CBL
à
CBR
application. You may not have to do all of them each time.
Select the CBL
à
CBR application.
Select options, as applicable.
Collect the data.
Follow directions, if applicable.
9
2
b
Select
Go…
or
START NOW
.
Specify the data collection method.
Stop the data collection, if
necessary. Repeat these steps or
exit the
APPLICATIONS
menu.
^
and
¤
or
P
1
,
2
, or
3
Highlight options
or enter value
and press
b
.
b
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
265
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 265 of 22
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application
You access the
CBL/CBR
application by pressing
9
. In order
to use a
CBL/CBR
application, you need a CBL 2/CBL or CBR
(as applicable), a TI
N
73, and a unit-to-unit link cable.
9
Select
2:CBL/CBR
to set up the TI
N
73 to use either of the
applications. An informational screen first appears. Press any
key to continue to the next menu.
9
2
Specifying the Data Collection Method
With a CBL 2/CBL or CBR, you can collect data in one of three
ways:
GAUGE
(bar or meter),
DATA LOGGER
(a Temp-Time,
Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Sonic-Time graph), or
RANGER
,
which runs the
RANGER
program, the built-in CBR data
collection program.
CBL 2/CBL and CBR differ in that CBL 2/CBL allows you to
collect data using one of four different probes: Temperature,
Light, Volt, or Sonic. CBR collects data using only the Sonic
probe. You can find more information on CBL 2/CBL and CBR
in their user manuals.
266
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 266 of 22
9
2
b
1:GAUGE
Represents results as either a bar or
meter. Compatible with CBL 2/CBL or
CBR.
2:DATA LOGGER
Represents results as a Temp-Time,
Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Sonic-Time
graph. Compatible with CBL 2/CBL or
CBR.
3:RANGER
Sets up and runs the
RANGER
program
and represents results as a
Distance-Time, Velocity-Time, or
Acceleration-Time graph. Compatible
with CBR only.
4:QUIT
Quits the CBL
à
CBR application.
Specifiying Data Collection Options
After you select a data collection method, a screen showing
the options for that method is displayed. The method you
choose, as well as the data collection options you choose for
that method, determine whether you use the CBR or the
CBL 2/CBL. Refer to the charts in the following sections to
find the options for the application you are using.
GAUGE
9
2
b
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
267
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 267 of 22
1
The
GAUGE
data collection method lets you choose one of four
different probes:
Temp
,
Light
,
Volt
, or
Sonic
. You can use the
CBL 2/CBL with all probes; you can use the CBR only with the
Sonic
probe.
When you select a
PROBE
option, all other options change
accordingly. Use
"
and
!
to move between the
PROBE
options. To select a probe, highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press
b
.
GAUGE Options (Defaults)
Temp Light Volt Sonic
TYPE: Bar
or
Meter
MIN: 0 0
M
10 0
MAX: 100 1 10 6
UNITS:
¡
C
or
¡
FmW
à
cm
2
Volt m
or
Ft
DIRECTNS: On
or
Off
TYPE
The
GAUGE
data collection results are represented according
to
TYPE
:
Bar
or
Meter
. Highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press
b
.
Bar Meter
268
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 268 of 22
MIN and MAX
MIN
and
MAX
refer to the minimum and maximum
UNIT
values
for the specified
PROBE
. Defaults are listed in the table on page
267. See the CBL 2/CBL and CBR guidebook for specific
MIN
à
MAX
ranges. Enter values using the number keys.
UNITS
The results are displayed according to the
UNITS
specified. To
specify a unit measurement (
Temp
or
Sonic
probes only),
highlight the one you want using the cursor keys, and then
press
b
.
DIRECTNS (Directions)
If
DIRECTNS=On
, the calculator displays step-by-step directions
on the screen, which help you set up and run the data
collection. To select
On
or
Off
, highlight the one you want with
the cursor keys, and then press
b
.
With the
Sonic
data collection probe, if
DIRECTNS=On
, the
calculator displays a menu screen before starting the
application asking you to select
1:CBL
or
2:CBR.
This ensures
that you get the appropriate directions. Press
1
to specify
CBL
or
2
to specify
CBR
.
Data Collection Comments and Results
To label a specific data point, press
b
to pause the data
collection. You see a
Comment=
prompt. Enter up to a
six-character comment using the Text editor (
-
t
) or
number keys. The calculator automatically converts the
comment labels and the corresponding results into list
elements using the following list names (you cannot rename
these lists):
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
269
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 269 of 22
Probe Comment Labels (X)
Stored to:
Data Results (Y)
Stored to:
Temp
¨
TCMNT
¨
TEMP
Light
¨
LCMNT
¨
LIGHT
Volt
¨
VCMNT
¨
VOLT
Sonic
¨
DCMNT
¨
DIST
To see all elements in one of these lists, you can insert these
lists into the List editor just as you would any other list.
Access list names from the
-
v
Ls
menu.
CAUTION
: These lists are only temporary placeholders for
comment labels and data results for any particular probe.
Therefore, every time you collect data and enter comments for
one of the four probes, the two lists pertaining to that probe
are overwritten with comment labels and data results from the
most recently collected data.
If you want to save comment labels and data results from
more than one data collection, copy all list elements that you
want to save to a list with a different name.
Also, the
DATA LOGGER
data collection method stores data
results to the same list names, overwriting previously-
collected data results, even those collected using the
GAUGE
data collection method.
DATA LOGGER
9
2
b
2
270
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 270 of 22
The
DATA LOGGER
data collection method lets you choose one
of four different probes:
Temp
,
Light
,
Volt
, or
Sonic
. You can use
the CBL 2/CBL with all probes; you can use the CBR only with
the
Sonic
probe.
When you select a
PROBE
option, all other options change
accordingly. Use
"
and
!
to move between the
PROBE
options. To select a probe, highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press
b
.
DATA LOGGER Options
(Defaults)
Temp Light Volt Sonic
#SAMPLES: 99 99 99 50
INTRVL (SEC): 1 1 1 1
UNITS:
¡
C
or
¡
FmW
à
cm
2
Volt m
or
Ft
PLOT: RealTme
or
End
DIRECTNS: On
or
Off
Ymin
(
'
):
0
Ymax
(
'
):
6
The
DATA LOGGER
data collection results are represented as a
Temp-Time, Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Distance-Time graph.
Probe-Time Graph
#SAMPLES
#SAMPLES
refers to how many data samples are collected and
then graphed. For example, if
#SAMPLES=99
, data collection
stops after the 99
th
sample is collected. Enter values using the
number keys.
A Distance-Time graph in
meters (
Sonic
probe).
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
271
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 271 of 22
INTRVL (SEC)
INTRVL
(SEC)
specifies the interval in seconds between each
data sample that is collected. For example, if you want to
collect 99 samples and
INTRVL=1
, it takes 99 seconds to finish
data collection. Enter values using the number keys. See the
CBR or CBL 2/CBL guidebook for more information about
interval limits.
UNITS
The results are displayed according to the
UNITS
specified. To
specify a unit measurement (
Temp
or
Sonic
only), highlight the
one you want using the cursor keys, and then press
b
.
PLOT
You can specify whether you want the calculator to collect
realtime (
RealTme
) samples, which means that the calculator
graphs data points immediately as they are being collected, or
you can wait and show the graph only after all data points
have been collected (
End
). Highlight the option you want with
the cursor keys, and then press
b
.
Ymin and Ymax
To specify
Ymin
and
Ymax
values for the final graph, press
'
to view the
PLOT WINDOW
screen. Use
$
and
#
to
move between options. Enter
Ymin
and
Ymax
using the number
keys. Press
-
l
to return to the
DATA LOGGER
options
screen.
DIRECTNS (Directions)
If
DIRECTNS=On
, the calculator displays step-by-step directions
on the screen, which help you set up and run the data
collection. To select
On
or
Off
, highlight the one you want with
the cursor keys, and then press
b
.
With the
Sonic
data collection probe, if
DIRECTNS=On
, the
calculator displays a menu screen before starting the
application asking you to select
1:CBL
or
2:CBR.
This ensures
that you get the appropriate directions. Press
1
to specify
CBL
or
2
to specify
CBR
.
272
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 272 of 22
Data Collection Results
The calculator automatically converts all collected data points
into list elements using the following list names (you cannot
rename the lists):
Probe Time Values (X)
stored to:
Data Results (Y)
Stored to:
Temp
¨
TTEMP
¨
TEMP
Light
¨
TLGHT
¨
LIGHT
Volt
¨
TVOLT
¨
VOLT
Sonic
¨
TDIST
¨
DIST
To see all elements in one of these lists, you can insert these
lists into the List editor just as you would any other list.
Access list names from the
-
v
Ls
menu.
CAUTION
: These lists are only temporary placeholders for
data results for any particular probe. Therefore, every time
you collect data for one of the four probes, the list pertaining
to that probe is overwritten with data results from the most
recently collected data.
If you want to save data results from more than one data
collection, copy all list elements that you want to save to a list
with a different name.
Also, the
GAUGE
data collection method stores data results to
the same list names, overwriting previously-collected data
results, even those collected using the
DATA LOGGER
data
collection method.
RANGER
Selecting the
RANGER
data collection method runs the CBR
RANGER
program, a customized program especially for the
TI
N
73 which makes it compatible with the CBR.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
273
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 273 of 22
9
2
b
3
b
For detailed information about the
RANGER
program as well as
option explanations, see the Getting Started with CBR
è
guidebook.
Note
: If you execute the
RANGER
data collection method, the
program name,
RANGER
, appears in the
8
EXEC
menu. You
can’t edit the program, but you can execute it from this menu,
just as you would another program. If you delete
RANGER
from
the
8
EXEC
menu (
-
Ÿ
4:Delete 6:Prgm
), you can no
longer access
RANGER
from this menu; you must select
9
2:CBL
à
CBR 3:RANGER
.
The
RANGER
data collection method only uses the
Sonic
probe.
Collecting the Data
After you specify all of the options for your data collection
method, select the
Go
option from the
GAUGE
or
DATA LOGGER
options screen. If you are using the
RANGER
data collection
method, select
1:SETUP
à
SAMPLE
from the
MAIN MENU
menu, and
then
START NOW
.
274
Chapter 13: Link and the CBL
à
CBR Application
APPS.DOC Chapter 13: Link and CBL/CBR Application, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/07/01 10:34 AM
Printed: 02/07/01 10:35 AM Page 274 of 22
•
If
DIRECTNS=Off
,
GAUGE
and
DATA LOGGER
data collection
begin immediately.
•
If
DIRECTNS=On
, the calculator displays step-by-step
directions.
If
PROBE=Sonic
, the calculator first displays a menu screen
asking you to select
1:CBL
or
2:CBR.
This ensures that you
get the appropriate directions. Press
1
to specify
CBL
or
2
to specify
CBR
.
•
If you select
START NOW
from the
MAIN MENU
of the
RANGER
data collection method, the calculator displays
one directions screen. Press
b
to begin data
collection.
Stopping Data Collection
To stop the
GAUGE
data collection method, press
:
on the
TI
N
73.
The
DATA LOGGER
and
RANGER
data collection methods stop
after the specified number of samples have been collected. To
stop them before this happens:
1. Press
^
on the TI
N
73.
2. Press
¤
on the CBR,
T
on the CBL 2, or
P
on the CBL.
To exit from the
GAUGE
or
DATA LOGGER
option menus
without beginning data collection, press
-
l
.
To exit from the
RANGER
option menu without beginning data
collection, select
MAIN MENU
. Select
6:QUIT
to return to the
CBL
à
CBR APP
menu.
Press
4:QUIT
from the
CBL
à
CBR APP
menu to return to the
TI
N
73 Home screen.
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 275 of 8
MemoryMemory
ManagementManagement
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu ..........................................276
About - Ÿ 1.......................................................276
Check RAM - Ÿ 2..............................................277
Check APPs - Ÿ 3 ..............................................277
Delete - Ÿ 4 ......................................................278
Clear Home - Ÿ 5.............................................. 279
ClrAllLists - Ÿ 6 .................................................280
Reset - Ÿ 7 ........................................................280
14
276
Chapter 14: Memory Management
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 276 of 8
The -
Ÿ
MEMORY Menu
At any time, you can check available memory or manage
existing memory by selecting items from the - Ÿ
MEMORY
menu.
-Ÿ
1:About
Displays information about the
calculator.
2:Check RAM
Reports memory availability and variable
usage.
3:Check APPs
Reports availability of application spaces.
4:Delete
Displays the
DELETE FROM
menu.
5:Clear Home
Clears the Home screen.
6:ClrAllLists
Clears all lists in memory.
7:Reset
Displays the
RESET
menu, which allows
you to reset all RAM memory or all
defaults.
About About -
Ÿ
1 1
About
displays information about your TIN73. To leave the
About
screen and return to the Home screen, press either -
l or :.
-Ÿ
1
GRAPH EXPLORER SOFTWARE
X.X
Help:education.ti.com
P
ROD. ID:02-X-XX-XX
ID:XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXX
Version
Number
Chapter 14: Memory Management
277
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 277 of 8
Check RAM Check RAM -
Ÿ
2 2
Check RAM
displays the
MEM FREE
screen. The top line reports
the total amount of available memory. The remaining lines
report the amount of memory each variable type is using. You
can check this screen to see whether you need to delete
variables from memory to make room for new data.
To leave the
MEM FREE
screen, press either
-
l
or
:
.
-Ÿ
2
Check APPs Check APPs -
Ÿ
3 3
Check Apps
displays the
Spaces Free
screen, which displays
application memory available on the calculator. Four spaces in
the calculators memory are reserved for applications. The
TIN73 comes with the CBLàCBR application already loaded.
Since applications take up no RAM memory, selecting
-
Ÿ
4:Delete 1:All
doesnt delete any applications. Instead,
delete an application using
-
Ÿ
4:Delete
8: Apps
.
The
Spaces Free
screen displays how many spaces are free as
well as the names of all loaded applications and the spaces
each one occupies. (Any application can occupy anywhere
from one to four spaces depending upon its size.)
To leave the
Spaces Free
screen and return to the Home screen,
press either
-
l
or
:
.
For more information on running applications on the TIN73,
see Chapter 13: Communication Link and the CBLàCBR
Application.
278
Chapter 14: Memory Management
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 278 of 8
-Ÿ
3
Delete Delete
-
Ÿ
4 4
To increase available RAM memory or application space, you
can delete the contents of any type of system variable. You
also can delete applications or the application variable,
AppVars
.
Delete
displays a menu of types of variables from
which you can select. Selecting a type displays a
DELETE
:type
screen of specific variables to delete.
To leave any
DELETE:
type screen without deleting anything,
press - l, which displays the Home screen. Some system
variables, such as the last-answer variable
Ans
and the
statistical variable
RegEQ
are not listed and cannot be deleted.
-Ÿ
4
To delete from the
DELETE FROM
screen:
1. Press - Ÿ
4
:
Delete
to display the
DELETE FROM
secondary menu.
2. Select the data type of the variable you want to delete, or
select
1:All
for a list of all variables of all types. The
DELETE:
type menu is displayed, listing each specific
variable of the type you selected and the number of bytes
each variable is using.
3. Press $ and # to move the selection cursor (8) next to
the variable you want to delete, and then press b.
The variable is deleted from memory. Repeat, as
necessary.
Chapter 14: Memory Management
279
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 279 of 8
List -
Ÿ
4 3
In addition to deleting lists from the
DELETE:List
menu, you
also can delete
IDList
. The
IDList
stores any additional IDs that
have been collected from other calculators (using the
9
1:Link
1:Receive
feature). Therefore, at any time you can delete
IDList
, just as you would delete any other variable.
The
-
Ÿ
2:Check RAM
MEM FREE
screen adds all statistical
list and
IDList
memory bytes together and displays the total
after the
List
.
Apps and AppVars -
Ÿ
4 8 and 9
Apps
allows you to delete individual applications that have
been stored on the calculator. Individual applications are not
deleted when you select
-
Ÿ
4:Delete 1:All
because they
are stored in ROM memory (as opposed to RAM).
AppVars
is a variable holder used to store variables created by
independent applications, but which are not recognized by the
TIN73. For example, if you create a matrix with an application
and save it to the calculators memory, the calculator stores it
in
AppVars
since matrices are not recognized by the TIN73.
In addition, you cannot edit or change variables in
AppVars
unless you do so through the application which created them.
For more information on running applications, see Chapter 13:
Link Communication and the CBLàCBR Application.
Clear Home Clear Home
-
Ÿ
5 5
Clear Home
not only clears the Home screen (like
ClrScreen
) but
also clears all previous entries stored in
-
£
(unlike
ClrScreen
). In addition, all previous entries displayed on the
Home screen are erased. To cancel
Clear Home
without
clearing, press
:
.
Note:
Clear Home
is different from the
ClrScreen
programming
command found under the
8
I/O
menu.
280
Chapter 14: Memory Management
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 280 of 8
You can execute
Clear Home
from either the Home screen or
the Program editor. If you select
Clear Home
from the Program
editor, it is inserted at the cursor location. The Home screen
and all entries are cleared when the program is executed.
Clear Home
takes no additional arguments.
To clear the Home screen and all entries:
1. Press - l to display the Home screen.
2. Press - Ÿ
5
to paste the instruction to the Home
screen.
3. Press b to execute the instruction.
ClrAllLists ClrAllLists
-
Ÿ
6 6
ClrAllLists
sets to 0 the dimension of each list in memory. To
cancel
ClrAllLists
, press :.
ClrAllLists
does not delete list
names from memory, from the - v
Ls
menu, or from the
List editor.
You can execute
ClrAllLists
from either the Home screen or the
Program editor. If you select
ClrAllLists
from within the
Program editor, it is inserted at the cursor location. The lists
are cleared when the program is executed.
ClrAlllLists
takes no additional arguments.
To clear all elements from all lists:
1. Press - l to display the Home screen.
2. Press - Ÿ
6
to paste the instruction to the Home
screen.
3. Press b to execute the instruction.
Reset Reset
-
Ÿ
7 7
The
RESET
secondary menu gives you the options of resetting
all RAM memory (including default settings) or only resetting
the default settings while preserving other data stored in
memory, such as programs and
Y
n
functions. To leave without
resetting and to return to the Home screen, press either
- l or :.
Chapter 14: Memory Management
281
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 281 of 8
Resetting All Memory -
Ÿ
7 1
Resetting all RAM memory on the TIN73 restores the memory
to the factory settings. It deletes all non-system variables and
all programs. It resets all system variables to the default
settings.
Before you reset ALL memory, consider deleting only selected
data using
-
Ÿ
4:Delete
.
-Ÿ
7
-Ÿ
7 1
From the
RESET RAM
screen:
• Select
1:No
to cancel memory reset and return to the
Home screen.
• Select
2:Reset
to erase from memory all data and
programs. All factory defaults are restored.
Mem cleared
is
displayed on the Home screen.
When you clear memory, the contrast sometimes changes. If
the screen is faded or blank, adjust the contrast. Press
-
$
to increase the contrast or
-
#
to decrease the contrast.
282
Chapter 14: Memory Management
7314ENG.DOC CH 14 Memory Management, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 05/26/98 12:40 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 282 of 8
Resetting Defaults -
Ÿ
7 2
When you reset defaults on the TIN73, all defaults are restored
to the factory settings. Stored data and programs are not
changed.
Some examples of the TIN73 defaults that are restored by
resetting the defaults are:
• Mode settings (
.
).
•
Y
n
functions that are deselected (
&
).
•
WINDOW
variables (
'
).
• Stat plots that are deselected (
-
e
).
•
WINDOW
format settings (
-
g
).
•
rand
seed value (
1
PRB 1:rand
).
-Ÿ
7
-Ÿ
7 2
From the
RESET DEFAULTS
screen:
• Select
1:No
to cancel defaults reset and return to the Home
screen.
• Select
2:Reset
to reset all defaults. Default settings are
restored.
Defaults set
is displayed on the Home screen.
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 283 of 36
Function and
Instruction Reference
All the operations in this section are included in the
CATALOG
(- |). Non-alphabetic operations (such as +, !, and >) are
listed at the end of the
CATALOG
.
You always can use the
CATALOG
to select an operation and insert it
next to the cursor on the Home screen or to a command line in the
Program editor. You also can use the specific keystrokes, menus, or
screens listed here below the function or instructions name.
 Indicates menus or screens that insert the operations name only
if you are in the Program editor. In most cases (like mode or
window format settings), you can use these menus or screens from
the Home screen to perform the operation interactively; the name
is not inserted at the cursor.
 Indicates menus or screens that are valid only from the Program
editors main menu. From the Home screen, you cannot use these
menus or screens to select an operation.
[ ] Indicate optional arguments. If you specify an optional
argument, do not enter the brackets.
A
§
b/c
.
Selects the
A
§
b/c
Display Format mode setting.
Displays results as mixed numbers, if applicable.
4
5
+
8
5
b
2
2
5
8Ab/c/d/e
?
Converts a simple fraction to a mixed number or a
mixed number to a simple fraction.
3
1
3
8
Ab/c
/
d/e
b
10
3
10
3
8
Ab/c
/
d/e
b
3
1
3
AA
284
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 284 of 36
abs(value)
1
NUM
Returns the absolute value of a real number,
expression, or each element of a list.
abs(
M
35)
b
35
conditionA and conditionB
-t
Logic (boolean) operator; returns
1
if both conditionA
and conditionB are true (non-zero). Returns
0
if
either conditionA or conditionB is false (zero).
conditionA and conditionB can be real numbers,
expressions, or lists.
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
Test operations are frequently used in programs.
PROGRAM:AND
:1
Ü
A
:2
Ü
B
:A>0 and B<0
Ans
-¢
Returns the last answer calculated.
1.7
¦
4.2
b
7.14
147/ Ans
b
20.58823529
augment(list1,list2)
-v
OPS
Combines the elements of two lists, list1 and list2, to
create a new list.
augment({1,
L
3,2},{5,4})
b
{1
L
3 2 5 4}
Autosimp
.
Selects the
Autosimp
Simplification mode setting.
Automatically simplifies fractional results.
1
9
+
5
9
b
2
3
AxesOff
AxesOn
-g
WINDOW
format settings; turns off or on the graph
axes.
b/c
.
Selects the
b/c
Display Format mode setting. Displays
results as simple fractions, if applicable.
3
4
+
2
4
b
5
4
BarPlot
See Plot1: Bar Graph
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
285
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 285 of 36
BoxPlot
See Plot1: Box Plot
Circle(X,Y,radius)
2
Draws a circle with center (X,Y) and radius, a real
number.
ClrDraw
b
Don
e
Circle(0,0,7)
b
Clear Home
-Ÿ
Clears the Home screen (like
ClrScreen
), and also
clears all entries stored in
-
£
and erases all
entries on the History screen.
ClrAllLists
-Ÿ
Sets the dimension of all lists in memory to 0.
ClrDraw
2
Clears all drawn elements from the graph screen.
ClrList list1[,list2,list3,...]
-v
OPS
Clears all items in at least one specified list.
ClrList L
1
,
¨
LIST
b
ClrScreen
8
I/O
Programming command; clears the Home screen
during program execution.
ClrTable
8
I/O
or
-|
Clears the values in the table during program
execution if
Indpnt:Ask
is set.
coin(tosses)
1
PRB
Returns a random list of 0s and 1s that represents
heads and tails for one or more coin tosses. tosses is a
positive whole number.
coin(5)
b
{1 1 0 1 0
}
WINDOW
values are
set with
ZSquare
.
286
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 286 of 36
CoordOff
CoordOn
-g
WINDOW
format settings; turns off or on cursor
coordinates so that they are not displayed at the bottom
of the graph.
cos(value)
-u
TRIG
Returns the cosine of a real number, expression, or
each element of a list. Results are determined by
Angle mode setting (
Degree
or
Radian
).
In Degree mode:
cos(45)
b
.7071067812
cos ({0,60,90})
b
{1 .5 0}
In Radian mode:
cos(
p
/2)
b
0
cos ({0,
p
/2,
p
})
b
{1 0
L
1}
cos
L
1
(value)
-u
TRIG
Returns the arccosine of a real number, expression,
or each element of a list.
M
1
value
1. Results are
determined by Angle mode setting (
Degree
or
Radian
).
In Degree mode:
cos
(1)
b
0
cos
({1,0})
b
{0 90}
In Radian mode:
cos
(
.
5)
b
1.047197551
cos
({0,
.
5} )
b
{1.570796327 1
.
...}
Degree
.
Selects the
Degree
Angle mode setting. Interprets
angles as degrees.
In Degree mode:
sin(90)
b
1
sin(
pà
2)
b
.0274121336
DelVar
variable
8
CTL
or
-|
Deletes the contents of
variable
from memory. You
cannot delete a program or a system variable.
PROGRAM:DELVAR
:{1,2}
Ü
L
1
:Disp L
1
:Pause
:DelVar L
1
:Disp L
1
:Pause
ERROR 14: UNDEFINED
DependAsk
-f
Selects the
Depend: Ask
TABLE SETUP
format setting.
The user must highlight a dependent variable (
Y
)
space with the cursor, and then press
b
to view
the value.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
287
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 287 of 36
DependAuto
-f
Selects the
Depend: Auto
TABLE SETUP
format setting.
Table automatically displays dependent variable (
Y
)
values.
DiagnosticOff
DiagnosticOn
-|
Settings which tell the calculator not to display
(
DiagnosticOff
) or to display (
DiagnosticOn
) r and r
(coefficient of determination) with
LinReg
and
ExpReg
regression model (
-
v
CALC
) results or
R
for QuadReg regression model results.
dice(rolls
[,
#dice
]
)
1
PRB
Returns a random list of numbers (between 1 and 6)
that represent dice rolls.
dice(
takes one optional
argument,
#dice,
a positive whole number>1. If
#dice
is specified, each list element is the total sum of one
rolls results.
dice(5)
b
{5 1 3 6 2}
dice(5,2)
b
{11 5 7 2 10
}
dim(list)
newDimension#
X
dim(list)
dimension#
X
dim(newList)
-v
OPS
Returns the dimension (number of elements) of a
defined list, changes the dimension of an existing list,
or creates a new list with a specified number of
elements. New elements are set to 0.
{1,2,3}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 2 3}
dim(L
1
)
b
3
5
Ü
dim(L
1
)
b
5
L
1
b
{1 2 3 0 0}
4
Ü
dim(
¨
NEW)
b
4
¨
NEW
b
{0 0 0 0}
Disp
[
valueA
,
valueB
,]
8
I/O
Programming command (display); displays one or
more
values
, as specified in an argument. To display
text, surround the
value
with quotation marks. To see
the output, follow
Disp
with a
Pause
instruction.
PROGRAM:DISP
:10
Ü
X
:Disp X
:Disp X
+3X6
:Pause
PROGRAM:DISPTEXT
:Disp "MATH IS FUN!"
:Pause
DispGraph
8
I/O
Programming command (display graph); displays the
graph for all defined and selected
Y
n
functions during
program execution.
PROGRAM:GRAPH
:"2X+5"
Ü
Y
:DispGraph
288
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 288 of 36
DispTable
8
I/O
Programming command (display table); displays the
table for all defined and selected
Y
n
functions during
program execution.
PROGRAM:TABLE
:"2X+5"
Ü
Y
:IndpntAuto
:DependAuto
:DispTable
angle8DMS
-u
ANGLE
Converts an angle to DMS (degrees
¡
minutes'
seconds") notation. Results are determined by the
Angle mode setting (
Radian
or
Degree
).
In Degree or Radian mode:
50
¡8
DMS
b
50
¡
0'0"
In Radian mode:
50
8
DMS
b
2864
¡
47'20.312"
:
DS<(variable
,
value)
:
command1
(if answer
|
value
)
:
command2
8
CTL
Programming command (decrement and skip if less
than); subtracts 1 from
variable
. If the answer is <
value
, then
command1
is skipped; if the answer is
|
value
, then
command1
is executed.
command2
is
always executed.
PROGRAM:DS
:9
Ü
A
:Lbl S
:Disp A
:DS<(A,5)
:Goto S
:Disp "A IS NOW <5"
:Pause
e^(x)
1
LOG
Raises e to a power of
x
, where
x
is a real number, an
expression that results in an real number, or a list of
real numbers. e equals 2.71828182846.
e^(2.5)
b
12.18249396
value
©
exponent
-{
Enters a number in scientific notation. The display of
the result depends upon the Numeric mode setting
(
Normal
or
Sci
).
value
can be a real number or list.
In Normal Numeric mode:
12.3456789
©
5
b
1234567.89
(1.78/2.34)
©
2
b
76.06837607
{6.34,854.6}
©
3
b
{6340 854600}
Else
See
If
:
Then
:
Else
:
End
End
8
CTL
Programming command; you must include an
End
instruction at the end of each
For(, While
, or
Repeat
loop. Also, you must enter an
End
instruction at the
end of each
If–Then
group and each
If–Then–Else
group.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
289
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 289 of 36
ExpReg [XList,YList,freq,Y
]
-v
CALC
Fits the equation (y=ab ) to XList and YList with
frequency list, freq, and stores the regression equation
to Y
. XList, YList, and freq (if specified) must have
the same number of elements.
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
Defaults for XList and YList are
L
1
and
L
2
.
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
Ü
L
3
b
Don
e
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
Ü
L
4
b
Don
e
Set Decimal mode to 2.
ExpReg L
3
,L
4
,Y
b
Select ZStandard.
ExprOff
ExprOn
-g
WINDOW
format settings; turns off or on the
expression display in the top left corner while tracing
a graph.
8F/D
>
Converts a fraction to its decimal equivalent or
changes a decimal to its fractional equivalent, if
possible.
3
4
8
F
/
D
b
.
75
.75
8
F
/
D
b
3
4
Fill(number,list)
-|
Replaces each element in existing list with specified
real number, number.
{3,4,5}
Ü
L
1
b
{3 4 5}
Fill(8,L
1
)
b
Don
e
L
1
b
{8 8 8}
Fix #ofplaces
.
Sets fixed Decimal mode setting for # of decimal
places. #ofplaces must be an integer between 0 and 9.
It can be an expression which equals an appropriate
integer.
Fix 3
b
Don
e
p
b
3.142
Float
.
Selects the
Float
Decimal Notation mode setting.
Displays a decimal with a maximum of 10 digits,
including the sign and decimal point.
Float
b
Don
e
p
b
3.141592654
290
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
99APPX-A.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM
Printed: 02/07/01 11:23 AM Page 290 of 36
FnOff
[
1,2,3,4
]
FnOn
[
1,2,3,4
]
-}
2:Y-Vars
Turns off (deselects) or on (selects) all
Y
n
functions
or specified
Y
n
functions (
Y
1
,
Y
2
,
Y
3
, or
Y
4
).
FnOff 1,3
b
Done
FnOn 2
b
Done
:
For(
variable
,
begin
,
end
,[
increment
]
)
:
block
(while
variable
end
)
:
End
:
command
‡
8
CTL
Programming command; executes commands in
block
through
end
, increasing
variable
from
begin
by
increment
until
variable
>
end
.
PROGRAM:FOR
:For(A,0,8,2)
:Disp A
2
:Pause
:End
fPart(
value
)
1
NUM
Returns the fractional part of a real number,
expression, or each element in a list.
fPart(23.45)
b
.45
fPart(
L
17.26
¦
8)
b
L
.08
fPart({1.2,3.4,5.6})
b
{.2 .4 .6}
fPart(1
1
2
)
1
2
gcd(
valueA
,
valueB
)
1
MATH
Returns the greatest common divisor (the largest
number that can divide into the two
values
evenly), of
two positive whole numbers or lists of positive whole
numbers.
gcd(27,36)
b
9
27
36
4
Simp 9
b
3
4
Get(
variable
)
†
8
I/O
–or–
-|
Gets data from a CBR or CBL 2/CBL System and stores
it in
variable
.
PROGRAM:GETSOUND
:Send ({3,.00025,99,1,0,0,0,0,
13})
:Get(L
1)
:Get(L
2)
GetCalc(
variable
)
†
8
I/O
–
or
–
-|
Gets contents of
variable
from another TI
N
73 and
stores it to
variable
on the receiving TI
N
73.
PROGRAM:GETCALC
:GetCalc(L
1
)
:GetCalc(Y
1
)
:GetCalc(Pic1)
getKey
‡
8
I/O
Programming command; returns the key code for the
current keystroke. See Chapter 12: Programming for
the Key Code Diagram displayed with the
GetKey
explanation.
PROGRAM:GETKEY
:Lbl A
:0
"
K
:While K=0
:getKey
"
K
:End
:Disp K
:If K
ƒ
45
:Goto A
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
291
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 291 of 36
Goto label
8
CTL
Programming command; transfers program control to
the label specified by preceding label instruction.
PROGRAM:GOTO
:Lbl 99
:Input A
:If A
100
:Stop
:Disp A
:Pause
:Goto 99
GraphStyle(Y
,type)
8
CTL
or
-|
Defines one of seven graphstyle types for Y
n
. Y =1, 2,
3, or 4 (for
Y
1
,
Y
2
,
Y
3
,
Y
4
). The type icons described
below are located to the left of
Y
n
in the Y= editor.
1 = » (line) 5 = À (path)
2 = ¼ (thick) 6 = Á (animate)
3 = ¾ (above) 7 = Â (dot)
4 = ¿ (below)
PROGRAM:STYLE
:"2X+5"
Ü
Y
:GraphStyle(1,4)
:ZStandard
GridOff
GridOn
-g
WINDOW
format settings; turn off or on grid lines that
correspond with
Xscl
and
Yscl
while graphing.
Histogram
See Plot1: Histogram
Horizontal y
2
DRAW
Draws a horizontal line on the current graph at Y=y. y
can be an expression but not a list.
Horiz 4.5
b
:If condition
:command1 (if true)
:command2
8
CTL
Programming command; if condition is true
(non-zero), then command1 is executed. If condition
is false (zero), then command1 is skipped.
PROGRAM:IF
:0
Ü
A
:Lbl Z
:A+1
Ü
A
:Disp "A IS",A
:Pause
:If A
2
:Stop
:Goto Z
292
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 292 of 36
If–Then
:
If
condition
:
Then
:block (if true)
:
End
8
CTL
Programming commands; if condition is true
(non-zero), then block is executed. If condition is
false (zero), then block is skipped.
PROGRAM:THEN
:1
Ü
X:10
Ü
Y
:If X<10
:Then
:2X+3
Ü
X
:2Y3
Ü
Y
:End
:Disp (X,Y)
:Pause
If–Then–Else
:
If
condition
:
Then
:block1 (if true)
:
Else
:block2 (if false)
:
End
8
CTL
Programming commands; if condition is true
(non-zero), then block1 is executed. If condition is
false (zero), then block2 is executed.
PROGRAM:ELSE
:Input "X=",X
:If X<0
:Then
:X
Ü
Y
:Else
:X
Ü
Y
:End
:Disp X,Y
:Pause
IndpntAsk
-f
Selects the
Indpnt: Ask
TABLE SETUP
format setting.
Table asks the user for independent variable (X)
values.
IndpntAuto
-f
Selects the
Indpnt: Auto
TABLE SETUP
format setting.
Table automatically displays independent variable (X)
values.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
293
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 293 of 36
Input
Input [variable]
Input ["text",variable]
8
I/O
Programming command;
Input
, with no arguments,
displays the current graph. Otherwise,
Input
accepts
input and stores it to variable (prompted by a
?
,
unless otherwise defined). text designates a specific
text prompt (16 characters), if desired, and must be
enclosed in quotation marks.
PROGRAM:INPUTVAR
:Input "Y
=",Y
:Input "A=",A
:Input "
¨
DATA=",
¨
DATA
:Disp "Y
(A)=",Y (A)
:Pause
:Disp
:"Y
(
¨
DATA)=",Y (
¨
DATA)
:Pause
:PROGRAM:GRPHINPT
:FnOff
:PlotsOff
:ZStandard
:Input
:Line (0,0,8,8)
:Pause
int(value)
-|
Returns the largest integer value, where value can be a
real number, expression, or list.
For a negative non-integer,
int
returns the integer that is
one less than the integer part of the number. To return
the exact integer part, use
iPart
instead.
int (23.45)
b
23
int (
L
23.45)
b
L
24
posintegerA Int
à
posintegerB
-Œ
Divides two positive integers and displays the
quotient and the remainder,
r
.
9 Int
à
2
b
4r1
iPart(value)
1
NUM
Returns the integer part of a real number, expression,
or each element of a list.
iPart (23.45)
b
23
iPart (
L
17.26
¦
8)
b
L
138
iPart ({1.2,3.4,5.6})
b
{1 3 5}
iPart(1
1
2
)1
:IS>(variable,value)
:command1 (if answer is value)
:command2
8
CTL
Programming command (increment and skip if
greater than); adds variable by 1. If the answer is >
value, then command1 is skipped; if the answer is
value, then command1 is executed. command2 is
always executed.
:PROGRAM:IS
:0
Ü
A
:Lbl S
:Disp A
:IS>(A,5)
:Goto S
:Disp "A IS NOW >5"
:Pause
294
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 294 of 36
¨listname
-v
OPS
List signifier; precedes all user-created names when
displayed outside of the List editor.
{1,2,3}
ܨ
ABC
b
{1 2 3}
¨
ABC
b
{1 2 3}
LabelOff
LabelOn
-g
WINDOW
format settings; turns off or on axes labels.
Lbl
label
8
CTL
Programming command; gives a name (label) to a
particular location in a program. label can be one or
two text characters.
PROGRAM:LBL
:Lbl 99
:Input A
:If A
100
:Stop
:Disp A
:Pause
:Goto 99
lcm(
valueA,valueB
)
1
MATH
Returns the least common multiple (the smallest
number that the two values can divide into evenly) of
two positive whole numbers or lists of positive whole
numbers.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
lcm(10,6)
b
30
Line(
X
,Y ,X ,Y
[,
0
]
)
2
DRAW
Draws a line from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ).
Including the argument,
0
, after the X and Y
coordinates erases a line from (X
,Y ) to (X ,Y ).
Select ZStandard and return to
the Home screen.
Line(0,0,6,9)
b
Return to the Home screen.
Line(2,3,4,6,0)
b
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
295
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 295 of 36
LinReg(ax+b) [XList,YList
,
freq,Y
]
-v
CALC
Fits the linear equation (y=ax+b) to XList and YList
with frequency list, freq, and stores the regression
equation to Y
. XList, YList, and freq (if specified)
must have the same number of elements.
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
Defaults for XList and YList are
L
1
and
L
2
.
Decimal mode set to 2:
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
Ü
L
3
b
Don
e
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
Ü
L
4
b
Don
e
LinReg(ax+b) L
3
,L
4
,Y
b
Select ZStandard.
@List(list)
-v
OPS
Returns a list of the differences between consecutive
elements in a list.
{4.5,4.6,6,7.5}
Ü
L
2
b
{4.5 4.6 6 7.5}
@
List(L
2
)
b
{.1 1.4 1.5}
ln(value)
ln(list)
1
LOG
Returns the natural logarithm of a positive real
number, an expression that results in a positive real
number, or a list of positive real numbers.
ln(2)
b
.6931471806
ln(36.4/3)
b
2.495956486
log(value)
log(list)
1
LOG
Returns the base 10 logarithm of a positive real
number, an expression (that results in a positive real
number), or a list of positive real numbers.
log(2)
b
.3010299957
log(36.4/3)
b
1.083980129
Mansimp
.
Selects the
Mansimp
Simplification mode setting.
Requires user to simplify fractional results manually
using the
B
key.
1
4
+
1
4
b
$
2
4
2
4
4
Simp
b
Fac=2
1
2
296
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 296 of 36
Manual-Fit [Y
]
-v
CALC
Allows you to fit manually a line to plotted data. The
regression equation is stored to Y
, if specified.
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
Ü
L
3
b
Done
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
Ü
L
4
b
Done
Set up Plot1 as a scatter plot
and graph using ZStat:
Return to the Home screen an
d
select Manual-Fit.
max(valueA,valueB)
1
NUM
o r
-v
MATH
Returns the larger of two values or the largest
element in one list. value can be a real number,
expression or a list.
If both values are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one value is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
max(2.3,1.4)
b
2.3
max({1,3,6})
b
6
max({1,10},{2,9})
b
{2 10}
max(
2
3
,
3
4
)
3
4
mean(list[,freq])
-v
MATH
Returns the mean (mathematical average) of list. If a
second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq
must have the same number of elements.
mean({1,2,3,4})
b
2.5
mean({1,2,3,4},{4,5,4,6})
b
2.631578947
Select beginning and ending
points of line by moving the
cursor and then pressing
b
.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
297
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 297 of 36
median(list[,freq])
-v
MATH
Returns the median (the middle element) of list. If a
second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq
must have the same number of elements.
median({1,2,3,4})
b
2.5
median({1,2,6},{4,5,4})
b
2
Med-Med [XList
,
YList
,
freq
,
Y
]
-v
CALC
Fits a median-median model equation,
y=ax+b
, to
XList and YList with frequency list, freq, and stores
the regression equation to Y
. XList, YList, and freq
(if specified) must have the same number of elements.
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
Defaults for XList and YList are
L
1
and
L
2
.
Decimal mode set to 2:
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
Ü
L
3
b
Don
e
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
Ü
L
4
b
Don
e
Med-Med L
3
,L
4
,Y
b
(
6
Menu("title","item1",label1[,"item2"
,
label2])
8
CTL
Programming command; generates a menu of up to
seven items during program execution. When you
select a menu item, the calculator branches to the
label corresponding with that item.
:PROGRAM:FRIENDS
:Menu("FRIENDS","JULIE",A,
"XIAODAN",B,"LETICIA",C,
"ROBERTO",D,"DOUGLAS",E,
"ANSIK",F,"DETER",G)
min(valueA,valueB)
min(list)
1
NUM
o r
-v
MATH
min( (minimum) returns the smaller of two values or
the smallest element in one list. value can be a real
number, expression or a list.
If both values are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one value is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
min(3,
L
5)
b
L
5
min(
L
5.2,
L
5.3)
b
L
5.3
min(5,2+2)
b
4
min(
2
3
,
3
4
)
2
3
ModBoxPlot
See Plot1: Modified Box Plot
298
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 298 of 36
mode(list[,freq])
-v
MATH
Returns the mode (element which occurs most
frequently) of list. If a second list, freq, is specified, it
is interpreted as the frequency of the elements in the
first list. list and freq must have the same number of
elements.
mode({1,2,4,3,1,8})
b
{1}
MultiConst
-†
Selects the
Multiple
mode (affects the
Set Constant
editor). Allows the user to access all defined
constants (as opposed to only one).
items nCr number
1
PRB
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken
r number at a time. The order in which you select the
items DOES NOT matter. items and number can be
non-negative integers or lists.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element in the list, and list of combinations is
returned.
5 nCr 2
b
10
5 nCr {2,4,6,8}
b
{10 5 0 0}
Normal
.
Selects the
Normal
Decimal Notation mode setting;
Displays results with digits to the left and right of the
decimal (as opposed to scientific notation).
123
©
M
2
b
1.23
items nPr number
1
PRB
Returns the number of permutations of n items taken
r number at a time. The order in which you select the
items DOES matter. items and number can be
nonnegative integers or lists.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element in the list, and list of permutations is
returned.
5 nPr 2
b
20
5 nPr {2,4,6,8}
b
{20 120 0 0}
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
299
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 299 of 36
conditionA or conditionB
-t
Logic (boolean) operator; returns
1
if either
conditionA or conditionB is true (non-zero). Returns
0
if both conditionA or conditionB are false (zero).
conditionA and conditionB can be real numbers,
expressions, or lists
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
Test operations are frequently used in programs.
PROGRAM:OR
:1
Ü
A
:2
Ü
B
:A>0 or B<0
Output(row,column,"text")
Output(row,column,value)
8
I/0
Programming command; displays text or value at the
beginning of specified row and column. You must
surround text with quotation marks (
-
t
).
PROGRAM:OUTPUT
:3+5
Ü
B
:ClrScreen
:Output(5,4,"ANSWER")
:Output(5,12,B)
:Pause
Pause [value]
8
CTL
Programming command; suspends program execution
until you press
b
or displays value and suspends
program execution until you press
b
.
PROGRAM:PAUSE
:10
Ü
X
:"X+2"
Ü
Y
:ZStandard
:Pause
PictoPlot
See Plot1: Pictograph
PiePlot
See Plot1: Pie Chart
Plot1(type,argument1,argument2,)
Plot2(type,argument1,argument2,)
Plot3(type,argument1,argument2,)
-e
PLOTS
Selects and defines Statistical Plot 1,2, or 3 (
Plot1,
Plot2, Plot3
), according to one of eight stat plot types.
All types and corresponding arguments are listed
next. Select type from the
-
e
TYPE
menu.
(continued)
300
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 300 of 36
Scatter Plot Ô
xyLine Plot Ó
Plot
n(
Scatter,
Xlist,Ylist[,mark])
Plot
n(
xyLine,
Xlist,Ylist[,mark])
The optional mark (
, +,
or
¦
) specifies the character
used to plot the points. If omitted, default mark is
box. Access mark from 8 - e
MARK
or
- |.
Pictograph Î
Plot
n(
PictoPlot,
CategList,DataList,scale,
orientation,typeIcon)
orientation=
0
(vertical) or
1
(horizontal).
typeIcon choices:
PersonIcon
(Î);
TreeIcon
(Ç);
DollarIcon
(È);
FaceIcon
(É);
PieIcon
(Ï);
DiamondIcon
(Ë);
StarIcon
(Ì). Access typeIcons from
8 - e
MARK
or - |.
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Ü
L
2
b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
PROGRAM:SCATTER
:PlotsOff
:Plot2(Scatter,L
1
,L
2
)
:ZStat
:Trace
Bar Graph Ð
Plot
n
(BarPlot
,CategList, orientation,
DataList1[,DataList2,DataList3]
)
orientation=
0
(vertical) or
1
(horizontal). Specify
between 1 and 4 DataLists.
Pie Chart Ï
Plot
n
(PiePlot
,CategList,DataList,type
)
type=
0
(Number Pie Chart) or
1
(Percent Pie Chart).
Histogram Ò
Box Plot Õ
Modified Box Plot Ö
Plot
n
(Histogram
,Xlist[,freq]
)
Plot
n
(BoxPlot
,Xlist[,freq]
)
Plot
n
(ModBoxPlot
,Xlist[,freq,mark]
)
freq=
1
(default) or a list name. The optional mark
(
;
+
;
¦
) specifies the character used to plot the points.
If omitted, default mark is box. Access mark from
8 - e
MARK
or - |.
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Ü
L
2
b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
PROGRAM:HISTOGRM
:PlotsOff
:Plot1(Histogram,L
1
,L
2
)
:ZStat
:Trace
PlotsOff
[
1
,
2
,
3
]
PlotsOn
[
1
,
2
,
3
]
-e
Turns off (deselects) or on (selects) all stat plots if no
arguments are specified, or turns off or on specified
stat plots using 1, 2, or 3, (for
Plot1
,
Plot2
, or
Plot3
).
PlotsOff 1,3
b
Done
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
301
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 301 of 36
prgmname
8
CTRL
Programming command; calls
prgm
name
as a
subroutine in an existing program.
name
can be a
program not yet created.
PROGRAM:VOLUME
:Input "DIAMETER=",D
:Input "HEIGHT=",H
:prgmAREA
:A
¦
H
Ü
V
:Disp "VOLUME=",V
:Pause
PROGRAM:AREA
:D/2
Ü
R
:
p
¦
R
Ü
A
:Return
Prompt variableA
[
,variableB,
]
8
I/O
Programming command; displays specified
variable
followed by
=?
. During program execution, at each
prompt, the user enters a value or expression for each
variable
, and then presses
b
.
Y
n
functions are
not valid with
Prompt
.
PROGRAM:PROMPT
:Prompt Xmin
:Prompt Xmax
:Prompt Ymin
:Prompt Ymax
The calculator adjusts
WINDOW
variable values according to
users input.
Pt-Change(X
,
Y)
2
POINTS
Changes a points status (on or off) at (
X
,
Y
).
Pt-Change(
L
6,2)
b
Pt-Off(X,Y
[
,mark
]
)
Pt-On(X,Y
[
,mark
]
)
2
POINTS
Erases or draws a point at (
X
,
Y
) using
mark,
(
1
=
¦
;
2
=
;
3
=
+
). If
mark
is omitted, the default
mark
is
box. If you specified
mark
to turn on a point with
Pt-On(
, you must specify the same
mark
when turning
it off.
Pt-Off(3,5,2)
b
Pt-On(3,5,2)
b
Pxl-Change(row
,
column)
2
POINTS
Changes a pixels status (on or off) at (
row
,
column
);
0
row
62, and 0
column
94.
PxlChange(10,75)
b
Pxl-Off(row
,
column)
Pxl-On(row
,
column)
2
POINTS
Erases or draws a pixel at (
row
,
column
); 0
row
62,
and 0
column
94.
Pxl-Off(10,75)
b
Pxl-On(10,75)
b
302
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 302 of 36
pxl-Test(row,column)
2
POINTS
Returns
1
if pixel at (row, column) is on; returns
0
if it
is off; 0row62, and 0column94.
Pxl-On(10,75)
b
Done
pxl-Test(10,75)
b
1
QuadReg [XList,YList
,
freq,Y
]
-v
CALC
Fits the second-degree polynomial (y=ax +bx+c) to
XList and YList with frequency list, freq, and stores
the regression equation to Y
. XList, YList, and freq
(if specified) must have the same number of elements.
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
Defaults for XList and YList are
L
1
and
L
2
.
Decimal mode set to 2:
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
Ü
L
3
b
Done
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
Ü
L
4
b
Done
QuadReg L
3
,L
4
,Y
b
Select ZStandard.
Radian
.
Sets the
Radian
Angle mode setting. Interprets angles
as radians.
In Radian mode:
sin(90)
b
.893996663
6
sin(
pà
2)
b
1
rand
seed
X
rand
1
PRB
Generates a random number between
0
and
1
. By
storing an integer seed value (default=0) to
rand
, you
can control a random number sequence.
0
Ü
rand
b
0
rand
b
.943597402
5
rand
b
.908318861
1
Ü
rand
b
1
rand
b
.745560772
8
rand
b
.8559005971
randInt(lower,upper[,#ofIntegers])
1
PRB
Generates a random integer between lower and upper
(both integers) boundaries. To generate more than
one random integer, specify #ofIntegers, a positive
whole number>0.
(Results may vary.)
randInt(1,10)
b
3
randInt(1,10,3)
b
{3 5 7}
RecallPic number
2
STO
Displays the current graph and superimposes
Pic
number on it. number can be
1 (Pic1), 2 (Pic2),
or
3 (Pic3).
Line(0,0,6,6)
b
StorePic 2
b
Done
RecallPic 2
b
(Pic2 displayed
)
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
303
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 303 of 36
remainder(dividend,divisor)
remainder(list,divisor)
remainder(dividend,list)
remainder(list,list)
1
NUM
Returns the remainder resulting from the division of
two positive whole numbers, dividend and divisor,
each of which can be a list.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
remainder(10,4)
b
2
{5,5,5,5,5}
Ü
L
1
b
{5 5 5 5 5}
{1,2,3,4,5}
Ü
L
2
b
{1 2 3 4 5}
remainder(L
1
,L
2
)
b
{0 1 2 1 0}
:Repeat condition
:block
:End
:command
8
CTL
Programming command; executes block until
condition is true.
PROGRAM:REPEAT
:0
Ü
I:0
Ü
J
:Repeat I
6
: I+1
Ü
I:J+1
Ü
J
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
:End
Return
8
CTL
Programming command; returns to the calling
program.
PROGRAM:AREA
:D/2
Ü
R
:
p
¦
R
Ü
A
:Return
PROGRAM:RETURN
:Input "DIAMETER=",D
:Input "HEIGHT=",H
:prgmAREA
:A
¦
H
Ü
V
:Disp "VOLUME=",V
round(value[,#decimal_places])
1
NUM
Returns a number, expression, or each element in a
list rounded to 10 digits or #decimal_places (
9), if
specified.
In Float mode:
round(
p
,4)
b
3.1416
round(
p
)
b
3.141592654
Scatter
See Plot1: Scatter Plot
Sci
.
Selects the
Sci
Numeric Notation mode setting.
Displays results in scientific notation.
123
b
1.23
©
2
304
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
99APPX-A.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM
Printed: 02/07/01 11:23 AM Page 304 of 36
Select(
XList
,
YList
)
-v
OPS
Selects one or more specific data points from a
Scatter or xyLine stat plot, and updates the lists in
memory as specified by
XList
and
YList
.
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}
Ü
L
3
b
Done
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}
Ü
L
4
b
Done
Select L
5
,L
6
b
Send(
variable
)
‡
8
I/O
Programming command; sends contents of
variable
to the CBL 2/CBL System.
PROGRAM:SEND
:{1,2,3,4,5}
Ü
L
1
:Send(L
1
)
seq(
expression,variable,begin,end
[
,increment
]
)
-v
OPS
Returns a list that fulfills the requirements of the five
arguments, which you specify.
increment
is 1 if not
specified.
seq(X
2
,X,1,8,2)
b
{1 9 25 49}
SetConst(
expression
,
C
n
)
†
-†
–or–
-|
Programming command equivalent of the
Set Constant
editor.
expression
defines the constant to be recalled,
and
C
n
is
1
,
2
,
3
, or
4
(for
C
1
,
C
2
,
C
3
, or
C
4
)
.
PROGRAM:SETCONST
:MultiConst
:SetConst(+2,1)
:SetConst(
N
4,2)
:SetConst(
¦
2+3,3)
:SetConst(+3
¦
2,4)
prgmSETCONST
b
Done
Select bounds by moving
"
and
!
,
and then pressing
b
.
X
values for selected points are stored in
L5
;
Y
values for selected points are stored in
L6
.
All constants are
defined in the
Set
Constant
editor.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
305
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 305 of 36
SetMenu("title","item1",variable1[,"item2"
,
variable2])
8
CTL
Sets up a menu with title (1characters16) and of up
to seven items (1characters10). During program
execution, the user inputs (and edits, as necessary)
numerical values, called variables, to each item.
PROGRAM:SETMENU
:SetMenu("MATHGRADES",
"TEST1",A,"TEST2",B,"TEST3",
C,"TEST4",D,"TEST5",E
SetUpEditor [list1,list2,list3]
-|
Removes all list names from the List editor, and then
sets it up to display lists in the specified order,
starting with column
1
. If no lists are specified, the
calculator sets up
L
1
-
L
6
in order and includes one blank
list to the right of
L
6
.
{1,2,3,4}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 2 3 4}
{5,6,7,8}
Ü
L
2
b
{5 6 7 8}
SetUpEditor L
1
,L
2
b
Don
e
Press
3
to view List editor.
Shade(lower,upper[,left,right,pattern,res])
2
DRAW
Draws both functions, lower and upper, shading
above lower and below upper. You can limit shading
by defining up to four optional arguments. Specify left
and right X boundaries, pattern, which can equal 1-4
(descriptions shown below), and res, which equals
1-8 (1=highest resolution; 8=lowest resolution).
Pattern:
1 = vertical (default)
2 = horizontal
3 = diagonal upper left to lower right
4 = diagonal lower left to upper right
Shade(X
N
2,X
N
8X,
L
5,1,2,3)
b
ClrDrw
b
Don
e
Shade(X
N
8X,X
N
2)
b
4
Simp [simplification_factor]
B
In
Mansimp
Simplification mode,
Simp
simplifies a
fraction by its lowest common factor (default) or by
simplification_factor.
In Mansimp mode:
24
36
4
Simp
b
Fac=2
$
12
18
24
36
4
Simp 12
b
2
3
sin(value)
-u
TRIG
Returns the sine of a real number, expression, or each
element of a list. Results are determined by the Angle
mode setting (
Degree
or
Radian
).
In Degree mode:
sin(30)
b
.5
sin({0,30,90})
b
{0 .5 1}
In Radian mode:
sin(
p
/2)
b
1
sin({0,
p
/2,
p
})
b
{0 1 0}
306
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 306 of 36
sin
L
1
(value)
-u
TRIG
Returns the arcsine of a real number, expression, or
each element of a list. M1value 1. Results are
determined by the Angle mode setting (
Degree
or
Radian
).
In Degree mode:
sin
(1)
b
90
sin
({1,.5,0))
b
{90 30 60}
In Radian mode:
sin
(1)
b
1.570796327
sin
({1,.5,0))
b
{.5235987756 0 1.570796327}
SingleConst
-†
Selects the
Single
mode (affects the
Set
Constant
editor). Allows the user to access only one defined
constant at a time.
SortA(list)
SortA(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2,)
-v
OPS
Sorts list elements from lowest to highest value
(ascending order) and categorical lists alphabetically.
When using dependent lists, dependlist, the calculator
sorts indpndtlist first, and then sorts all dependlists
by placing their elements in the same order as their
corresponding elements in the independent list.
{5,8,
M
4,0,
M
6}
Ü
L
1
b
{5 8
M
4 0
M
6}
SortA (L
1)
b
Done
L
1
b
{
M
6
M
4 0 5 8}
{"E","A","Z"}
Ü
L
2
b
{"E" "A" " Z"}
SortA (L
2)
b
Done
L
2
b
{"A" "E" "Z"}
SortD(list)
SortD(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2,)
-v
OPS
Sorts list elements from highest to lowest value
(descending order) and categorical lists in reverse
alphabetical order.
When using dependent lists, dependlist, the calculator
sorts indpndtlist first, and then sorts all dependlists
by placing their elements in the same order as their
corresponding elements in the independent list.
{5,8,
L
4,0d,
L
6}
Ü
L
1
b
{5 8
L
4 0
L
6}
SortD (L
1)
b
Done
L
1
b
{8 5 0
L
4
L
6}
{"E","A","Z"}
Ü
L
2
b
{"E" "A" " Z"}
SortD(L
2)
b
Done
L
2
b
{"Z" "E" "A"}
stdDev(list[,freq,type])
-v
MATH
Returns the standard deviation of list. If a second list,
freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the frequency of
the elements in the first list. list and freq must have
the same number of elements.
type=
0
(population standard deviation) or
1
(sample
population deviation). If type is not specified, the
calculator returns sample population deviation.
{1,2,8,10,11,21}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 2 8 10 11 21
}
stdDev(L
1
)
b
7.250287351
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
307
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 307 of 36
Stop
8
CTL
Programming command; ends program execution and
returns to Home screen.
PROGRAM:STOP
:Input "T=",T
:If T
20
:Then
:Disp "T
20"
:Pause
:Else
:Stop
StorePic number
2
STO
Stores the current graph display in one of three
picture variables.
number
is
1
,
2
, or
3
(for variable
Pic1
,
Pic2
,
or Pic3
).
Line(0,0,6,6)
b
StorePic 2
b
Done
sum(list
[,start,end])
-v
MATH
Returns the sum of all elements in
list
. Specify the
additional optional arguments to return the sum of the
range of elements between
start
and
end
.
sum({1,2,4,8})
b
15
sum({1,2,4,8},2,4)
b
14
sum({1,2,4,8},3)
b
12
tan(value)
-u
TRIG
Returns the tangent of a real number, expression, or
all elements in a list. Results are determined by the
Angle mode setting (
Degree
or
Radian
).
In Degree mode:
tan(0)
b
0
tan({0,1,30})
b
{0 .0174550649 .5773502692}
In Radian mode:
tan(
p
/4)
b
1
tan({
p
/2,
p
/4,0})
b
{1 0 0}
tan
L
1
(value)
-u
TRIG
Returns the arctangent of a real number, expression,
or each element in a list.
Since tan=sin
à
cos, tan
is undefined when cos=0.
Results are determined by the Angle mode setting
(
Degree
or
Radian
).
In Degree mode:
tan
(1)
b
45
tan
({.5,1,0))
b
{26.56505118 45 0}
In Radian mode:
tan
(.5)
b
.463647609
tan
({.5,1,0))
b
{.463647609 .7853981634 0}
308
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 308 of 36
Text(row
,
column
,
["]text["])
2
DRAW
Draws text (functions, variables, or text instructions)
on the Graph screen when a graph is displayed.
0 row 57, and 0 column 94.
If text is surrounded by quotation marks, the text
characters are displayed. If the quotation marks are
omitted, the TIN73 calculates and displays the result
(up to 10 characters).
Select AxesOff.
Text(15,45,"2+3
¦
4")
b
Return to the Home screen
ClrDraw
b
Don
e
Text(15,45,2+3
¦
4)
b
Then
See If-Then-End
Trace
)
Selects the ) mode when displaying a graph.
PROGRAM:TRACE
:"X
"
Ü
Y
:DispGraph
:Trace
1-Var Stats [XList,freq]
-v
CALC
Analyzes and returns data for one list, XList, with one
measured variable (X). The frequency list, freq, is the
frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList. Default XList is
L
1
.
{1,2,3}
Ü
L
2
b
{1 2 3}
{3,2,1}
ܨ
FREQ
b
{3 2 1}
1-Var Stats L
2,
¨
FREQ
b
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
309
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 309 of 36
2-Var Stats [XList,YList,freq]
-v
CALC
Analyzes and returns data for two lists, XList and
YList, with two measured variables, X, the
independent variable, and Y, the dependent variable.
The frequency list, freq, is the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding data point in
XList and YList. Defaults for XList and YList are
L
1
and
L
2
.
{1,2,3}
Ü
L
2
b
{1 2 3}
{4,5,6}
Ü
L
3
b
{4 5 6}
{2,4,2}
ܨ
FREQ
b
{2 4 2}
2-Var Stats L
2,
L
3,
¨
FREQ
b
Vertical x
2
DRAW
Draws a vertical line on the current graph at X=x. x
can be an expression but not a list.
Vertical 4.5
b
:While condition
:block (while condition is true)
:End
:command
8 CTL
Programming command; tests condition before
commands in loop are executed.
While
block of
commands WHILE condition is true.
PROGRAM:WHILE
:0
Ü
I:0
Ü
J
:While I<6
:I+1
Ü
I:J+1
Ü
J
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
:End
xyLine
See Plot1: xyLine Plot
310
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 310 of 36
ZBox
(
ZOOM
Displays a graph, lets you (interactively) draw a box
that defines a new viewing
WINDOW
, and then updates
the
WINDOW
.
Define Y =Xsin(X).
Set the following WINDOW
values:
Xmin=
M
1000, Ymin=
M
1000,
Xmax=1000, Ymax=1000,
Xscl=90, Yscl=90
Graph Y
.
Select ZBox.
ZDecimal
(
ZOOM
Adjusts the viewing
WINDOW
so that
@
X=0.1
and
@
Y=0.1
, and displays the graph screen with the origin
centered on the screen.
Define Y=X, graph using
ZStandard, and trace the grap
h
Select ZDecimal and trace the
graph.
Move the cursor, and press
b
to select upper left and bottom
right corners of the box.
Selected portion (the box) is
automatically displayed.
X and Y values now
increment by .1.
X and Y values
increment by .212466.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
311
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 311 of 36
ZInteger
(
ZOOM
Lets you select a new center point, and then sets
@
X=1
,
@
Y=1
,
Xscl=10
,
Yscl=10
. Replots the graph
immediately.
Define Y =X, graph using
ZStandard, and trace the grap
h
Select ZInte
g
er
,
choose a new
center
p
oint
,
and trace the
graph.
Zoom In
(
ZOOM
Lets you select a new center point, if desired, and then
magnifies the part of the graph that surrounds the
cursor location.
Define Y =X and graph using
ZStandard.
Select Zoom In. Move the
cursor to the upper right
section of the graph. Press
b
to select a new center
point and magnify the upper
right side of the graphed
function.
Move the cursor, and press
b
to select new center point.
X and Y values now
increment by 1.
312
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 312 of 36
Zoom Out
(
ZOOM
Displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on
the cursor location. Move the cursor keys, and press
b
to select new center point.
Define Y =Xcos(X) and graph
using ZStandard.
Set the following WINDOW
values:
Xmin=
M
1000, Ymin=
M
1000,
Xmax=1000, Ymax=1000,
Xscl=90, Yscl=90
Zoom Out from the origin.
ZoomFit
(
ZOOM
Recalculates
Ymin
and
Ymax
to include the minimum
and maximum y values, between
Xmin
and
Xmax
, of
the selected functions and replots the functions.
Define Y =X
N
20 graph using
using standard WINDOW value
(
(
6).
Adjust the graph with ZoomFit
.
Select
Zoom Out
, and then press
b
(since cursor automatically
starts from the origin).
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
313
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 313 of 36
ZoomStat
(
ZOOM
Redefines the viewing
WINDOW
so that all statistical
data points are displayed.
ZoomStat
also selects an appropriate scale, if one
exists, for a Pictograph plot.
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Ü
L
2
b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
Graph and trace a Scatter stat
plot using L
1
and L
2
(
-
e
)
and ZoomStat.
ZPrevious
(
MEMORY
Replots the graph using the
WINDOW
variable values
of the graph that was displayed before you executed
the last
ZOOM
instruction.
ZQuadrant1
(
ZOOM
Replots the graph using
WINDOW
variable values for
Quadrant I (
Xmin=0
,
Xmax=9.4
,
Xscl=1, Ymin=0
,
Ymax=9.4
,
Yscl=1
).
Define Y =X
using ZStandard (
(
6).
Select ZQuadrant1.
ZSquare
(
ZOOM
Adjusts the
X
or
Y
WINDOW
settings so that each pixel
represents an equal width and height in the
coordinate system and updates the viewing
WINDOW
.
Select ZStandard. Return to th
e
Home screen.
Circle(0,0,7)
b
(
Continued
)
Circle is oval shaped
instead of perfectly round.
314
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 314 of 36
Select ZSquare. Return to the
Home screen.
Circle(0,0,7)
b
ZStandard
(
ZOOM
Replots the functions immediately, setting the
WINDOW
variables to the default values (
Xmin=
M
10
,
Xmax=10
,
Xscl=1
,
Ymin=
M
10
,
Ymax=10
,
Yscl=1
).
Define Y =X
Select ZStandard.
ZTrig
(
ZOOM
Replots the functions immediately, updating the
WINDOW
variables that are often appropriate for
graphing trig functions.
Define Y =sin(X) (
&
).
Select ZTrig.
value!
1
PRB
Returns the factorial of
value
.
value
can be an integer
or list of integers between 0 and 69.
5!
b
120
angle
¡
-u
ANGLE
Designates
angle
as degrees, regardless of the current
Angle mode setting or DMS notation.
In Radian mode:
50¡
b
.872664626
50¡4DM S
b
50¡0'0"
In Degree mode:
50¡
b
50
50¡4DM S
b
50¡0'0"
Or, press
-
£
b
.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
315
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 315 of 36
angle
r
-u
ANGLE
Specifies an angle as radians, regardless of the
current Angle mode setting.
In Radian mode:
50
b
50
50
4
DMS
b
2864
¡
47'20.312"
In Degree mode:
50
b
2864.788976
50
4
DMS
b
2864
¡
47'20.312"
x
x
value
1
MATH
Calculates the x root of value, which is equivalent to
n where n
=value. value can be a real number,
expression, or list.
4
256
b
4
n
3
1
MATH
Calculates the cube of n, which is equivalent to
n
Q
n
Q
n of any real number, expression, or each
element in a list.
2
b
8
3
(value)
1
MATH
Calculates the cube root of value, which is equivalent
to n where n
=value. value can be a real number,
expression, or list.
(8)
b
2
real_number %
C
Changes real_number to percent. Results display
according to the Decimal mode setting.
In Float mode:
M
30.6%
b
M
.306
20 %
¦
30
b
6
conditionA = conditionB (equal)
conditionA conditionB (not equal)
conditionA < conditionB (less than)
conditionA > conditionB (greater than)
conditionA conditionB (less than or equal to)
conditionA conditionA (greater than or equal to)
-t
Relational operators; return
1
if the conditional
statement is true. Return
0
if the conditional
statement is false. conditionA and conditionB can be
real numbers, expressions, or lists.
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
In Degree mode:
sin(30)=cos(60)
b
1
sin(30)
cos(90)
b
1
sin(30)<cos(90)
b
0
sin(30)>cos(90)
b
1
sin(30)
cos(60)
b
1
sin(30)
cos(90)
b
1
316
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 316 of 36
+
¦
See Plot1: xyLine, Scatter, and Modified Box Plot: mark
PersonIcon (Î)
TreeIcon (Ç)
DollarIcon (È)
FaceIcon (É)
PieIcon (Ï)
DiamondIcon (Ë)
StarIcon (Ì)
See Plot1: Pictograph: typeIcons
value-1
-ƒ
Returns the inverse, x
, of value, which is the
equivalent of its reciprocal,
1
/
x
, of a real number,
expression, or each element in a list.
In b/c mode:
2
3
M
1
b
3
2
value2
6
Finds the square of value. value can be a real number,
expression, or list.
{1,2,3}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 2 3}
L
1
b
{1 4 9}
value^power
7
Raises value to any power. value and power can be
real numbers, expressions, or lists. power is limited
by mathematical rules.
4^4
b
256
M
a
Negates a number, expression, or each element in a
list. Note: This is different from the subtraction key
(T).
M
14-68
b
M
82
M
(4
)
b
M
16
(
M
4
)
b
16
M
{1,2,3}
b
{
M
1
M
2
M
3}
10^(x)
10^(list)
1
LOG
Raises 10 to the power of x, where x is an integer or a
list of integers. If x
M
4 and
10
, then the result is
displayed in scientific notation.
10^(4)
b
1000
10^(
M
4)
b
1
©
M
4
10^({1,2,3})
b
{10 100 1000
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
317
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 317 of 36
(value)
-z
Calculates the square root of value, which can be a
positive real number, an expression that results in a
positive real number, or a list of positive numbers.
(16)
b
4
valueA¦valueB
valueAàvalueB
valueA+valueB
valueANvalueB
MF\T
Returns the product (I), quotient (F), sum (\) or
difference (T) of valueA and valueB, which can be
real numbers, expressions, or lists.
If both values are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
{1,4,8}
Ü
L
1
b
{1 4 8}
4
¦
L
1
b
{4 16 32}
{2,4,8}
à
{2,2,2}
b
{1 2 4}
M
456
N
123
b
M
579
In Autosimp mode:
2
3
¦
3
4
b
1
2
In A
§
b/c mode:
4 +
1
2
b
4
1
2
{
-t
Signifies the beginning of a list.
{"A","B","C"}
Ü
L
3
{"A" "B" "C"
}
(
D
Designates a 1st priority calculation or implies
multiplication.
4(3)
b
12
(4+4)6
P
8
b
6
4+4(6
P
8)
b
7
}
-t
Signifies the end of a list.
{"A","B","C"}
Ü
L
3
{"A" "B" "C"
}
)
E
Designates a 1st priority calculation, implies
multiplication, or completes functions and
instructions.
4(3)
b
12
(4+4)6
P
8
b
6
4+4(6
P
8)
b
7
log(10)
b
1
,
¡
Separates list elements when entering them outside of
the List editor, and separates function/programming
command arguments.
{"A","B","C"}
Ü
L
3
{"A" "B" "C"
}
Circle(0,0,7)
b
'
-u
ANGLE
Specifies the minutes in DMS angle notation.
In Radian mode:
50
¡
0'0"
b
.872664626
318
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
73A-ENG.DOC AppxA: Function/Instruction Reference, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 1:10 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:03 AM Page 318 of 36
"
-t
-u
ANGLE
Surrounds categorical list elements and list formulas
that are attached to a list name. Surrounds text
displayed on the Graph display using the
Text(
command (from the Home screen or in a Program).
In a programming command, they surround text to be
displayed with
Disp,
text which designates an
Input
prompt, and functions that are assigned to a
Y
n
variable.
Specifies seconds in DMS angle notation.
{"A","B","C"}
Ü
L
3
b
{"A" "B" "C"}
PROGRAM:TEXT
:AxesOff
:Text(15,45,"TEXT")
:DispGraph
PROGRAM:FUNCTION
:"2X+5"
Ü
Y1
:ZStandard
PROGRAM:INPUT
:Input "NEW LIST=",
¨
NEW
:Disp "
¨
NEW=",
¨
NEW
:Pause
In Radian mode:
50
¡
0'0"
b
.872664626
:
-|
Precedes all programming commands (automatically
displayed by the calculator in the Program editor).
Separates two programming commands listed on one
line or two entries on the Home screen.
PROGRAM:GREETING
:Disp "HI, TERESA":Pause
p
-„
Represents the value for the constant,
p
, in
calculations. The calculator uses
p
=3.1415926535898.
In Float mode:
2
p
b
6.283185307
?
-|
Displays a question mark, which acts like a text
character.
PROGRAM:QUESTION
:Disp "WHAT TIME IS IT?"
:Pause
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 319 of 20
ReferenceReference
InformationInformation
The TIN73 Menu Map......................................................... 320
The VARS Menu - } ............................................... 329
Equation Operating System (EOS é) ................................ 330
In Case of Difficulty............................................................ 331
Correcting an Error ............................................................ 332
Error Messages ................................................................... 332
B
320
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 320 of 20
The
TIN
73
Menu Map
The TIN73 menu map begins at the top-left corner of the
keyboard and follows the keyboard layout from left to right.
Default values and settings are shown.
&
Plot1 Plot2 Plot3
ç
Y1=
ç
Y2=
ç
Y3=
ç
Y4=
- e- e (in Program editor)
Ú
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Â
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
¿
STAT PLOTS
1:Plot1…Off
Ô
L1 L2
2:Plot2…Off
Ô
L1 L2
3:Plot3…Off
Ô
L1 L2
4:PlotsOff
5:PlotsOn
PLOTS
1:Plot1(
2:Plot2(
3:Plot3(
4:PlotsOff
5:PlotsOn
TYPE
1:Scatter
2:xyLine
3:PictoPlot
4:BarPlot
5:PiePlot
6:Histogram
7:BoxPlot
8:ModBoxPlot
MARK
1:
2:+
3:
¦
4:PersonIcon
5:TreeIcon
6:DollarIcon
7:FaceIcon
8:PieIcon
9:DiamondIcon
0:StarIcon
'
WINDOW
Xmin=-10
Xmax=10
@
X=.2127659574…
Xscl=1
Ymin=-10
Ymax=10
Yscl=1
Appendix B: Reference Information
321
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 321 of 20
- f- f (in Program editor)
TABLE SETUP
TblStart=0
@Tbl=1
Indpnt:Auto Ask
Depend:Auto Ask
TABLE SETUP
Indpnt:Auto Ask
Depend:Auto Ask
(
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
ZOOM
1:ZBox
2:Zoom In
3:Zoom Out
4:ZQuadrant1
5:ZSquare
6:ZStandard
7:ZoomStat
8:ZDecimal
9:ZoomFit
0:ZInteger
A:ZTrig
MEMORY
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
1:ZPrevious 2:SetFactors…
ZOOM FACTORS
XFact=4
YFact=4
- g.
CoordOn CoordOff
GridOff GridOn
AxesOn AxesOff
LabelOff LabelOn
ExprOn ExprOff
Normal Sci
Float 0123456789
Degree Radian
A
§
b/c b/c
Autosimp Mansimp
322
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 322 of 20
1
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
MATH
1:lcm(
2:gcd(
3:
3
4:
3
(
5:
x
6:Solver…
NUM
1:abs(
2:round(
3:iPart(
4:fPart(
5:min(
6:max(
7:remainder(
PRB
1:rand
2:randInt(
3:nPr
4:nCr
5:!
6:coin(
7:dice(
LOG
1:log(
2:10^(
3:ln(
4:e^(
2
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
- u
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
DRAW
1:ClrDraw
2:Line(
3:Horizontal
4:Vertical
5:Shade(
6:Circle(
7:Text(
8:Pen
POINTS
1:Pt-On(
2:Pt-Off(
3:Pt-Change(
4:Pxl-On(
5:Pxl-Off(
6:Pxl-Change(
7:pxl-Test(
STO
1:StorePic
2:RecallPic
TRIG
1:sin(
2:sin
1
(
3:cos(
4:cos
1
(
5:tan(
6:tan
1
(
ANGLE
1:¡
2:'
3:"
4:r
5:8DMS
- v
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
Ls
1:L
1
2:L
2
3:L
3
4:L
4
5:L
5
6:L
6
7:
name1
8:
name2
…
OPS
1:SortA(
2:SortD(
3:ClrList
4:dim(
5:
@
List(
6:Select(
7:seq(
8:augment(
9:
¨
MATH
1:min(
2:max(
3:mean(
4:median(
5:mode(
6:stdDev(
7:sum(
CALC
1:1-Var Stats
2:2-Var Stats
3:Manual-Fit
4:Med-Med
5:LinReg(ax+b)
6:QuadReg
7:ExpReg
Appendix B: Reference Information
323
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 323 of 20
8
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
EXEC
1:
name1
2:
name2
…
EDIT
1:
name1
2:
name2
…
NEW
1:Create New
8
(in Program editor)
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
CTL
1:If
2:Then
3:Else
4:For(
5:While
6:Repeat
7:End
8:Pause
9:Lbl
0:Goto
A:IS>(
B:DS<(
C:Menu(
D:SetMenu(
E:prgm
F:Return
G:Stop
H:DelVar
I:GraphStyle(
I/O
1:Input
2:Prompt
3:Disp
4:DispGraph
5:DispTable
6:Output(
7:getKey
8:ClrScreen
9:ClrTable
0:GetCalc(
A:Get(
B:Send(
EXEC
1:
name1
2:
name2
…
324
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 324 of 20
- |
CATALOG
A
§
b/c
4Abàc/dàe
abs(
…
sin(
sin
L
1(
SingleConst
SortA(
…
p
?
9
APPLICATIONS
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
1:Link 2:CBLàCBR
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
SEND
1:All+…
2:AllN…
3:Prgm…
4:List…
5:Pic…
6:Real…
7:Y-Vars…
8:Consts…
9:Vars to TI82…
0:Vars to TI83…
A:Apps…
B.AppVars…
C:SendId
D:Back Up…
RECEIVE
1:Receive
1:GAUGE
2:DATA LOGGER
3:CBR
4:QUIT
Appendix B: Reference Information
325
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 325 of 20
- }
VARS
1:Window…
2:Y-Vars…
3:Statistics…
4:Picture…
5:Table…
6:Factor
- }
1:Window
- }
2:Y-Vars
WINDOW
1:Xmin
2:Xmax
3:Xscl
4:Ymin
5:Ymax
6:Yscl
7:Xres
8:@X
9:@Y
0:XFact
A:YFact
FUNCTION
1:Y
1
2:Y
2
3:Y
3
4:Y
4
5:FnOn
6:FnOff
- }
3:Statistics
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
XY
1:n
2:v
3:Sx
4:sx
5:w
6:Sy
7:sy
8:minX
9:maxX
0:minY
A:maxY
G
1:Gx
2:Gx
2
3:Gy
4:Gy
2
5:Gxy
EQ
1:RegEQ
2:a
3:b
4:c
5:r
6:r
2
7:R
2
PTS
1:x1
2:y1
3:x2
4:y2
5:x3
6:y3
7:Q
1
8:Med
9:Q
3
326
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 326 of 20
- }
4:Picture
- }
5:Table
1:Pic1 (Empty)
2:Pic2 (Empty)
3:Pic3 (Empty)
TABLE
1:TblStart
2:@Tbl
- ‚
CONVERSIONS
1:Length…
2:Area…
3:Volume…
4:Time…
5:Temp…
6:MassàWeight…
7:Speed…
- ‚
1:Length
- ‚
2:Area
- ‚
3:Volume
LENGTH
1:mm
2:cm
3:m
4:inch
5:ft
6:yard
7:km
8:mile
AREA
1:ft
2
2:m
2
3:mi
2
4:km
2
5:acre
6:in
2
7:cm
2
8:yd
2
9:ha
VOLUME
1:liter
2:gal
3:qt
4:pt
5:oz
6:cm
3
7:in
3
8:ft
3
9:m
3
0:galUK
A:ozUK
- ‚
5:Temp
- ‚
6:MassàWeight…
- ‚
7:Speed…
TEMP
1:degC
2:degF
3:degK
MASSàWT.
1:g
2:kg
3:lb
4:ton
5:mton
SPEED
1:ft/s
2:m/s
3:mi/hr
4:km/hr
5:knot
Appendix B: Reference Information
327
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 327 of 20
- † - † (in Program editor)
Set Constant:
Single Multiple
C
1
=
C
2
=
C
3
=
C
4
=
SET CONSTANTS
1:SetConst(
2:SingleConst
3:MultiConst
- Ÿ
MEMORY
1:About
2:Check RAM…
3:Check APPs…
4:Delete…
5:Clear Home
6:ClrAllLists
7:Reset…
- Ÿ
2:Check RAM
- Ÿ
3:Check APPs
MEM FREE 25002
Real 15
List 54
Y-Vars 32
Consts 32
Prgm 15
Pic 0
SPACES FREE 3
CBL
à
CBR 1
328
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 328 of 20
- ‚
4:Delete
DELETE FROM…
1:All…
2:Real…
3:List…
4:Y-Vars…
5:Consts…
6:Prgm…
7:Pic…
8:Apps…
9:AppVars…
- ‚
7:Reset
RESET
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
1:All RAM 2:Defaults
RESET RAM
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
RESET DEFAULTS
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
1:No 2:Reset
Resetting RAM
erases all data
and programs.
1:No 2:Reset
Appendix B: Reference Information
329
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 329 of 20
The VARS Menu -
}
Access system variables through the
VARS
menu (- }).
You can enter the names of functions and system variables in
an expression or store values to them directly. For more
information about storing values to a variable, see Chapter 1:
Operating the TIN73.
All
VARS
menu items, except
6:Factor
, display secondary menus.
For specific information about the individual menu items, see
their respective chapter in this manual. When you select a
variable from a menu, it is inserted at the cursor location.
-}
1:Window
A
ccesses
WINDOW
screen (') variables
(Chapter 9: Function Graphing).
2:Y-Vars
A
ccesses Y= editor (&) variables (Chapter
9: Function Graphing).
3:Statistics
A
ccesses
1-Var
Stats
and
2-Var Stats
(- v
CALC
) variables (Chapter 7:
Statistical Analyses).
4:Picture
A
ccesses picture (2
STO
) variables
(Chapter 10: Draw).
5:Table
A
ccesses
TABLE SETUP
(- f)
v
ariables (Chapter 8: Tables).
6:Factor
Returns the simplification factor of a
fraction after you simplify it using B
(Chapter 3: Fractions).
330
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 330 of 20
Equation Operating System (EOS
é
)
The Equation Operating System (EOS) defines the order in
which functions and expressions are entered and evaluated on
the TIN73. Within a priority level, EOS evaluates functions from
left to right and in the following order.
1 Calculations within parentheses.
2 Single-argument functions that precede the argument,
such as
(
,
sin(
, or
log(
.
Multi-argument functions, such as
min(2,3)
, are
evaluated as they are encountered.
3 Functions that are entered after the argument, such as
!
,
¡
,
r
, and conversions.
4 Powers and roots, such as 2
5
or
5
32.
5 Permutations (
nPr
) and combinations (
nCr
).
6 Multiplication, implied multiplication, and division.
7 Addition and subtraction.
8 Relational functions, such as
>
or
{
.
9 Logic operator
and
.
10 Logic operator
or
.
Appendix B: Reference Information
331
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 331 of 20
In Case of Difficulty
If Suggested Action
You cannot see
anything on the
display.
Press - $ to darken or - # to lighten
the display contrast.
The
LOW BATTERY
message is displayed
on the Home screen.
Replace the batteries as described in
Appendix C: BatteryàService and Warranty
Information.
A checkerboard
cursor (Ø) is
displayed.
Either you have entered the maximum
number of characters in a prompt or
memory is full. If memory is full, press
- Ÿ
4:Delete
, and then delete some
items from memory (See Chapter 13:
Memory Management).
The busy indicator
( © ) is displayed in the
top right corner.
A calculation, graph, or program has been
paused; the TIN73 is waiting for input. Press
b to continue, or press ^ to break.
An error message is
displayed.
Refer to the section in this chapter entitled
Error Messages. Press b to clear.
The TIN73 does not
appear to be working
properly.
Press - l as many times as needed to
exit any menu and to return to the Home
screen.
 or 
Be sure that the batteries are installed
properly and that they are fresh.
The difficulty
persists.
Refer to Appendix C: BatteryàService and
Warranty Information for information on
how to contact Customer Support to
discuss the problem or to obtain service.
332
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 332 of 20
Correcting an Error
When the TIN73 detects an error, it returns an error message as
a menu title, such as
ERR:SYNTAX
or
ERR:DIM MISMATCH
.
To correct an error, follow these steps:
1. Note the error type (
ERR
:error type).
2. Select
2:Goto
, if it is available. The previous screen is
displayed with the cursor at or near the error location.
3. If you select
1:Quit
(or press - l or :), the
Home screen is displayed.
4. Determine the cause of the error. If you cannot recognize
the error, use the Error Messages table below which
describes error messages in detail.
5. Correct the expression.
If a syntax error occurs in the contents of a
Y
n
function
during program execution, selecting
2:Goto
returns you to
the Y= editor, not to the program.
Error Messages
When the TIN73 detects an error, it displays
ERR
:
TYPE
and an
error menu. This table contains each error type, possible
causes, and suggestions for correction.
The TIN73 detects errors while performing the following tasks:
• Evaluating an expression
• Executing an instruction
• Plotting a graph or stat plot
• Storing a value
Appendix B: Reference Information
333
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 333 of 20
Error Type Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
ARGUMENT
A function or instruction does not have the correct
number of arguments. See Appendix A and the
appropriate chapter.
BAD GUESS
You specified a guess in the Equation Solver that is
not between the lower and upper bounds.
Your guess and several points around it are
undefined.
Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has
a solution, change the bounds and/or initial guess.
BOUND
With
Select(
, you defined Left Bound>Right Bound.
In the Equation Solver, you entered lowerupper.
BREAK
You pressed the ^ key to break execution of a
program, to halt a
DRAW
instruction, or to stop
evaluation of an expression.
DATA TYPE
You entered a value or variable that is the wrong
data type.
• For a function (including implied
multiplication) or an instruction, you entered
an argument that is an invalid data type, such
as a real number where a list is required.
• In an editor, you entered a type that is not
allowed.
• You attempted to store to an incorrect data
type, such as a real number to a list.
DIM MISMATCH
You attempted to perform an operation that
references more than one list, but the lists do not
have the same dimension (number of elements).
334
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 334 of 20
Error Type Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
DIVIDE BY 0
You attempted to divide by 0. This error is not
returned during graphing. The TIN73 allows for
undefined values on a graph.
You attempted a linear regression with a vertical
line.
DOMAIN
You specified an argument to a function or
instruction outside the valid range, such as using a
negative frequency in box plots. This error is not
returned during graphing because the TIN73 allows
for undefined values on a graph. See Chapter 6:
Statistical Plots or Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
In a Pictograph, an element in
Data List
is too large
so that the maximum scale (99999) cant make all
icons fit in one screen.
You attempted an exponential regression with a
MY.
Duplicate Name
A variable you attempted to transmit cannot be
transmitted because a variable with that name
already exists in the receiving unit.
Error in Xmit
The TIN73 was unable to transmit an item. Check to
see that the cable is firmly connected to both units
and that the receiving unit is in receive mode.
You pressed ^ to break during transmission.
You attempted to perform a backup from a TI-83 to a
TIN73.
You attempted to transfer data (other than
L1
-
L6
)
from a TIN73 to a TI-83 without using the
Lists to TI83
command.
You attempted to use
Get(
with another calculator.
Appendix B: Reference Information
335
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 335 of 20
Error Type Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
ILLEGAL NEST
You attempted to use an invalid function in an
argument to a function, such as
seq(
within
expression for
seq(
.
Can occur when combinations of nesting of function
evaluation exceeds five levels.
INCREMENT
The increment in
seq(
is 0 or has the wrong sign. This
error is not returned during graphing. The TIN73
allows for undefined values on a graph.
The increment in a
For(
loop is 0.
INVALID
You attempted to reference a variable or use a
function where it is not valid. For example,
Yn
cannot reference
Y
,
Xmin
, @X, or
TblStart
.
Defining and graphing a
Yn
equation using the
variable
Ans
.
You attempted to use
Select(
without having selected
(turned on) at least one xyLine or Scatter plot.
INVALID DIM
You specified dimensions for an argument that are
not appropriate for the operation.
You specified a list dimension as something other
than an integer between 1 and 999.
ITERATIONS
The Equation Solver has exceeded the maximum
number of permitted iterations.
Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has
a solution, change the bounds, the initial guess, or
both.
LABEL
The label in the
Goto
instruction is not defined with a
Lbl
instruction in the program.
336
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 336 of 20
Error Type Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
MEMORY
Memory is insufficient to perform the instruction or
function. You must delete items from memory
(Chapter 13: Memory Management) before executing
the instruction or function.
Recursive problems return this error; for example,
graphing the equation
Y1=Y1
.
Branching out of an
If/Then
,
For(
,
While
, or
Repeat
loop with a
Goto
also can return this error because
the
End
statement that terminates the loop is never
reached.
MemoryFull
You are unable to transmit an item because the
receiving units available memory is insufficient. You
may skip the item or exit receive mode.
During a memory backup, the receiving units
available memory is insufficient to receive all items
in the sending units memory. A message indicates
the number of bytes that the sending unit must
delete to do the memory backup. Delete items and
try again.
MODE
You attempt to simplify a fraction with B while in
Autosimp
Simplification mode.
NO SIGN
CHANGE
The Equation Solver did not detect a sign change.
OVERFLOW
You attempted to enter, or you have calculated, a
number that is beyond the range of the calculator.
This error is not returned during graphing. The TIN73
allows for undefined values on a graph.
RESERVED
You attempted to use a system variable
inappropriately. See Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73.
SCALE
The Pictograph scale is invalid. Scale must be an
integer between 1 and 99,999.
Appendix B: Reference Information
337
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 337 of 20
Error Type Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
SINGULARITY
expression in the Equation Solver contains a
singularity (a point at which the function is not
defined). Examine a graph of the function. If the
equation has a solution, change the bounds or the
initial guess or both.
STAT
You attempted a stat calculation with lists that are
not appropriate.
• Statistical analyses must have at least two data
points.
•
Med-Med
must have at least three data points in
each partition.
• When you use a frequency list, its elements
must be 0.
• (
Xmax-Xmin
)/
Xscl
must be 47 for a Histogram.
STAT PLOT
You attempted to display a graph when a stat plot
that uses an undefined list is turned on.
SYNTAX
The command contains a syntax error. Look for
misplaced functions, arguments, parentheses, or
commas. See the appropriate chapter.
UNDEFINED
You referenced a variable that is not currently
defined. For example, you referenced a stat variable
when there is no current calculation because a list
has been edited, or you referenced a variable when
the variable is not valid for the current calculation,
such as
c
after
Med-Med
.
VALIDATION
Electrical interference caused a link to fail or this
calculator is not authorized to run the application.
338
Appendix B: Reference Information
73B-ENG.DOC Appx B Reference Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/14/98 3:58 PM Printed:
05/19/99 9:04 AM Page 338 of 20
Error Type Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
WINDOW
RANGE
A problem exists with the
WINDOW
variables.
• You defined
XmaxXmin
or
YmaxYmin
.
•
WINDOW
variables are too small or too large to
graph correctly. You may have attempted to
zoom in or zoom out to a point that exceeds the
TIN73s numerical range.
ZOOM
A point or a line, instead of a box, is defined in
ZBox
.
A
ZOOM
operation returned a math error.
99APPX-C.DOC Appx C:Battery/Service and Warranty Information, English Bob Fedorisko Revised: 06/10/03 8:09
AM Printed: 06/10/03 8:51 AM Page 339 of 6
B
BB
Ba
aa
at
tt
tt
tt
te
ee
er
rr
ry
yy
yà
S
SS
Se
ee
er
rr
rv
vv
vi
ii
ic
cc
ce
ee
e a
aa
an
nn
nd
dd
d
W
WW
Wa
aa
ar
rr
rr
rr
ra
aa
an
nn
nt
tt
ty
yy
y
I
II
In
nn
nf
ff
fo
oo
or
rr
rm
mm
ma
aa
at
tt
ti
ii
io
oo
on
nn
n
Battery Information.........................................................339
When to Replace Batteries........................................339
Effects of Replacing the Batteries.............................340
Replacing the Batteries .............................................341
Battery Precautions ...................................................341
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and Service ....................342
Australia & New Zealand Customers only.......................343
All Other Customers ........................................................344
B
BB
Ba
aa
at
tt
tt
tt
te
ee
er
rr
ry
yy
y I
II
In
nn
nf
ff
fo
oo
or
rr
rm
mm
ma
aa
at
tt
ti
ii
io
oo
on
nn
n
The TIN73 uses four AAA alkaline batteries and has a user-
replaceable backup lithium battery (CR1616 or CR1620).
W
WW
Wh
hh
he
ee
en
nn
n t
tt
to
oo
o R
RR
Re
ee
ep
pp
pl
ll
la
aa
ac
cc
ce
ee
e B
BB
Ba
aa
at
tt
tt
tt
te
ee
er
rr
ri
ii
ie
ee
es
ss
s
When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level, the
TIN73 displays the following message when you turn on the
unit.
C
CC
C
340
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
99APPX-C.DOC Appx C:Battery/Service and Warranty Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/27/01 4:35
PM Printed: 02/28/01 11:29 AM Page 340 of 6
Battery Information
The TI
N
73 uses four AAA alkaline batteries and has a user-
replaceable backup lithium battery (CR1616 or CR1620).
When to Replace Batteries
When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level, the
TI
N
73 displays the following message when you turn on the
unit.
Generally, the calculator continues to operate for one week
after the low-battery message is first displayed. After this
period, the TI
N
73 will turn off automatically and the unit will
not operate. Batteries must be replaced. All memory is
retained.
Note
: The operating period following the first low-battery
message could be longer if you use the calculator infrequently
or shorter if you use the calculator frequently.
Replace the lithium battery every three to four years.
The calculator does not let you install new software or
application programming if the batteries are too low.
Effects of Replacing the Batteries
Do not
remove both types of batteries (AAA and lithium
auxiliary) at the same time. Do not allow the batteries to lose
power completely. If you follow these guidelines and the steps
for replacing batteries on the next page, then you can replace
either type of battery without losing any information in
memory.
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
341
99APPX-C.DOC Appx C:Battery/Service and Warranty Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/27/01 4:35
PM Printed: 02/28/01 11:29 AM Page 341 of 6
Replacing the Batteries
1. Turn off the calculator. Replace the slide cover over the
keyboard to avoid inadvertently turning on the calculator.
Turn the back of the calculator toward you.
2. Hold the calculator upright, push downward on the latch
on the top of the battery cover with your finger, and then
pull the cover toward you.
Note:
To avoid loss of information stored in memory, you
must turn off the calculator. Do not remove the AAA
batteries and the lithium battery simultaneously.
3. Replace all four AAA alkaline batteries simultaneously.
Or, replace the lithium battery.
•
To replace the AAA alkaline batteries, remove all
four discharged AAA batteries and install new ones
according to the polarity (+ and -) diagram in the
battery compartment.
•
To replace the lithium battery, remove the screw
from the lithium-battery cover, and then remove the
cover. Install the new battery, + side up. Replace the
cover and secure it with the screw. Use a CR1616 or
CR1620 (or equivalent) lithium battery.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover. Turn the
calculator on and adjust the display contrast (
-
$
or
-
#
), as necessary.
Battery Precautions
Take these precautions when replacing batteries:
•
Do not mix new and used batteries. Do not mix brands or
type within brands of batteries.
•
Do not mix rechargeable and non-rechargeable batteries.
•
Install batteries according to polarity (+ and -) diagrams.
•
Do not place non-rechargeable batteries in a battery
recharger.
•
Do not incinerate batteries.
342 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
99APPX-C.DOC Appx C:Battery/Service and Warranty Information, English Bob Fedorisko Revised: 06/10/03 8:09
AM Printed: 06/10/03 8:51 AM Page 342 of 6
T
TT
Te
ee
ex
xx
xa
aa
as
ss
s I
II
In
nn
ns
ss
st
tt
tr
rr
ru
uu
um
mm
me
ee
en
nn
nt
tt
ts
ss
s (
((
(T
TT
TI
II
I)
))
) S
SS
Su
uu
up
pp
pp
pp
po
oo
or
rr
rt
tt
t a
aa
an
nn
nd
dd
d
S
SS
Se
ee
er
rr
rv
vv
vi
ii
ic
cc
ce
ee
e
F
FF
Fo
oo
or
rr
r G
GG
Ge
ee
en
nn
ne
ee
er
rr
ra
aa
al
ll
l I
II
In
nn
nf
ff
fo
oo
or
rr
rm
mm
ma
aa
at
tt
ti
ii
io
oo
on
nn
n
Home Page: education.ti.com
KnowledgeBase and
E-mail Inquiries: education.ti.com/support
Phone: 1.800.TI.CARES (1.800.842. 2737)
For U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto
Rico, and Virgin Islands only
International
Information: education.ti.com/support
(Click the International
Information link.)
F
FF
Fo
oo
or
rr
r T
TT
Te
ee
ec
cc
ch
hh
hn
nn
ni
ii
ic
cc
ca
aa
al
ll
l S
SS
Su
uu
up
pp
pp
pp
po
oo
or
rr
rt
tt
t
KnowledgeBase and
Support by E-mail: education.ti.com/support
Phone (not toll-free): 1.972.917.8324
F
FF
Fo
oo
or
rr
r P
PP
Pr
rr
ro
oo
od
dd
du
uu
uc
cc
ct
tt
t (
((
(h
hh
ha
aa
ar
rr
rd
dd
dw
ww
wa
aa
ar
rr
re
ee
e)
))
) S
SS
Se
ee
er
rr
rv
vv
vi
ii
ic
cc
ce
ee
e
Customers in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto Rico
and Virgin Islands: Always contact TI Customer Support
before returning a product for service.
All other customers: Refer to the leaflet enclosed with this
product (hardware) or contact your local TI
retailer/distributor.
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
343
99APPX-C.DOC Appx C:Battery/Service and Warranty Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/27/01 4:35
PM Printed: 02/28/01 11:29 AM Page 343 of 6
Customers in the U.S. and Canada Only
One-Year Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic
Product
This Texas Instruments electronic product warranty extends only to the
original purchaser and user of the product.
Warranty Duration. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted
to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from the original
purchase date.
Warranty Coverage. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted
against defective materials and construction.
THIS WARRANTY IS VOID IF
THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN DAMAGED BY ACCIDENT OR
UNREASONABLE USE, NEGLECT, IMPROPER SERVICE, OR OTHER
CAUSES NOT ARISING OUT OF DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR
CONSTRUCTION.
Warranty Disclaimers.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARISING OUT OF
THIS SALE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE ABOVE
ONE-YEAR PERIOD. TEXAS INSTRUMENTS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL COSTS, EXPENSES, OR DAMAGES INCURRED BY
THE CONSUMER OR ANY OTHER USER.
Some states/provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied
warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions
may not apply to you.
Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.
Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty period,
your defective product will be either repaired or replaced with a
reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI’s option) when the product
is returned, postage prepaid, to Texas Instruments Service Facility. The
warranty of the repaired or replacement unit will continue for the warranty of
the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer. Other than the postage
requirement, no charge will be made for such repair and/or replacement. TI
strongly recommends that you insure the product for value prior to mailing.
Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not warrant
that the software will be free from errors or meet your specific requirements.
All software is provided “AS IS.”
Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this product
are protected by copyright.
344
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
99APPX-C.DOC Appx C:Battery/Service and Warranty Information, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 02/27/01 4:35
PM Printed: 02/28/01 11:29 AM Page 344 of 6
Australia & New Zealand Customers only
One-Year Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic
Product
This Texas Instruments electronic product warranty extends only to
the original purchaser and user of the product.
Warranty Duration. This Texas Instruments electronic product is
warranted to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from
the original purchase date.
Warranty Coverage. This Texas Instruments electronic product is
warranted against defective materials and construction. This
warranty is void if the product has been damaged by accident or
unreasonable use, neglect, improper service, or other causes not
arising out of defects in materials or construction.
Warranty Disclaimers. Any implied warranties arising out of
this sale, including but not limited to the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are
limited in duration to the above one-year period. Texas
Instruments shall not be liable for loss of use of the product
or other incidental or consequential costs, expenses, or
damages incurred by the consumer or any other user.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied
warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or
exclusions may not apply to you.
Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and
you may also have other rights that vary from jurisdiction to
jurisdiction.
Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty
period, your defective product will be either repaired or replaced
with a new or reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI’s
option) when the product is returned to the original point of
purchase. The repaired or replacement unit will continue for the
warranty of the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer.
Other than your cost to return the product, no charge will be made
for such repair and/or replacement. TI strongly recommends that you
insure the product for value if you mail it.
Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not
warrant that the software will be free from errors or meet your
specific requirements. All software is provided “AS IS.”
Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this
product are protected by copyright.
All Customers outside the U.S. and Canada
For information about the length and terms of the warranty, refer to your
package and/or to the warranty statement enclosed with this product, or
contact your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor.
345
Index
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
345 of 12
IndexIndex
! (factorial), 52
" (seconds), 216
¡ (degrees), 216
¨
(list signifier), 101
(relational operator), 32
x (statistical result variable),
136
@List(, 97
#SAMPLES
DATA LOGGER, 270
@Tbl
definition, 153
storing to, 161
@X, 171, 179
Gx, 136
Gx
2
, 136
Gxy, 136
Gy, 136
Gy
2
, 136
' (minutes), 216
< (relational operator), 32
= (relational operator), 32
> (relational operator), 32
0123456789 Decimal Notation
mode, 24
1 2 3 (Bar graph), 113, 118
10^( (10 to the power of), 55
1-Var Stats, 134
results, 136
2-Var Stats, 134
results, 136
3
( (cube), 37
–A–
a (slope), 140, 142
A
§
b/c Display Format mode, 60
About (Memory Menu), 276
abs( (absolute value), 44
addition, 27
All- (SEND), 256
All+ (SEND), 256
analyses, statistical, 128, 133
and (Boolean operator), 33
ANGLE (
-
u
) menu, 215
Angle mode
trig functions, 211
–A–
(continued)
angle units, 215
angles
converting to DMS, 220
in DMS notation, 218
Ans (Last Answer), 18
continuing expressions, 18
variable, as a, 19
APD (Automatic Power Down),
3
applications
memory, 277
APPLICATIONS (
9
)
menu, 263
Apps, 279
Apps (SEND), 256
AppVars, 279
AppVars (SEND), 256
arccosine, 211
arcsine, 211
arctangent, 211
Area (units), 68
argument, 12
augment(, 100
Autosimp mode setting, 61
average (mean), 130
Axesoff, 172
stat plots, 114
AxesOn, 172
–B–
b (y-intercept), 140, 142
b/c Display Format mode, 60
Back Up (memory), 261, 263
Back Up (SEND), 256
Bar (GAUGE), 267
Bar graph, 118
base 10 logarithm, 54
batteries, installing, 3
Boolean operators, 32
bound, 41
branching
DS>(, 235
IS>(, 235
LblàGoto, 234
346
Index
99INDEX.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 02/07/01 11:25 AM Page
346 of 12
–C–
cable, unit-to-unit.
See
unit-to-
unit cable
CALC (
-
v
) menu, 133
CATALOG, 14
CategList, 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Pie chart, 120
categorical lists, 81
signifier, c, 85
CBL 2/CBL, 247, 254
CBL/CBR App
steps for running, 264
CBR, 247, 254
CBR (data collection method),
266
characters, editing, 11
Check APPs, 277
Check RAM, 277
Circle(
from Graph screen, 195
from Home screen, 196
circumference, 195
Clear Home, 279
ClrAllLists, 90, 280
ClrDraw, 189
ClrList, 95
ClrScreen, 247
ClrTable, 247
coefficient of determination
(r
2
), 136
ExpReg, 146
LinReg (ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
coin(, 53
colon (:), 16
column
pixel, 205, 206
table, 152
Text(, 198
combinations (nCr), 51
commands, programming.
See
programming commands
Constant Memory, 3
constants, 71
counter, 73
defining, 72, 75
Multiple mode, 75
recalling, 73, 75
–C–
(continued)
constants (continued)
Single mode, 72
Consts (SEND), 256
contrast, display, 4
CONVERSIONS
(
-
‚
) menu, 68
converting
degrees/radians (DMS), 217
fractions, 64, 65
units, 70
coordinate pair
function graphing, 165
table, 150
CoordOff, 172
CoordOn, 172
copying
lists, 103
programs, 249
correlation coefficient (r), 136
ExpReg, 146
LinReg(ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
cos( (cosine), 210
counter, constant, 73
Create New (program), 224
CTL (
8
) Menu, 227
cube, 37
cube root, 38
cursors, display
Entry, 10
Full, 10
Insert, 10
Second, 10
–D–
data collection
starting, 273
stopping, 274
data collection methods, 265,
266
Data List, 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Pie chart, 120
DATA LOGGER, 266
options, 270
Decimal Notation mode, 24
decimals
converting to fractions, 64
Index
347
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
347 of 12
–D–
(continued)
defaults, resetting, 282
degrees
DMS, 216
trig, 211
Delete (Memory Menu), 278
DelVar, 240
denominator, 58
Depend (tables)
Ask, 156
Auto, 155, 156, 157
definition, 153
DependAsk, 161
DependAuto, 161
dependent list formula, 83
deleting, 91
dependent numerical lists, 83
dependent variable (Y), 150
DiagnosticOff
ExpReg, 146
LinReg(ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
DiagnosticOn
ExpReg, 146
LinReg(ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
dice(, 53
difference (subtraction), 27
difficulties, correcting, 331
dim( (dimension), 95
DIRECTNS
DATA LOGGER, 271
GAUGE, 268
Disp, 244
DispGraph, 245
display contrast, 4
Display Format mode, 60
DispTable, 245
dividend
remainder(, 48
division, 27
integer, 28
divisor
remainder(, 48, 50
DMS, 220
converting to, 220
notation, 218
drawing
circles, 195
horizontal lines, 191
–D–
(continued)
drawing (continued)
irregular shapes (Pen), 199
line segments, 189
pixels, 205
points, 202
shading, 193
text, 197
vertical lines, 191
DS<((Decrement and Skip),
235
DuplicateName menu, 259
–E–
e (natural log), 55
e^( (e to the power of), 56
edit keys, 11
EDIT (
8
) menu, 225, 248
editing
characters, 11
functions, 168
lists, 87
programs, 225
table elements, 159
elements, list, 81
categorical, 81
clearing, 90, 95
deleting, 89
dimension, returning, 95
displaying, 103
editing, 89
fractional, 82
inserting, 89, 104
numerical, 81
text, 81, 85
elements, table
editing, 159
End, 233
DATA LOGGER, 271
For, 231
IfThen, 229
IfThenElse, 230
Repeat, 232
While, 232
entries, Home screen, 5
Clear Home, 279
Entry (Last Entry), 17
multiple expressions, 16
348
Index
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
348 of 12
–E–
(continued)
Entry line
lists, 79
tables, 154, 160
Text editor, 8
Equation Operating System
(EOS), 15, 330
Equation Solver, 38
bound, 41
Solve, 41
error messages, 332
transmission, 260
errors, correcting, 332
EXEC (
8
) Menu
calling a subroutine, 250
executing a program, 251
ExpReg (exponential
regression), 146
expressions, 15
multiple on one line, 16
ExprOff, 172
ExprOn, 172
–F–
Factor, simplification, 63
recalling, 64
factorial (!), 52
Float Decimal Notation mode,
24
For(, 231
format, window, 171
formula, dependent list, 83
attaching, 83
deleting, 91
fPart (fractional part), 46
fractions
converting mixed to simple,
65
converting to decimals, 64
Display Format mode, 60
entering, 58
factor, simplification, 63
recalling, 64
list elements, as, 82
mixed numbers, 58
negating, 59
results in calculations, 59
simple, 58
simplification factor, 62
–F–
(continued)
fractions (continued)
Simplification mode, 60
simplification signifier ($), 62
simplifying automatically, 61
simplifying manually, 62
whole number, 58
F-RAM (Flash RAM), 261
Freq (frequency list), 113. See
frequency lists
frequency lists
Histogram, 121
stat plots, 113
with regressions, 133, 137
function graphing, 165
displaying, 177
free-moving cursor, 178
graph styles, 169
steps for, 164
tracing, 178
window format, 171
WINDOW values, 171, 173
zooming, 181
function graphs
drawing on, 188
functions
defining, 167
definition of, 12
editing, 168
entering, 167
primary, 6
secondary (2nd), 7
selecting, 168
–G–
GAUGE, 266
comments, 268
options, 267
gcd( (greatest common
divisor), 36
Get(, 247
GetCalc(, 247
getKey, 246
Goto, 234
Graph Explorer Software, 262
graph styles, 169
graphing
trig functions, 214
Index
349
99Index.doc TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 01/17/02 11:00 AM Printed: 01/17/02 11:18 AM Page
349 of 12
–G–
(continued)
graphing, function.
See
function
graphing
GraphStyle(, 240
greatest common divisor
(GCD), 36
GridOff, 172
GridOn, 172
–H–
Histogram, 121
Home screen, 5
Hor (stat plot option), 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Horizontal (draw)
from Graph screen, 191
from Home screen, 192
–I–
I
à
O (
8
) Menu, 241
icons
graphstyle, 169
pictograph, 113, 117
Type (stat plots), 111
ID number, 262
IDList, 279
If, 229
If–Then, 229
If–Then–Else, 230
independent numerical lists, 83
independent variable (X), 150,
167
Indpnt (tables)
Ask, 157
Auto, 155, 156, 157
definition, 153
IndpntAsk, 161
IndpntAuto, 161
Input, 242
instructions, 12
integer division, 28
integer part (iPart), 46
interquartile range, 124
INTRVL (SEC)
DATA LOGGER, 271
inverse function, 29
inverse trig functions, 211
iPart (integer part), 46
–I–
(continued)
IS>((Increment and Skip), 235
–L–
L1-L6, 79, 80
LabelOff, 172
LabelOn, 172
Last Entry (Entry), 17
latitude (DMS), 218
Lbl (Label), 234
lcm( (least common multiple),
35
¨
DCMT, 269
¨
DIST
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
least common multiple (LCM),
35
Length (units), 68
letter keys, 8
Light probe, 265
Line(
from Graph screen, 189
from Home screen, 190
linear equation, 138
link
TI Connect, 255
TI-GRAPH LINK, 255
to a calculator, 254
to CBL
à
CBR, 255
LINK SEND menu, 254
LinReg(ax+b), 142
List (IDList), 279
List (SEND), 256
list braces { }, 8
List editor, 79
clearing elements, 90
deleting elements, 89
deleting lists, 87
editing elements, 89
inserting elements, 89
inserting lists, 87
list signifier (
¨
), 91, 101
list, elements.
See
elements, list
lists
¨
(list signifier), 91, 101
braces, 102
clearing elements, 90
ClrAllLists, 280
combining two, 100
copying, 103
350
Index
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
350 of 12
–L–
(continued)
lists (continued)
creating, 102
deleting elements, 89
deleting from memory, 88
dependent numerical, 83
editing elements, 89
entering elements, 81
formula, deleting, 91
formula, dependent list, 83
frequency. See frequency
lists
independent numerical, 83
inserting elements, 89
L1-L6, 79, 80
¨
DCMT, 269
¨
DIST, 269, 272
List editor, 79
list name notation, 80
¨
LCMT, 269
¨
LIGHT, 269, 272
¨
TCMT, 269
¨
TEMP, 269, 272
¨
VCMT, 269
¨
VOLT, 269, 272
math functions, with, 105
names, accessing, 91
naming, 79
notation, 79
numerical elements, 81
sorting, 93
stat plot data, 109
steps for creating, 78
text elements, 81, 85
transferring (LINK), 254
Xlist, 114, 124
Ylist, 114
¨
LCMT, 269
¨
LIGHT
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
ln( (natural log), 55
LOG (
1
) Menu, 54
log( (base 10 logarithm), 54
logic (Boolean) operators, 32
longitude (DMS), 218
¨
TCMT, 269
¨
TEMP
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
–L–
(continued)
¨
VCMT, 269
¨
VOLT
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
–M–
Mansimp mode setting, 62
Manual-Fit, 138
Mark, 112
Modified Box plot, 124
Scatter plot, 114
MassàWeight (units), 69
MATH (
-
v
) menu, 34
Statistics, 128
math operations, basic, 27
matrix, 279
MAX (GAUGE), 268
max(
-
v
MATH Menu, 128
1
NUM Menu, 47
maxX, 136
maxY, 136
mean(, 130
Med (median), 137
median(, 130
Med-Med (median-median),
140
MEM FREE Screen, 277
memory
resetting all, 4
Memory Full menu, 259
MEMORY Menu, 276
memory, RAM. See RAM
memory
MEMORYBACKUP menu, 261
Menu Map, 320
Menu(, 236
menus
displaying, 12
exiting, 13
scrolling items, 13
secondary, 13
Meter (GAUGE), 267
MIN (GAUGE), 268
min(
-
v
MATH Menu, 128
1
NUM Menu, 47
Index
351
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
351 of 12
–M–
(continued)
minutes
conversions, 69
DMS, 218
minX, 136
minY, 136
mixed numbers, 58
converting to fractions, 65
mode settings
0123456789, 24
A
§
b/c, 60
Autosimp, 61
b/c, 60
definition, 22
Degree, 211
Float, 24
list element display, 81
Mansimp, 62
Multiple (constants), 75
Normal, 23
Radian, 211
Sci, 23
Single (constants), 72
table element display, 154
mode(, 130
Modified Box plot, 124
Multiple mode (constants), 75
multiplication, 27
–N–
n (number of data points), 136
naming
lists, 79
programs, 224
natural log (ln), 55
nCr (combinations), 51
negative numbers, 6
NEW (
8
) Menu, 224
Normal mode setting, 23
nPr (permutations), 51
NUM (
1
) Menu, 44
Number (Pie chart), 113, 120
numbers
entering, 6
negative, 6
numerator, 58
Numeric Notation mode, 23
numerical lists, 81
dependent, 83
independent, 83
–O–
off/on, 3
Omit (LINK), 259
on/off, 3
OPS (
-
v
) menu, 92, 95
or (Boolean operator), 33
outliers (Modified Box plot),
124
Output(, 245
Overwrite (LINK), 259
–P–
parentheses
implied multiplication, 16
in expressions, 16
Pause, 233
Pen command, 199
percent, 29
Percent (Pie chart), 113, 120
permutations (nCr), 51
pi, 28
Pic (SEND), 256
Pic1, 2, 3
deleting, 208
recalling, 208
storing to, 207
Pictograph, 117
Pie chart, 120
pixel, 205
PLOT
DATA LOGGER, 271
Plot1, 2, and 3, 109
PlotsOff/On, 110
POINTS (
2
) menu, 201
population standard deviation,
131
power (^), 31
PRB (
1
) Menu, 49
prgm (command), 238
Prgm (SEND), 256
primary function, 6
Probe-Time Graph, 270
product (multiplication), 27
Program editor, 225
exiting, 227
with
8
CTL Menu, 227
programming commands
ClrScreen, 247
ClrTable, 247
deleting, 249
352
Index
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
352 of 12
–P–
(continued)
Programming Commands
(continued)
DelVar, 240
Disp, 244
DispGraph, 245
DispTable, 245
DS>(, 235
editing, 248
End, 233
entering, 226
For(, 231
Get(, 247
GetCalc(, 247
getKey, 246
Goto, 234
GraphStyle(, 240
If, 229
IfThen, 229
IfThenElse, 230
Input, 242
inserting, 249
IS>(, 235
Lbl (Label), 234
Menu(, 236
Output(, 245
Pause, 233
prgm, 238
Prompt, 244
Repeat, 232
Return, 239
Return with subroutines,
251
Send(, 247
SetMenu(, 237
Stop, 239
While, 232
programs
branching, 234
calling, 250
copying, 249
creating new, 224
debugging, 252
definition, 223
editing, 225
entering commands, 226
executing, 251
naming, 224
renaming, 249
steps for creating, 223
–P–
(continued)
programs (continued)
stopping execution, 252
subroutines, 238, 250
Prompt, 244
Pt-Change(
from Graph screen, 202
from Home screen, 204
Pt-Off(
from Graph screen, 202
from Home screen, 204
Pt-On(
from Graph screen, 202
from Home screen, 204
Pxl-Change(, 205
Pxl-Off(, 205
Pxl-On(, 205
pxl-Test(, 206
–Q–
Q
1
(1st quartile median point)
Modified Box plot, 124
Q
1
(statistical result variable),
137
Q
3
(3rd quartile median point)
Modified Box plot, 124
Q
3
(statistical result variable),
137
quadrants, 171, 173
QuadReg (quadratic
regression), 144
QuickZoom, 179
quotation mark, 8
quotient
division, 27
integer division, 28
–R–
r. See correlation coefficient
r (radians), 216
r
2
àR
2
. See coefficient of
determination
radians
DMS, 216
trig, 211
radius, circle, 196
Index
353
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
353 of 12
–R–
(continued)
RAM memory, 254
back up, 261, 263
resetting, 281
rand (random number), 49
randInt( (random integer), 50
RANGER program, 265, 273
Rcl (Recall), 21
with programs, 250
Real (SEND), 256
RealTme
DATA LOGGER, 271
RecallPic, 208
Receive (LINK), 257
RECEIVE (
9
) menu, 257
reciprocal, 29
RegEQ (Regression Equation),
137
regression
exponential (ExpReg), 146
linear (LinReg(ax+b)), 142
quadratic (QuadReg), 144
regression models, 133
relational operators, 32
remainder
integer division, 28
remainder(, 48
Rename (LINK), 259
Repeat, 232
Reset
All RAM, 281
Defaults, 282
Reset (MEMORY Menu), 280
Return, 239
subroutines, 251
right triangle, 210
round, 44
row
pixel, 206
Text(, 198
–S–
sample standard deviation, 131,
136
Scale (pictograph), 113, 117
Scatter plot, 114
Select(, 98
Sci mode setting, 23
scientific notation, 7
–S–
(continued)
scroll
cursor, 11
Home screen, 6
menu items, 13
secondary (
-
) functions, 7
secondary menus, 13
seconds
conversions, 69
seconds (DMS), 218
seed value (random number),
49
SELECT screen (LINK), 258
Select(, 98
Selection cursor
CATALOG, 14
Text editor, 8
send data (LINK), 255
SEND menu, 255
Send(, 247
SendID (SEND), 256
seq(, 99
SetFactors, 186
SetMenu(, 237
Shade(, 193
Simplification mode, 60
simplification signifier ($), 62
sin( (sine), 210
Single mode (constants), 72
slope (a), 140, 142
Smart Graph, 178
software
upgrade, 262
Solve (Equation Solver), 41
Solver, Equation. See Equation
Solver
Sonic probe, 265
SortA( (ascending), 93
SortD( (descending), 93
sorting lists, 93
multiple, 94
space (in text), 8
Spaces Free screen, 277
Speed (units), 69
square, 30
square root, 31
standard deviation
population, 131
sample, 131
354
Index
99Index.doc TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 01/17/02 11:00 AM Printed: 01/17/02 11:20 AM Page
354 of 12
–S–
(continued)
stat plots
adjusting viewing window,
114
Bar graph, 118
defining plots, 109
deselecting Y
n
functions, 109
displaying, 114
drawing on, 188
editors, 111
Histogram, 121
list data, 109
main menu, 109
Modified Box plot, 124
options, defining, 112
Pictograph, 117
Pie chart, 120
Plot1, 109
Plot2, 109
Plot3, 109
PlotsOff, 110
PlotsOn, 110
Scatter plot, 114
steps for defining, 108
tracing, 114
types, selecting, 111
xyLine plot, 114
statistical analyses, 128, 133
stdDev(.
See
standard
deviation
Stop, 239
store (variables), 20
STORE (
2
) menu, 206
StorePic, 207
subroutines, 238, 250
subtraction, 27
sum (addition), 27
sum(, 132
summary points, 136
Sx (statistical result variable),
136
Sy (statistical result variable),
136
system variables, 20, 329
–T–
TABLE SETUP screen, 153
tables
defining functions, 152
definition, 150
–T–
(continued)
tables (continued)
displaying, 154
editing X values, 159
editing Y
n
, 160
setup from Home screen, 161
steps for creating, 151
TABLE SETUP screen, 153
tan( (tangent), 210
TblStart
definition, 153
storing to, 161
Temp probe, 265
Temperature (units), 69
test operations, 32
logic (Boolean) operators, 32
relational operators, 32
Text editor, 7
categorical list elements, 81
naming a program, 224
naming lists, 80
Text(, 197
Text(
from Graph screen, 197
from Home screen, 198
text, entering, 7
TI Connect, 254
TI-GRAPH LINK, 254
Time (units), 69
tracing a graph, 178
controlling increments, 179
transmission errors (LINK), 260
TRANSMIT (
9
) screen, 258
trig calculations, 212
trig functions, 210
Angle mode, 211
graphing, 214
TRIG (
-
u
) menu, 210
–U–
units
angle, 215
Area, 68
converting, 70
DATA LOGGER, 271
GAUGE, 268
Length, 68
Mass
à
Weight, 69
Speed, 69
Temperature, 69
Time, 69
Index
355
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
355 of 12
–U–
(continued)
units (continued)
Volume, 69
unit-to-unit cable, 254
upgrade software, 262
installing, 262
where to find, 262
–V–
variables
recalling, 21
VARS Menu, 329
variables, types of, 20
VARS (
-
}
) Menu, 329
Vars to TI82 (SEND), 256
Vars to TI83 (SEND), 256
Vert (stat plot option), 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Vertical (draw)
from Graph screen, 191
from Home screen, 192
Volt probe, 265
Volume (units), 69
–W–
web site, TI, 262
WeightàMass (units), 69
While, 232
window format, 171
WINDOW values, 171
defining, 173
WINDOW Values Screen, 174
–X–
x1 (summary point), 136
x2 (summary point), 136
x3 (summary point), 136
XFact, 186
Xlist, 112
Histogram, 121
Modified Box plot, 124
Scatter plot, 114
xyLine plot, 114
Xmax, 171, 179
–X–
(continued)
Xmin, 171, 179
Xscl, 171
xth root, 38
xyLine plot, 114
Select(, 98
–Y–
Y= editor, 167
exiting, 169
selecting functions, 168
y=ab
x
, 146
y=ax+b, 142
Manual-Fit, 138
Med-Med, 140
y=ax
2
+bx+c, 144
Y
1
, 167
y1 (summary point), 136
Y
2
, 167
y2 (summary point), 136
Y
3
, 167
y3 (summary point), 136
Y
4
, 167
YFact, 186
y-intercept (b), 140, 142
Ylist, 112
Scatter plot, 114
xyLine plot, 114
Ymax, 171
DATA LOGGER, 271
Ymin, 171
DATA LOGGER, 271
Yscl, 171
Y-Vars (SEND), 256
–Z–
ZBox, 182, 310
ZDecimal, 310
ZInteger, 311
zoom
function graph, 181
ZOOM (
(
) menu, 181
ZoomFit, 312
ZoomIn, 183, 311
SetFactors, 186
ZoomOut, 183, 312
SetFactors, 186
356
Index
73IDXENG.DOC TI-73 Index, English Julie Hewlett Revised: 07/29/98 3:43 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:04 AM Page
356 of 12
–Z–
(continued)
ZoomStat, 114, 313
ZPrevious, 185
ZQuadrantI, 313
ZSquare, 313
ZStandard, 184, 314
ZTrig, 314
73CALC.DOC TI-73, Inside Front Cover Bob Fedorisko Revised: 05/04/98 3:19 PM Printed: 05/19/99 9:18 AM
Page 1 of 1
$CALCDWG.DOC TI-73, Inside Front Cover Bob Fedorisko Revised: 05/04/98 3:19 PM Printed: 02/21/01 3:20
PM Page 2 of 2
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Texas Instruments ti 73 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Texas Instruments ti 73 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 3,14 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info